z

ON-SITE GUID,E
BS 7671:2008 (2011) -I
m
IETWi:ring Regulations
17th Edition
Incorporating Amendment No. 1

JET Wiring Regulations Seventeenth Edition

BS 7671 :2008 (201 l ) Requirements for El1ectrical Installations
m
::g
=a Published by The Institution of Engineering and Technology, London, United Kingdom

:;a The Institution of Engineering and Technology is registered as a Charity in England & Wales
(no. 2H014) and Scotland (no. SC038698).

:a
The Institution of Engineering and Technology is the new
institution formed by the joining together of the IEE (The
Institution oi Electrical Engineers) and the IIE (The Institution
of Incorporated Engineers). The new lnstftution is the inheritor
:;B of the IEE brand and all its products and services, sudh as this
one. which we hope you will find useful. The IEE is a registered
trademark of the Institution of Engineering and Technology.

The paper used to print this

jJ --ble
FSC
MIX
P1-ln>m
IIOUroN
publication is made from
certified sustainable forestry
sources.
_,., , FSce C0,3669

C 1992, 1995., 1998, 2002, 2004 The Institution of Electrical Engineers

Cl 2008, 20! 1 The Institution of Engineering and Technology
First published 1992 (0 85296 537 O)
Reprinted (with amendments) May 1993
Reprinted (with amendments to Appendix 9) July 1993
Reprinted (with amendments) 1994

:a Revised edition incorporating Amendment No. l to BS 7671:1992) 1995

Reprinted (with new cover) 1996
Revised edition (incorporating Amendment No. 2 to BS 7671:1992) 1998
Second edition (incorporating Amendment No. l to 8S 767l :2001) 2002 (0 85296 987 2)
Reprinted (with new cover) 2003
Third edition (incorporating Amendment No. 2 to BS 7671 :2001) 2:004 (0 86341 374 9)

=a Fourth edition (incorporating BS 7671 :2008) 2008 (978-0-86341 854-9)

Reprinted (with amendments) October 2008
Fifth edition (incorporating Amendment No 1 to BS 7671 :2008) September 201 l
This publication is copyri8ht under the Beme Convention and the Universal Copyright Convention. All
rights reseived. Apart from any fair dealing for the purposes of research or private study, or criticism
or review, as permitted under the Copyright, Designs and Patents Act, 1988, this publication may be
reproduced, stored or transmitted, in any form or by any means, only with the prior permission in
writing of the publishers, or in the case of reprographic reproduction in accordance with the terms of
=9 licences issued by the Copyright Licensing Agency. Enquiries concerning reproduction outside those
terms should be sent to the publishers at lhe Institution of Engineering and Technology, Michael
Faraday House, Six Hills Way, Stevenage, SG l 2AY, United Kingdom.
Copies of this publication may be obtained from:
PO Box 96, Stevenage, SGl 2S0, UK
Tel: +44 (0)1438 767328
Email: sales@theietorg
www.theiet.org/publishing/books/wir-reg/
While the author, pubUsher and contributors believe that the information and guidance given in
this work are correct, all parti es must rely upon their own skill and judgement when malcing use of
them. The author, publisher and contributors do not assume any liability to anyone for any loss or
=9 damage caused by any error or omission in the work, whether such an error or omission is the result
of negligence or any other cause. Where ,reference is made to legislation it is not to be considered as

:;a legal advice. Any and all such liability is disdaimed.

ISBN 978- l-84919-287-3

==3 Typeset in the UK by Phoenix Photosetting, Chatham
Printed in the UK by Polestar Wheatons, Exeter
::g
=a
:;a
:a
:;B

Coope:rating organisations 6
Prefa0e 7
Foreword 9
Section I Introduction 11
1.1 Scope 11
1.2 Building Regulations 12
1.3 Basic information required 14
:a Section l
2.1
The electric-al supply
General layout of equipment
15
15
2.2 Functi.011 of components 17
2.3 Separation •Of gas installation pipevvork from other services 18

=a 2.4 Portable generators

Section l Prot e ction1
19
23
3.1 Types of protective device 23
3.2 Overtoad protection 23
3.3 Fault current protection 23
3.4 Protection against electric shock 24
3.5 Automatic disconnection 25
=9 3.6
3.7
Residual current devices (RCDs) 26
31
Surge protective devices (SPDs)
Section 4 Earthing and bonding 39
4.1 Protective earthing 39
4.2 Legal requirements 39
4.3 Main protective bonding of metallic services 39
4.4 Earthing conductor and main protective bonding conductor
cross-sectiona I areas 40
4.5 Main protective bonding of plastic services 41
=9 4.6 Supplementaiy equipotential bonding 42
4.7 Additional protection - supplementary equipotential bonding 42
:;a 4.8 Supplemental)' bonding of plastic pipe installations
4.9 Earth electrode
43
43
4.1 o Types of earth electrode
==3 4.11 Typical earthing arrangements for various types of earthing system
43
44

On-Site Guide IS
e The Institutionof Engineering and Tedlnorogy
::g
=a Section 5
5.1 Isolation
lsolation and .switching 45
45
:;a 5.2
5.3
Switching off for mechanical maintenance
Emergency S\l\l'itching
46
46
:a 5.4
5.5
Functional switching
Firefignter's switch
47
47

:;B Section 6
6.1
Labelling
Additional protection
49
49
6.2 Retention of a dangerous electrical charge 49
6.3 'Mlere �he operator cannot observe the operation of sv.ritchgear and controlgear 49
6.4 Unexpected presence of nominal voltage exceeding 230 V 49
6.5 Connection of earthing and bonding conductors 50
6.6 Purpose of s'Nitchgear and controlgear 50
6.7 Identification of protective devices so
6.8 Identification of isolators 50
6.9 Isolation requiring more than one device so
6.1 0 Periodic inspection and testing 51
6.11 Diagrams 51
6.12 Residual current devices 51

:a
6.13 Warning notice - non-standard colours 52
6.14 Warning notke - alternative supplies 52
6.15 Warning notice - high protective conductor OJrrent 53
6.16 Warning notice - photovoltaic .systems 54
Section 7 Fina11 drcuits
=a
55
7. 1 Final circuits 55
7.2 Standard final circuits 68
7.3 Installation considerations 73
7.4 Proximity to electrical and other services 75
7.5 Earthing requirements for the installation of equipment having high protective
conductor current n
7.6 Electrical supplies to furniture 79
=9 Section 8 locations containing a bath or shower 81
8.1 Summary of requirements 81
8.2 Shower cubide in a room used for other purposes 84
8.3 Underfloor heating systems 84
Section 9 Inspection and testing 85
9.1 Inspection and testing 85
9.2 Inspection 85
9.3 Testing 87

=9 Section 1o Guidance on initial testing of insta'llations

10. 1 Safety and equipment
89
89
:;a 10.2 Sequence of tests
10.3 Test procedures
90
90

==3 Section 11 Operation of RCDs

11.1 Genera\ test procedure
105
106

14
11.2 General-purpose RCCBs to BS 4293 106

On-Site Guide
e The Institutionof Engineeringand Tedlnorogy
::g
=a 11.3 General�purpose RCCBs to BS EN 67008 or RCBOs to BS EN 61009 106

:;a
11.4 RCD protected socket-outlets to BS 7288 106
11.5 Additional protection 106
11 .6 Integral test device 107
:a 11. 7 Multipole RCDs
Appendix A Maximum demand and diversity
107
109
:;B Appendix B Maximum permissible measured earth fault loop impedance 113

Appendix C Selection of tyi,es of ,cable for particular uses and extemal

influences 121

Appendix D Methods of support for cables,. conductors and wiring systems 127

Appendix E Cable ca pacities of conduit and trunking 133

Appendix F current-ca rrying capacities and voltage drop for c,opper

condudors 139
Apjpendix G Certification and reporting 151
G1 Introduction 151
G2 Certmcati,on 151
G3 Reporting l52
:a G4 Introduction to Model Forms from BS 76711 :2008(2011) 153
Ap,pendix H Standard circuit arrangements for household and similar
installations 173
H1 Introduction 173
=a H2 Final cirauits using socket-outlets complying with BS 1363-2
and fused connection units complying with BS 1363-4 173
H3 Radial final cirouits using 16 A socket-Outlets complying with
BS EN 60309-2 (BS 4343) 176
H4 Cooker circuits in household and simi!ar premises 176
H5 Water and space heating 177
H6 Height of switches, socket-outlets and controls 177
=9 H7 Number of socket'"Outlets 178
Ap;pendiix I Resistance of copper and a'luminium conductors 181
Ap1pendbc J Selection of devices fo.r isolation and switching 185

Appendix K Identification of conductors 187

K1 Introduction 187
K2 Addition or alteration to an existing installation 189
K3 Switch wires in a new installation or an addition or alteration to an
existing installation 189
=9 K4 Intermediate and � w a y switch wires in a new installation or an addition
or alteration to an existing installation 190
:;a KS line conductors in a new installation or an addition or alteration to an
existing installation 190
K6 O,anges to cable core colour identification 190
==3 K7 Addition or alteration to a d.c. installation 191

15
Index 193

On-Site Guide
e The Institution of Engineering and Tedlnorogy
::g
=a
:;a Cooperating
:a
:;B
organisations
The IET acknowledges the invaluable contribution made by the following organisations
in the preparation •Ofthis guide.
BEAMA Installation Ltd. ERA Technology Ltd
P. Sayer IEng M I H GCGI M.W. Coates BEng
British Cables Assodation Electrical Safety Council
I. Collings BEng (Hons) CEng MIMechE G. Gundry
M. Gauoher Health and Safety Executive
C.K. Reed ilEng MIET
:a
K. Morton BSc CEng FIET
British Electrotechnical & Allied IHEEM
Manufacturers Association Ltd Eur Ing P. Harris BEng(Hons) FIHEEM MIEE
P. Still MIEE MCIBSE
British Gas/Micropower Council
=a
Institution of Engineering and
P. Gibson Technology
British Standards Institution G.D. Cronshaw CEng AET
P. Calver - Chairman BSI FW0/3 P.E. Donnachie BSc CEng FlET
A.S. Khan MEng(Hons) MIET MIEEE - PEL Eur Ing D. Locke BEng(Hons) CEng MIET
37/1, GEL 81 MIEEE
6ur Ing L. Markwell MSc BSc(Hons) CEng
City & Ciuilds of London Institute MIEE MCIBSE LCGI LCC
H.R. Lovegrove IEng FIET
=9 Department for Co.mmunities and Local
I.M. Reeve BTech CEng MIET
National Inspection Council for
Gov,ernment Electrical Installation Con.trading
K. Broml e y lM. Maltby Smith BSc(Hons) PG Dip Cert
Electrical Contractors' .Association Ed IEng MIET
C. Flynn IEng MIET (Elec) CGI NAPlT
Electrical Contractors· Association of W.R. Allan BEng(Hons)
Scotland t/a SELECT Safety Assessment Federation
R. Cairney IEng MIET I. Trueman CEng MSOE MBES MIET
M.M. Dllncan IEng MIET MILP
=9 ENA
Society of Electrical and Mechanical
Engineers serving Local Government

:;a T. Haggis
ESSA
C.J. Tanswell CEng MIET MCIBSE
UHMA
P. Yates MSc MIEE Dr s. Newberry
==3

I'
Revised, compiled and edited
M. Coles BEng(Hons) MIEE, The Institution of Engineering and Technology, 2011

On-Site Guide
e The Institutionof EngineeringandTedlnorogy
::g
=a
:;a
:a
:;B

The On-Site Guide is one of a number of publications prepared by the IET to provide
guidance on certain aspects of BS 7671 :2008(2011) Requirements for Electrical
Jnstollotions (/ET Wiring Regulations, 17th Edition, incorporating Amendment No. 7).
BS 7671 is a joint publication of the British Standards Institution and the Institution of
Engineering and Technology.
110.1 The scope generally follows that of BS 7671. The Gu;de includes material not induded in
8S 7671, provides background t o the intentions of BS 7671 and gives other sources of
informat;on, however, it does not ensure compliance with BS 7671. It is a simple guide
:a to the requirements of BS 7671 and electrical installers should always consult BS 7671
to satisfy themselves of compliance.
It is expected that persons carrying out work in accordance with this guide will be

=a
competent to do so.
HSR25, Electrical installations in the United Kingdom which comply with the JET Wiring
EWR Regulations, 85 7671, must comply with all relevant statutory regulations, such as the
Regulation
16
Electricity at Work Regulations 1989, the Building Regulations and, where relevant, the
Electricity Safety, QuaHty and Continuity Regulations 2002 and Amendment 2006.
114.1 It cannot be guaranteed that 18S 7671 complies with all relevant statutory regu'lations.
=9 It is, therefore, essential to establish which statutory and other appropriate regulations
115. l
apply and to install according1y; for example, an installation in licensed premises may
have requirements which differ from or are additional to BS 7671 and these will take
precedence.

=9
:;a
==3

On-Site Guide
e The Institution of Engineering and Tedlnorogy
I'
::g
=a
:;a
:a
:;B

:a

=a

=9

=9
:;a
==3

On-Site Guide
e The Institutionof EngineeringandTedlnorogy
18
::g
=a
:;a
:a
:;B

Part 1 This Guide is concerned with Hmited application of BS 7671 in accordance with paragraph
1.1: Scope.
BS 7671 and the On-Site Guide are not design guides.
It is essential to prepare a design and/or schedule of the work to be done prior to
commencement or alteration of ar1 electrical installation and to provide all necessary
information and operating instrnctions of any equipment suppHed to the user on
completion.
:a Any specification should set out rt-le detailed design and provide sufficient information to
enable competent persons to carry out the installation and commissioning.
The specification must provide for all the commissioning procedures that will be required

=a
and for the production of any operation and maintenance manual and building logbook.
The persons or organ,sations who may be concerned in the preparation of the
specification indude:
the Designer(s)
► the lnstaller(s)
the Electricity Distributor
=9 ►
►
the Installation Owner and/or User
the Architect
► the Local Building Control Au;thority/Standards division or Approved Inspector
► the Fire Prevention Officer
► the CDM Coordinator
► all Regulatory Authorities
► any Licensing Authority
► the Health and Safety Executive.
In producing the specification, advice should be sought from the installa,tion owner and/
=9 or user as to the intended use. Often, such as in a speculative building, the detailed
intended use is unknown. In those circumstances the specification and/or the operation
:;a and maintenance manual and butlding logbook must set out the basLS of use for which
the instaUation is suitable.
==3 Precise details of each item of equipment should be obtained from the manufacturer
and/or supplier and compliance with appropriate standards confirmed.

On-Site Guide
e The Institutionof EngineeringandTedlnorogy
19
::g
=a The opera,tion and maintenance manual must include a description of how d'le installed
system is to operate and must include all commissioning records. The manual should also
:;a include manufacturers' technical data for all items of switchgear, luminaires, accessories,
etc. and any special instructions that may be needed.
:a Part L 2010 of the Building Regulations of England and Wales requires that building
owners or operators are provided with summary information relating to a new or
:;B refurbished building wh[ch includes building services information and the maintenance
requirements in a building logbook. Information on how to develop and assemble a
building logbook can be obtained from CIBSE:
Tel.: 020 8772 3618
Website: www.cibse.org
Address: CIBSE
222 Balham High Road
London
SW12 9BS
The Health and Safety at Work etc. Act 1974 Section 6 and the Construction (Design
and Management) Regulations 2007 are concerned with the provision of information.
Guldance on the preparati.on of technical manuals is given in BS 4884 series Technical
:a manuals and BS 4940 series Technical information on construction products and
services. The size and complexity of the installation will dictate the nature and extent of
the manual.

=a

=9

=9
:;a
==3

On-Site Guide
e The Institution of Engineering and Tedlnorogy
I'
::g
=a
:;a
:a
:;B

I.I Scope
This Guide is for installers (for s;mplicity, the term installer has been used for electricians
and electrical. installers). It covers the following installations:
a domestic and similar installations, including off-peak supplies, supplies to
associated garages, outbuildings and the like
b small industrial and commercial single- and three-phase instanations.

:a Part 7 N01TE: Special Installations or Locatfons (Part 7 o,f 85 7671) are generally exduded from
this Guide, as are installations for electric vehicle charging equipment. Advice, however,
is given on installations in locations containing a bath or shower and underfloor heating
installations.

=a 313.l
This Guide is restricted to installations:
at a supply frequency of 50 hertz
ii at a nominal voltage of 230 V a.c. single-phase or 400/230 V a.c. three-phase
iii supplied through a, distributor's cut-out having a fuse or fuses rated at 100 A
or less to one of the following standards:
- BS 88-2
- BS 88-3
=9 - BS 88-6
- BS 1361 Type U
NO·TE: BS 1361 was withdrawn in March 2010 and replaced by BS 88-3; BS 88-6 was
withdrawn in March 2010 and replaced by BS 88-:2 but fuses complying with these
withdrawn standards wHI be found in existing insta'llations for many years to come.
iv typical maximum values of earth fault loop impedance, Ze, for TN earthing
arrangements outside the consumer's installation commonly quoted by
=9 distributors aire as follows:
► TN-C-S arrangement - 0.35 Q, see Figure 2.1 (i)

:;a TN-S arrangement-0.8 O, see Figure 2.l(ii)

For a TT arrangement., 21 Q is the ,usual stated maximum resistance of the
==3
Table 41.5
542.2.4 distributor's earth electrode at the supply transformer.. The resistance of the
consumer's installat;on earth electrode should be as low as pract;cable and a
value exceeding 200 Q may not be stable.

On-Site Guide 1 1 1
e The Institutionof EngineeringandTedlnorogy
::g
=a This Guide also contains information which may be required in general installation work,

:;a
for exampIle, conduit and trunking capacities, bending radH of cables, etc.
The Guide introduces the use of standard circuits, which a;re discussed in Section 7,

:a
i
however, because of s mplification, this Guide may not give the most economical result.
This Guide is not a replacement for BS 7671 which should always be consulted.
:;B Defined terms according to Part 2 of BS 7671 are used.
In compliance with the definiti.ons of BS 7671, throughout this Guide the term line
ronductor is used instead of phase conductor and live part is used to refer to a conductor
or conductive part intended to be energised in normal use, induding a neutral conductor.
The terminals of electrical equipment are identified by the letters L, N and E (or PE).
Further infonnation is available in the series of Guidance Notes published by the IET.
NO,JE: For darification:
the distributor of electricity ls deemed to be the organisation owning fhe
electrical supply equipment, and
the supplier of e'lectricity is the organisation from whom electricity is
:a purchased.

1.2 Building Regulations

=a Refer to the IET publicatio:n Electridan's Guide to the Building .Regulations for more in-
depth guidance on electrical installations in dwellings.

1.2.1 lhe Building Regulations of England and Wales

Persons carrying out electrical work in dwellings must comply with the Building
Regulations of England and Wales, in particular Part P (Electrical safety - dwellings).
=9 Persons responsible for work within the scope of Part P of the Building Regulations may
also be responsible for ensuring compl1iance with other Parts of the Building Regulations,
where relevant, particularly if there are no other parties invo'lved with the work. Building
Regulations requirements relevant to installers carrying out el.ectrical work include:
Part A Structure: depth of chases in walls and size of holes and notches in floor and
roof joists;
Part B Fire safety: fire safety of certain electrical installations; provision of fire alarm
and fire detection systems; fire resistance of penetrations through floors and
=9 Part C
walls;
Site preparation and reslstance to moisture: moisture resistance of cable
:;a Part D
penetrations through external walls;
Toxic substances;
Part E Resistance to the passage of sound: penetrations through floors and walls;
==3 Part F Ventilation: ventilation rates for dwellings;
Part G Sanitation, hot water safety and water efficiency;

On-Site Guide 1 1 2
e The Institutionof EngineeringandTedlnorogy
::g
=a Part J Heat producing appliances;

:;a
Part K Protection from fuUing;
Part L Conservation of fuel and power: energy efficient lighting;
Part M Access to and use of buildings: heights of switcnes, socket-outlets and
:a Part P
consumer units;
Electrical safet y- dwellings.
:;B NO,fE: Guidance is available for each part of the Building Regulations in the form
of Approved Documents which can be freely downloaded from the Department for
Communities and Local Government (DCLG) website: www.planningportal.gov.uk

1.2.2 'Ille Building (Scotland) Regulations 2004

The detailed requ;rements are given in the Technical Standards for compliance with the
BuHdtng (Scotland) Regulations.
Guidance on how to achieve compliance with these Standards is given in two Scottish
BuHding Standards Technica\ Handbooks - Domestic and Non-domestic.
These handbooks contain recommendations for electrical installations including the
following:
:a -
-
compliance with 8S 7671
minimum number of socket-outlets in dwellings
- minimum number of lighting points in dwellings
- minimum illumination levels in common areas of domestic buildings, for

=a -
example, blocks of flats
a range of mounting heights of switches and socket-outlets, etc
- separate switching for concealed socket-outlets, for example, behind white
goods in kitchens
- conseivation of fuel and power in buildings.
With regard to electrical installations in Scodand, the requirements of the above are
deemed to be satisfied by complying with BS 7671.
=9 NOTE.: The handbooks may be obtained from the Building Standards Division of the
Scottish Government from website:
www.sootland.gov.u k/Topics/Built-Environment/Building/:Building-standards/
publications/p ubtech

1 2.J lhe Building Regulations of Northem Ireland

The Building Regulations (Northern Ireland) 2000 (as amended) apply.

=9 NOTE: Information can be obtained from the website: www.buildingcontrol-ni.com

:;a
==3

On-Site Guide 1 1 3
e The Institutionof EngineeringandTedlnorogy
::g
=a 313.1 1.3 Basic information required
:;a Before starting work on an installation which requires a new electrical supply, the installer
should establish the following information with the local distributor:
:a the number of live conductol"S required by the design
ii the distributor's requirement for cross-sectional area and length of meter tails
:;B iii the maximum prospective fault current (lpf) at the supply term;nals
iv the typical maximum earth fault loop impedance (Ze) of the earth fault path
outside the consumer's installation
v the type and rating of the distributor's fusible out-out or protective device
544. l vi the distributor's requirement regarding the size of main protective bonding
conductors
vii the conductor arra ngement and system earthing
312 viii the arrangements for the incoming cable and metering.
132.16 For additions and alterations to existing installations, installers should satisfy themselves
as to the suitability of the supply, the distributor's equipment and the earthing
arrangements.

:a

=a

=9

=9
:;a
==3

On-Site Guide 114

c The lnstirution of 8'1gineering and Technofogy
::g
=a
:;a The electrical
:a
:;B
supply
J.1 General layout of equipment
The general layout of the equipment at the service position is shown in Figures 2.1 (i) to
2.1 (iii) including typical protective conductor cross-sectional areas.

'f' figure 2.1(1) TN-C-S (PME) earthing arrangement

circuit protective metal water metal gas

:a
conductors pipe pipe
consumer's tails
L.A:BEl (see Figure 6.5)
elect:rieiity
isolator
switch

=a RCBOs
•••••
10mm2

main switch

=9 16mm1
lOOA_ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _
gas meter

wate< gas
service service
pipe pipe

=9 NOTE: An electricity isolator switch may not always be insta11ed by the distributor.

:;a
==3

On-Site Guide 1 1 5
e The Institutionof EngineeringandTedlnorogy
T Figure 2.1(11) TN-S earthing arrangement (cable sheath earth)
drc.uit protectJve metal water metillgas
conductors pipe pipe
consumer', tllib

-■
'""' efe<ttiCity
tsolatot
SWilCh

RCBOs
■

main switch

16mrw
gas fflffer

water gas
service service
pipe pipe

NOTE: An electricity isolator switch may not always be installed by the distributor.

T Figure l . I (iii> T I earthing arrangement (no distributor's earth)

circuit proie«ive metal Wllter metal gas
corid\Jct.on pipe pipe
consumer's tillls
LABEL (see flg11re 6.5)
-■
"""
10nvn1
• • t • •

• . . !! • •

main switch

gas meter

LABEL [see Figure65)

NOTE I : An electricity isolator switch may not always be insta,!ed by the distributor.

On-Site Guide
e The Institutionof EngineeringandTedlnorogy
I'
::g
=a 542.3. 1 NOTE 2: See Table 4.4(ii) for further information regarding the sizing of the earthing conductor for a TT
earthing arrangement.
:;a
:a 2.2 Fundion. of components
2.2.1 Distributor's cut-out
:;B This will be sealed to prevent the fuse being withdrawn by unauthorised persons. When
the meter tails and consumer unit are installed in accordance with the requirements •Of
the distributor, the cut-out may be assumed to provide fault current protection up to the
consumer's main switd,.
As the cut-out is the property of the distributor, installers must not cut seals and withdraw
cut-out fuses without permission. When removal of the cut-out for isolation is required,
the supplier of electricity should be contacted to arrange disconnection and subsequent
reconnection.
NOTE: The supplier of electricity may not be the same organisation as the distributor.

2 ..2.2 Electricity meter

:a The terminals will be sealed by the meter owner to prevent interference by unauthorised
persons.

l.2.3 Meter tails

=a 521.10.1 Meter tails are part o•f the consumer's installation and should be insulated and sheathed
or insulated and enclosed within containment., for example, conduit or trunking. Meter
tails are prov ided by the installer and are the responsibility of tlie owner of the electrical
installation.
514.3 Polarity should be indicated by the colour of the ;nsulation and the minimum cable
size should be 25 mm 2• The distributor may specify the maximum length of meter tails
=9 between the meter and the consumer unit in addition to the minimum cross-sectional
area (see 1.3). In some cases., the distributor may require an electricity isolator switch
(see 2.2.4).
434.3(iv) Where the meter tails are protected against fault current by the distributor's cut-out, the
method of instaHation, maximum length and minimum cros sectional area must comply
with the requirements of the distributor.
522.6.101 Where meter taHs are buried in walls, further protection is required (see 7.3.2).

=9 2.2 ..4 Electricity isolator switch

Suppl,iers may provide and install an electricity isolator switch between the meter and
:;a the c-0nsumer unit, labelled as Electridty isolator switch in Figures 2.1 (i) to 2.1 (iii). This
double-pole switch pennits the supply to the installation to be interrupted without
==3 withdrawing the distributor's wt-out fuse.

On-Site Guide 1 1 7
e The Institution of Engineering and Tedlnorogy
::g
=a 2.2.5 Consumel's controlgear
:;a 530.3.4 A consumer unit (to BS EN 60439-3 Annex ZA) is for use on singie-phase installations
up to 100 A and may include the following components:

:a a double-pole isolator
fuses, circuit-breakers or RCBOs for protection against overload and fault
:;B currents
RCDs for additional protection against electric shock
► RCDs for fault protection.
ltematively, a separate main switch and dIBtribution board may be provided.

2.3 Separation of gas installation pipework

from other services
Gas instaUation pipes must be spaced:
a at least 150 mm away from electricity meters, controls, electrical switches or
socket-outlets, distribution boards or consumer units;
:a 528.3.4
b at least 25 mm away from electricity supply and distribution cables.
(The cited distances are quoted within BS 689l:2005+A2:2008 Installation of low
Note pressure gas pipework in domestic premises, clause 8.16.2.)

=a
-
"Y Figure 2.3 Separation from gas pipes and gas metering equipment
Separation of at least 25 ITVT1 to be
' ;..,_ proYlded b domestic pipework up
' ,
' to 35 mm. For pipework over 35 mm
then SO mm separation Is requlred.

Theseparatlondlstanrecan be reduced
if the gas pipe Is PVC wrapped or a barrier
of etectrkally ln5Ulatltig material Is Interposed

=9 4 - supply c.able or
dlstributioo cable

1minimum
.,_ diSunce

=9
150mm

:;a
Separation of at least 150 mm to be provided,
between a gas meter (and a = l a t e d fittl ng s) and
electrical equipment. unless a non-c-0mbustlble
barrier of insulatlng materl.a'I ls Interposed

==3

On-Site Guide
c The lnstirution of 8'1gineering and Technofogy
I'
::g
=a 2.4 Portable generators
:;a 551.4.4 It is recognised that generators will be used occasionally as a temporary or short-term
means of supplying electricity, for example:
:a ► use on a construction site
► used to supply stalls on street markets
:;B ► external gathering or function attended by the general public, such as a
country show.
Temporary generators can be divided into two dasses, i.e. portable and mobile:
► portable generators with an electrical output rating of up to l 0 kVA are used
for small-scale work for short-term use, i.e. less than one day, and
► mobile generators are those used for longer per;ods and can be in excess of
lO kVA output.
This guide considers three scenarios relating to the use of portable generators; see 2.4.1
to 2.4.3.
551 For information relating to the permanent use of generators see IET Guidance Notes 5
and 7 and Section 551 of 8S 7671:2008(2011).
:a Where generators are used to supply concession vehicles, such as burger vans, see Section
717 Mobi,le and Transportable Units of BS 7671 :2008(2011) and IET Guidance Note 7.

2.4-.1 Portable generator used with a floating ,earth

=a Sma'II portable generators, ranging in output from 0.3 kVA to 10 kVA single-phase often
have a floating earth, i.e. there is no connection between the chassis and/or eartih
e-onnection of the socket-ou et of the unit to the neutral of the generator winding. The
ends of the generator winding are brought out to one or more three-pin socket-outlets
which should conform to BS EN 60309-2. The earth socket-tube of the socket-outlet(s)
551.4.4 are usually connected internally to the frame of the generator only; see Figure 2.4.1.
=9 This arrangement is a form of electricalseparation,where basic protection is provided by basic
insulation of Hve parts and fault protection is provided by simple separation of the separated
circuit from other cirruits and from Earth. The requirements for electrical separation can be
413 found in Section 413 of BS 7671 where one item of equipment is supplied and Regulation
418.3 41.8.3 where more than one item of equipment is supplied by the separated circuit

It is extremely important to note that a portable generator used with floating earth should
only be used to supply equipment ,n the following permutations:
► one or more items of Class II equipment
=9 ► one item of Class I equipment
one or more items of Class II and one item of Class I equipment.
:;a
►

The use of only Class I equipment, however, is preferable.

==3 More than one item of Class I equipment should not be used simultaneously as faults

I'
can be presented as voltages and operati ves can provide a path for current flowing
between exposed-conductive-parts of faulty electr:ica'I equipment.

On-Site Guide
e The Institution of Engineering and Tedlnorogy
::g
=a T Figure :Z.4.1 Portable generator used with a floating earth

:;a
:a
:;B C1.1rrenN.1sing
equipment

Socket-outlet
with overcurrent
protection

Generator

2.4-.2 Portable generator used without reference to the

general mass of the earth
551.4.4 Where more than one item of Class I equipment is to be supplied by a single-phase
portable generator, 1t is important to ensure that the earth connections of the socket-
oudets at the generator are connected to the neutral of the generator winding in addition
:a to the chassis or frame of the generator. See Figure 2.4.2.
Such a configura,tion will provide a return path for any fault current caused by contact
between live parts and exposed-conductive-parts of the connected equipment. If this

=a
method of supply is used, extreme care should be taken to ensure that there is no
intended or casual interconnection with any other electrical system, such as extraneous-
conductive-parts or exposed-conductive-parts from other electrical systems.
RCD protection at 30 mA is required for all circuits supplied in this manner.

T Figure 2.4.2 Generator supplying more than one item of equipment

=9

Socket-outlets
=9 ---------------
Generator
with overcurrent
protection and ROD
protection at 30 rnA
•
:;a •
==3

On-Site Guide 1 2 0
c The lnstirutionof 8'1gineering and Technofogy
::g
=a 2.4.3 Portable generator referenced to the general mass
:;a BS 7430:
of the earth
Where there are extraneous-conductive-parts or exposed-conductive-parts from other
:a 1998 e[ectrical systems present, generator reference earthing, by means of an earth electrode
to the general mass of the earth, should be instaUed. See Figure 2.4.3(i).

:;B Note that this does not create a TT supply arrangement; the supply will be TN-S in form
from the generator, the neutral or star point being referenced to the general mass of the
earth.
Where an earth electrode is supplied it will need to be tested by the standard method
using a proprietary earth electrode resistance tester; see 10.3.5.2.
Note that an earth fault loop impedance tester cannot be used for this test as the
earth electrode is not used as a means of earthing, it is used to reference the portable
generator to the general mass of the earth and does not form part of the earth loop.
As the earth e'lectrode is used for referencing and not as a means of earthing, its
resistance shou'ld, ideally, be less than 200 0 .
Table 54.l If buried, generator reference earthing and/or bonding conductors should be sized
543.3.1 in accordance with Tabl.e 54.1 and suitably protected in accordance with Regulation
543.3.l For example, a 16 mm 2 conductor would generally be adequate for short-term
use where no mechanical protection is provided.

=a . - Figure :Z.4.3{1) Generator reference earthing - using earth electrode

=9
\ ------==---
t----= Generator
-So-ck_e_t·o-u-tle-ts
with overcurrent
protection and ROD
protection at 30 mA

=9
:;a
Earth electrode

==3

On-Site Guide 1 2 1
e The Institutionof EngineeringandTedlnorogy
::g
=a Where restrictions, such as concreted/paved areas or the portable generator is being
used some distance above ground level, make it impossible t o install an earth electrode,
:;a simultaneously accessible metal parts, i.e. accessible extraneous-conductive-parts and/
or exposed-conductive-parts from other electrical systems, may be bonded to the main
:a earthing terminal of the generator. See Figure 2.4.3(ii).
Where separate accessible extraneous-conductive-parts and/or exposed-conductive-
:;B parts from other electirical, systems are connected together, protective conductors can
544.1. 1 be si,zed in ac-eordance with Regulation 544.1.1. For example, a 16mm2 conductor would
generaUy be adequate for short-term use \Nii ere no mechanical protection is provided.

'f' Figure 2.4.J(li) Generator reference earthing- connection of extraneous- and/

or exposed-conductive-parts where the installation of an earth
elec trode is not possible

:a
--- ----------rl
.,i:;.,,-_ --- ...... --,.--'-<-
Socket-outlets
Generator with overcurrent
protectlon and RCO

=a
protectlon at 30 mA

=9

=9
:;a
==3

c
On-Site Guide
The lnstirutionof 8'1gineeringandTechnofogy
122
::g
=a
:;a
:a
:;B

3.1 Types o f protedive device

The consumer unit (or distribution board) contains devices for the protection of
distribution circurts and final cirruits against:
433 i overload
434 ii short-circuit
434
iii earth fault.

:a 434
Functions i and Hare carr,ied out usually by one device, Le. a fuse or circuit-breaker.
Function iii may be carried out by the fuse or dro.Jit-breaker provided for functions i and
411 ii or by an RCD.

=a
An RCBO, being a unit with a combined circuit-breaker and RCD, will carry out functions
i, ii and iii.

Appx3 3.2 Overl'oad protedion

533.l
Overload protection will be provided by the use of any of the following devices:

=9 ►
►
fuses to 8S 88-2, :SS 88-3, 8S 88-6, 8S 1361 and BS 3036
miniature circuit-breakers to BS 3871-1 types 1, 2 and 3
► cirouit-breakers to BS EN 60898 types 8 1 C and D, and
► residual current circuit-breakers with integral overcurrent protection (RCBOs)
to BS EN 61009-1 and IEC 62325.

3.3 Fau,lt current protedion

When a consumer unit to BS EN 60439-3 or BS 5486:Part 13 or a fuseboard having
=9 fuse'links to BS 88-2 or BS 88-6 or BS 1361 is used, then fault current protection \Nillbe
given by the overload protective device.
:;a For other protective devices the breaking capacity must be adequate for the prospective

==3 fault current at that point.

On-Site Guide
e The Institutionof EngineeringandTedlnorogy
12:S
::g
=a 3.4 Protection agains,t electric shock
:;a J.4.1 Au,tomatic disconnection of supply
:a 411 Automatic disconnection of supply (ADS) is the most the common method of protection
411.l against electric shock. There are two elements to automatic disconnection of supply,
basic protection and foultprotection.
:;B
4n,2 3.4.1.1Basic protection
41 1.1 Basic protection is the physical barrier between persons/livestock and a live part.
416 Examples of basic pro tection are:

416.l ► electrical insulation

416.2 endosures and barriers.
s21.10.1 It follows that single-core non-sheathed insulated conductors must be protected by
conduit or trunk,ng and be terminated within a suitab'le enclosure.
415.1.1 A 30 mA ROD m a y be provided to give additional protection against contact with live
415.1.2 parts but must not be used as primary protection.

:a 411.3 3.4.1.2 Fault p,rotection

411.1 Fault protection comprises:
411.3.1.1 protective earthing,

=a 411.3.1.2
411.3.2
►
►
protective equipotential bonding, and
automatic disconnection in case of a fault.
Fault protection is provided by Hmiting the magnitude and duration of voltages that
may appear under earth fault conditions between simultaneously accessible exposed-
c.onductive-parts of equipment and between them and extraneous-conductive-parts or
earth.

=9 3 . 4 . 2 Other methods of protection against electric shock

410.3.3 In addition to automatic disconnection of supply, BS 7671 recognises other methods of
protection against electric shock.

414 3.4.J SELVand PELV

SELV

Separated extra-low voltage (SELV) systems:

=9 414.3 ► are supplied from isolated safety sources such as a safety isolating
transformer to BS EN 61558-2-6
:;a ► have no live part connected to earth or the protective conductor of another
system
==3 414.4.l ►
►
have basic insulation from other SELV and PELV circuits
have double or reinforced insulat;on or basic insulation plus earthed metallic
screening from LV drcuits

On-Site Guide 1 2 4
c The lnstirutionof 8'1gineering and Technofogy
::g
=a 414.4.4 ► have no exposed-conductive-parts connected to earth or to exposed-

:;a
conductive-parts or protective conductors ,of another circuit.
PELV

:a 414.4.1 Protective extra-low vo'ltage (PELV) systems must meet all the requirements for SELV,
except that the circuits are not electrically separated from earth.
:;B 414.4.5 For SELV and PELV systems basic protection need not be provided if voltages do not
exceed those given in Table 3.4.3.

T Table 3.4.3 SELV and PELV basic protection voltage limits

location SEil/ and PEil/

Dry areas 25 V a.c. or 60 V d.,c
lmmened equipment Further protection required at all voltages
Loca.tions containing a bath or shower, Further protection required at all voltages
swimming pools, saunas
Other . . . 12 V a.c. or 30 V d.c.

:a
411
:J.S .Automatic disconnedion
3.5.1 Standard circuits
=a For the standard final circuits given in Section 7 of this Guide, the correct disconnection
time is obtained for the protectwe devices by 'limiting the maximum circuit 'lengths.

Table 41.1 3.5.2 Disconnection times - TNcircuits

f
411.3.2.2 A disconnection time o not more than 0.4 sis required for final circuits with a rating ( I J
not exceeding 32 A.
=9 411.3.2.3 A disconnection time of not more than 5 s is permitted for:
► final circuits exceeding 32 A, and
► distribution circuits.

Table 41.l J.5.J Disconnection times - TI drcuits

The required disconnection times for installations forming part of a TT system can,
except in the most exceptional circumstances outside the scope of this guide, only be
=9 411.S.3
achieved by protecting every circuit with an RCD, hence, a time of not more than 0.2 s is
required for final circuits with a rating (In) not exceeding 32 A.
:;a 411 .3.2.4 A disconnection time of not more than 1 s is permitted for:
► final circuits exceeding 32 A, and
==3 ► distribution circuits.

On-Site Guide 1 2 5
e The Institutionof EngineeringandTedlnorogy
::g
=a 3.6 Residual current devices (RCDs)
:;a RCD is the generic term for a device that operates when the residual current in the circuit
reaches a predetermined value. The RCD is, therefore1 the main component in an RCCB
:a (residual current operated circuit-breaker without integral overcurrent protection) or
one of the functions of an RCBO (residual current operated circuit-breaker with integral
:;B overcurrent pmtection )..

3 ..&.1 Protedion by RCDs

RCDs are required:
411.5 where the earth fault loop impedance is too high to provide the required
disconnection, for example, where the distributor does not provide a
connection to the means of earthing - TT earthlng arrangement
411.3.3(i) ii for socket-outlets where used by ordinary persons for general use
701.411.3.3 iii for all circuits of locations containing a bath or shower
4 l 1.3.3(ii) iv for circuits supplying mobile equipment not exceeding 32 A for use outdoors
522.6.101 v for cables without earthed metallic covering installed in walls or partitions at
522.6.102 a depth of less than 50 mm and not protected by earthed steel conduit or

:a
similar
522.6.103 v i for cables without earthed metallic covering installed in walls or partitions
with metal parts (not including screws or nails) and not protected by earthed
steel conduit or the like.

=a J.&.2 Omission of RCD protection

3.6.2.1 Spedfic cases
RCD protection can be omitted in the foHowing circumstances:
41 L3.3(b) specific labelled socket outlets, for example, a socket-out1et for a freezer.
However, the circuit cables must not require RCD protection as per v and vi in
=9 dause 3.6.1, that is, circuit cables must be enclosed in earthed steel conduit
or have an earthed metal sheath or be at a depth of at least 50 mm in a wall
or partition without metal parts
411.3.3(a) ii socket-oudet circuits in situations where the use of equipment and work
on the building fabric and electrica'I installation is controlled by skilled or
instructed persons, for example, in some industrial and commercial locations;
see 3.6.22.
411.5 Cables installed on the surface do not specifically require RCD protection 1 however1 RCD
protection may be required for other reasons, for example, for fault protection, where
=9 the earth fault loop impedance is such that the disconnection time for an overcurrent
device cannot be met.
:;a 411.3.3(b) It is expected that all socket-outlets in a dwelling win
have RCD protection at 30 mA,
however1 the exception of Regulation 411.3.3 can be applied in certain cases.
==3

On-Site Guide 1 2 6
c Thelnstirution of 8'1gineering and Technofogy
::g
=a 411.3.3(a)3.6.2.l Installations under the control of skiHed or instructed persons
522.6.102 BS 7671 :2008(2011) permits RCDs, where usually provided for additional protection, to
:;a 522.6.103 be omitted where the installation is under the control of a skilled or instructed person.

:a 411.3.3(i)
415.1.1
The decision as to which socket-outlets or circuits do not require add;tional protection
by RCDs should be taken by the designer of the electrical installation and only after
:;B consultation with an appropriate person in the dient's organisation. An appropriate
person would be one who is able to ensure that the socket-outlets or circuits in question
are, and will remain, under the supervision of skilled or instructed persons.
Wherever a designer so chooses to omit RCO protection, traceable confirmation must
be obtained from the client to identify the reason for the omission and such confirmation
must be included within the documentation handed over to the dient upon completion
of the work.
Where no such confirmation can be obtained, RCD protection shou'ld not be omitted.

3.6.J Applications o f RCDs

314 Installations are required to be divided into circuits to avoid hazards and minimize
inconvenience in the event of a fault and to take account of danger that might arise from
:a the failure of a single circuit, such as a lighting cirruit.
The following scenarios show dffferent methods of providing ROD protection within
installations. Note that for c'larity, earthing and bonding connections are not shown.

=a a TN conduit instaHati.ons
Where cables in walls or partitions have an earthed metallic covering or are installed in
steel conduit or similar, 30 mA RCD protection is still required in tl1e following cases:
► circuits of locations containing a bath or shower
► protection at socket-oudets not exceeding 20 A
► mobile equipment not exceeding 32 A for use outdoors
=9 ► the arrangement in Fi,gure 3.6.3(i).

=9
:;a
==3

On-Site Guide 1 2 7
e The Institutionof EngineeringandTedlnorogy
::g
=a T Figure 3.6.3(1) Typica'I split consumer unit with one 30 mA RCD, suitable for TN
installations with cables in walls or partitions having an earthed
:;a metaUic covering or endosed in earthed steel conduit or the like

:a
other circuits to .socket-outlets, locations
circuits containing a bath or shower, mobile
equipment outdoors with current
:;B rating not exc ding 32 A

••••
1 1111

main switch 30mA

(isolator) RCO
labelled

:a 'Main switch'

=a b T T conduit installations
For instaHations forming part of a TT system, all drwits must be RCD protected. If cables
in waits or partitions have an earthed metallic covering or are installed in earthed steel
conduit, 30 mA RCDs will be required for:
circuits of locations containing a bath or shower
=9 circuits with socket-outlets not exceeding 20 A
mobile equipment not exceeding 32 A for use outdoors.
The remainder of the installation would require protection by a 100 mA RCD (see Figure
3.6.3(ii)).

=9
:;a
==3

On-Site Guide 1 2 8
e The Institutionof Engineeringand Tedlnorogy
::g
=a T Figure 3.6.3(11) Typical split consumer unit with time-delayed RCD as main

:;a
switch, suitable for TT and TN installations with cables in walls
or partitions havin_g an earthed meta'llic covering or endosed in
earthed steel conduit or the like
:a other circuits to socket-outlets, locations
circuits containing a bath or shower, mobile
:;B equipment outdoors with current
rating not exceeding 32 A

• • ••••
• " • . . .

• • • •••
l 11 1 1

100 mA time delay 30mA

ROD S-typ double-pole, RCD

:a labelled 'Main switch'

forTT installations insulated

endosure or further
mechanical protection

=a
to meter tails

For instaUations forming part of a TT system with cables installed in walls or partitions
having no earthed metallic covering or not installed in earthed conduit or the like, protection
by 30 mA RCDs will be required for all circu its, see Figures 3.63(iii) and 3.6.3(iv).
The endosures of RCDs or consumer units incorporating RCDs in TT installations should
=9 have an all-insulated or Gass U construction or additional precautions, as may be
recommended by the manufacturer, need to be taken to prevent faults to earth on the
supply side of the 100 mA RCD.
c RCBOs

The use of RCBOs will m;nimize inc.onvenience in the event of a fault and is applkabte
to all systems. See Figure 3.6.3(iH).
Such a consumer unit arrangement also easily allows individual drcuits, such as to
spedficaUy labelled socket-oudets or fire alarms, to be protected by a cirruit-breaker
=9 without RCD protection. Such circuits will usually need to be installed in earthed metal
conduit or wired with earthed metal-sheathed cables.
:;a
==3

On-Site Guide 129

e The Institution of Engineering and Tedlnorogy
::g
=a T Figure 3.6.J(ili) Consumer unit with RCBOs, suitable for all installations (TN
and TT)
:;a Ii nal circuits

:a -■
:;B -
W
l I

for TT installations insulated

• W II • • • ■ ■ - enclosure or further mechanical
• M'ft,'IMIK.ri- • • • . . • - protection to meter tails
A I I A S I I

. . .... .. _J
·1 1 111111
30mARCBOs

llabelled main switch

'Main switch' (isolator)

:a
d Split board with two 30 mA RCDs
The division of an installation into two pa;rts with separate 30 mA RCDs will ensure that
=a part of the installation will remain on supply in the event of a fault, see Figure 3.6.3(iv).

T Figure J.6.J(lv) Split consumer unit with separate main switch and two 3 0 mA
RCOs
final circuits fina•I circuits

=9
II
=9
main switch 30 mA 30mA
(isolator) RCD RCD
labelled

:;a 'Main switch'

==3

On-Site Guide
e The Institutionof EngineeringandTedlnorogy
130
::g
=a e Three-way split board with two 30 mA RC,Ds

:;a The three-way division of an installation can provide ways unprotected by RCDs for, say,
fire systems and for two separate 30 mA RCDs to ensure that part of the installation

:a win remain on supply in the event of a fault. Unprotected circults will usually need to
be instaUed in eartfied metal conduit or wired with earthed metal-sheathed cables, see
Figure 3.6.3 (v).
:;B
� Figure J.6.3(v) Three-way split consumer unit with separate main switch, two
30 mA RCDs and circuits without RCD protection
final circuits

specifically labelled circuits

e.g. fire alarms,
medical equlpment

II
final circuits

:a • • ••••
[l . . . . ....
I'
• • • •••
1 1111

=a main switch
�ll

30mA 30mA
(isolator) RCD RCD
labelled
'Main switch'

=9

534 'J.7 Surge protective devices (SPDs)

J.7.1 overview
131.6.2 Electrical installations and connected equipment can be severely affected by lightning
=9 activity during thunderstorms or from electrical switching events.

:;a GN 1
443.2.6
For more information, see IET Guidance Note l.
Damage can occur when the surge or transient overvoltage, a5 the result of lightning or
==3 electrical switching, exceeds the impulse withstand vo'ltage rating of e'lectrical equipment
Table 44.3 - t h e levels ,of which are defined in Table 44.3.

On-Site Guide I S I
e TheInstitution of EngineeringandTedlnorogy
::g
=a Surges from electrical switching events are created when large inductive loads, such as
motors or air conditioning units, switch off and rel.ease stored energy which dissipates as
:;a a transient over voltage. Switching surges are, in general, not as severe as lightning surges
but are more repetitive and can reduce equipment lifespan.
:a Over:vo!tages of atmospheric origin, in particular, can present a risk of fire and e'lectric
shock owing to a dangerous filashover.
:;B 443 ► Section 443 of BS 7671 :2008(2011) has requirements for the protection of
persons, llvestock and property from injury and damage as a consequence of
overvoltage
534 ► Section 534 has requirements for the setection and insta'llation of surge
protective devices.
N:Q,TE 1: Section 534 applies to a.c. power circuits only. When the need for power SPDs
is identified, additional SPDs on other services such as telecommunications lines and
equipment is also recommended. See BS EN 62305 and BS EN 61643.
NQ,TE 2: Some electronic equipment may have protection levels lower than Category I
of Table 44.3.

:a 443
3.7.2 Anan,gements for protection against overv ,oltages
Protection according to Section 443 can only be achieved if transient overvoltages are
534 limited to values lower than those given in Table 44.3, requiring the correct selection and
installation of suitable SPDs.
=a 3.7.2.1 Where SPD protection may not be required
443.1 Protection against overvoltages of atmospheric origin is not required in the follovving
fable 44.3 circumstances but, in each case, the impulse withstand voltage of equipment must meet
the requirements of Table 44.3 of BS 7671:2008(2011):
443.2.1 ► the installation . supplied by a completely buried low voltage system and
=9 443.2 ..2
does not indude overhead lines
► installations which include overhead lines but where the e-0nsequential losses
are tolerable, e.g. typical urban dwellin& storage unit or farm building.
If there are risks of direct strikes to or near the strucrure or to the low voltage distribution
line, overvoltage protection by SPDs is required in ace-0rdance with BS EN 62305
Protection against lightning.

3.7.2 ..2 Where SPD prot,ection is required

Surge protective devices should be considered in the following cirrumstances:
=9 ► the low voltage supply to the installation, at some point, is provided by bare
:;a overhead conductors at risk of direct lightning strike
► the building requires or already has a lightning protection system (LPS)
==3 443.2.2
Note
► the risk of loss of any part of the installation or equipment due to damage
caused by any transient overvoltages (induding switching transients) is not
acceptable.

On-Site Guide 1 3 2
c The lnstirutionof 8'1gineeringandTechnofogy
::g
=a The flow chart in Figure 3.7.2.2 will a[d the decision-making process for electrical

:;a
installations within the soope of this Guide. See IET Guidance Note 1 for more information.

:a T figure 3.7.2.l SPD decision flow chart for installations within the scope of this
Guide

:;B Risk ofdlrect

lightning (see 8S EN 62305)
or lightning protection
system installed? YES
(443.1.1)
Overvoltage protection required
Install Type 1 or Type 1+ 2 SPDs at
NO dlstrlblltlon board/consumer unit
to prevent dangerous flashover
(5.34.2.1)

YES
Ove:rhead line supplying the
building at risk of direct strike -
see BS E.N 62305 (443.1.1)

:a 1 Co-<>rd inated set of overvoltage

SPDs for equipment protection
NO e.g. Type 2 or Type 2+3 for
distribution boards feeding
sensitive electronic equipment

=a Installation presents
higher ri k (e.g. fire) or requires
YES
(534.2.6)

higher reliability from overvoltages

including switching (443.2.2 Note) - ....
see BS E.N 62305 NO
Protection against overvoltages
.................. nouequired (443.1.1, 443.2.2) if
equipment Impulse withstand
voltage to Table 44.3
=9
NOTE: For larger installations beyond the scope of this Ciuide, a risk assessment method
used to evaluate the need for SPDs is given in Section 443 of BS 7671:2008(2011).

=9
:;a
==3

On-Site Guide
e The Institutionof EngineeringandTedlnorogy
I'
::g
=a 3..7.3 Types of SPD protection
:;a 534.l

534.2
For the protection of a.c. power circuits, SPDs are allocated a type number:
Type 1 SPDs are only used where there is a risk of direct 'lightning current
and, typically, are installed at tfie origin of the installation
Type 2 SPDs are used at distri bution boards
:;B Type 3 SPDs are used near termina'I equipment
See also Table 3.7.3.
Appendix Combined Type SPDs are dassified with more than one Type, e.g. Type 1 & 2, Type 2
16 & 3, and can provide both lightning current with overvoltage protection in addition to
protection between all conductor combinations (or modes of protection) within a sing[e
unit. Combined Type SPDs provide high surge current handling combined with better
overvoltage protection levels (Up) - t h e latter being a performance parameter of an SPD.

534.2.1 Y Table 3.7.3 Types of SPD protection

Type Name Location CSA conduttor Hazard

Eq ui potentia I 0 .ngm
. of t he 16 mm 2 minimum Protect against
:a
1
bonding or installation - length of tails - flashover from
lightning ideally <0.5 m but direct lightning
protection/ no longer than 1 m strikes to structure
current SPD or to LV overhead

=a 2 Overvoltage Distribution 4 mm2 or equal

supply

SPD board/ to CSA of circuit

consumer unit conductors

3 Overvoltage Terminal 2.5 mm 2 or equal Protect against

=9 SPD equipment to CSA of circuit
conductors
overvoltages and
high currents
on items of
equipment

=9
:;a
==3

On-Site Guide
c The lnstirutionof 8'1gineeringand Technofogy
134
::g
=a 3..7.4 Coordination and selection of surge protection
:;a 534.2.3.6 Where a number of SPDs are required to operate in conjunction with each other they
must be coordinated to ensure the correct type of protection is instaHed where required;
:a see Figure 3.7.4.
SPD protection should be coordinated as follows:
:;B ► choose the correct type of SPD for the installation and site in the correct
location
► refer to Tables 44.3 and 44.4 of BS 7671 (impulse withstand voltage)
534.2.3.1.1 ► choose SPDs with a protection level (Up) sufficiently 'lower than the impulse
withstand voltage or lower than the impulse immunity of the equipment to
be protected
choose SPDs of the same make or manufacture.
NQ,TE: Coordinated SPDs must be of the same make or manufacture unless the
designer is satisfied that devices of different makes wiU coordinate as required.

T Figure 3.7.4 Typica'I, location of a coordinated set of SPOs

:a Type3 Type2 Type1

Overvoltage SPO Overvoltage SPO Eq uipotent,i al
bonding or lightning
Terminal ,equipment Distribution board or protection/current SPD
=a consumer unit
Origin

=9

=9
:;a
==3

On-Site Guide 135

e The Institution of Engineering and Tedlnorogy
::g
=a 3..7.5 Critical length of conneding conductors for SPDs
:;a 534.2.9 To gain maiximum protection the connecting conductors to SPDs must be kept as short
as possible, to minimize additive inductive voltage drops across the conductors. The total

:a lead length (a + b) should preferably not exceed 0.5 m but in no case exceed 1.0 m;
see Figure 3.7.5.

:;B Refer to the SPD manufacturers instructions for optimal install.ation.

Y Figure J.7.5 Critical length of connecting conductors for SPDs

OCPD
a

'. •· ...
SPD E/1

:a b

=a
Main earthing terminal or
-L,, connecting conductor bar

OCPD • overcurrem prorecrive device

=9 SPD
E/1
= surge protective device
""'equipment or installation to be protected against overvoltages

=9
:;a
==3

On-Site Guide
c Thelnstirution of 8'1gineeringandTechnofogy
136
::g
=a 3..7.6 Methods o,f connection
:;a 534.2.2 Primariliy, the installation of SPDs must follow the manufacturer's instructions but
minimum SPD connections at the origin of the electrical supply are usually made as

:a those shown in Figure 3.7.6(i) (TN-C-S, TN-S, TT) and Figure 3.7.6(ii) (TT - SPDs
upstream of RCD):

:;B Type 1 SPDs should be installed upstream from any RCD to avoid unwanted tripping.
Where this cannot be avoided, the RCD should be of the time-delayed or S-type.

534.2.S(i) -., Figure 3.7.6(1) SPDs on load side •of RCD

534.2.6
OCPOl

RCD

Protective
conductor
N

:a

=a

=9

=9
:;a
==3

On-Site Guide
e The Institution of Engineering and Tedlnorogy
I'
::g
=a 534.2.S(ii) T Figure 3.7.&(H) SPDs on supply side of RCD

:;a O CPD1
l1

:a L2

u
:;B
N

ProtectiVe
conductor
OCPO 2

I
I
L---

:a
- -
=a NOTE:
SPDs.
See Appendix 16 of BS 7671 :2008(2011) for further information regarding the connection of

=9

=9
:;a
==3

On-Site Guide
c The lnstirution of 8'1gineeringand Technofogy
138
::g
=a
:;a Earthing and
:a
:;B
bonding
4.1 Protective earthing
The purpose of protective earthing is to ensure that, in the event of a fault, such as
between a line conductor and an exposed-conductive-part, sufficient current flows to
operate the protective device, i.e. fuse to blow, circuit-breaker to operate or RCO to
operate, in the required time.
411.4.2 1Every exposed-conductive-port (a conductive part of equipment that can be touched

:a
411.5.l and which is not a live part but which may become live under fault conditions) shall
be connected by a protective conductor to the main earthing terminal and, hence, the
means of earthing for the installation.

4.2 Legal requirements

=a ESQCR The Electricity Safety, Quality and Continuity Regulations 2002 (ESQCR), require that
2002 a distributor of electricity makes the supply neutra'I conductor or protective conductor
S12665 available for the connection of the consumer's protective conductor where it can be
reasonably concluded that such a connection ;s appropriate. Such a connection may be
deemed inappropriate where there is a risk of the loss of the PEN conductor, for example,
where bare overhead low voltage distribution cables supply a rural building. ln such cases,
=9 an earth electrode m u s t be provided and the installation will then form part of a TT system.
Essentially, permission to connect the consumer's protective conductor to the
distributors neutral can be denied to new installations but, where permission is granted,
the distributor should maintain the connection.
NOTE: For some rura'I installations s,upplied by a PME arrangement, it may be pertinent
to install an additional earth electrode to mitigate the effects of a PEN conductor
becoming open-circuit; see tET Guidance Note 5.

=9
4.3 Main protective bonding of metallic services
:;a (Figures 2.l(i) to 2.l(iii))

==3 The purpose of protective equipotential bonding is to reduce the voltages between the
various exposed-conductive-parts and extraneous-conductive-parts of an installation,
dur1ng a fault to earth and in the event of a fault on the distributor's network.

On-Site Guide I S9
e The Institutionof Engineeringand Tedlnorogy
::g
=a 411.3.1.2 Main protective bonding conductors are required to connect extraneous-conducti-ve-

:;a
Part 2 parts to the main earthing terminal of the ;nstallation. An extraneous-conductive-part
is a conductive part, such as a metal pipe, liable to introduce earth potential into the
installation or building. It is common, particularly under certain fault conditions on the
:a LV supp'ly network, for a potentia'I, to exist between true earth, i.e. the general mass of
Earth and the earth of the electrical system. Therefore, buned metallic parts which enter
:;B the building are to be bonded to the main earthing terminal of the electrical installation.
Examples of extraneous-conductive-parts are:
metallic installation pipes
ii metallic gas installation pipes
iii other installation pipework, for example, heating oil
iv structural steelwork of the building where rising from he ground
v lightning protection systems (where required by BS EN 62305).
It is also necessary to consider not just metallic supply pipework but also internal metallic
pipework whtch may have been buried in the ground for convenience, for example, central
heating pipework cast into the concrete or buried in the screed of a floor at ground level.
Such metallic pipes would normally be considered to be extraneous-conductive-parts.

:a 4.4 Earthing condudor and main protective

bonding conductor cross-sedional areas
=a The min;mum cross-sectional areas (csa) of the earthing conductor and main protective
bonding conductors are given i,n Table 4.4(i). For TT supplies, refer to Table 4.4(ii).

T Table 4.4(1) Earthing conductor and main protective bonding conductor sizes
(copper equivalent) for TN-S and TN-C-S supplies

Une conductor or mm l 4 6 10 16 25 35 50 70
=9 neutral onductor of
PME sup,plies
542.3 Ellrthlns conductor m nr 6 6 10 16 16 16 25 35
543.1 not buried or buried
anclprotlldlld
a p l n s t COffOlion and
mechankal clamap -
INnolal
544.1.l Main protective bonding mm1 6 6 6 10 10 10 16 25
condudor - see notes
lable 54.8 Main pnll8c.tlN bondlns mnr 10 10 10 10 10 10 16 25
:;a condudor for PME
supplies (TN-C-5)
Notes:
543.2.4 1 Protective conductors (including earthing and bonding conductors) of 10 mm2 cross-sectional area
or less shall be copper.

OnaSite Guide 140

c The lnstirution of 8'1gineering and Technofogy
::g
=a Table 54.7 2 The distributor may require a minimum sfze of earthing conductor at the origin of the supply of 16

:;a
mm2 copper or greater for TN·S and TN·C·S supplies,
542.3.1 J Buried earthing conductors must be at least
Table 54.1 25 mm 2 copper if not protected against corros;on

:a
► 50 mm2 stee'I if not protected against corrosion
► 16 mm2 copper if not protected against mechanical damage but protected against c-0rrosion
16 mm 2 coated steel if not protected against medhanical damage but protected ag�inst

:;B 4
corrosion.
The distributor should be consulted when in doubt.

Table 4.4(11), Copper earthing conductor cross sectional area (csa) for TT
supp'lies

Buried N o t buried
Unprotected Protected Protected Unprotected Protected Protected
against against against against
corrosion corrosion and corrosion corrosion and
mechanical mechanical
damage damage
mm 2 mm 2 mm 2 mm 2 mm 2 mm 2

:a 25
Notes:
16 2.5 4 4 2.5

I Assuming protected against corrosion by a sheath.

544.1.l 2 The main protec�ive bonding conductors shall have a cross-sectional area of not less than half that

=a required for the earthing conductor and not less than 6 mm 2•

Note that:
543.2.4 only copper conductors should be used; copper covered aluminium
conductors or aluminium conductors or structural steel can only be used if
special precautions outside the scope of this Gu[de are taken
544.1.2 ii bonding connections to incoming metal servic.es should be made as near as
practicable to the point of entry of the services into the premises, but on the
=9 consumer's side of any insulating section
544.1.2 iii where pradicable, the connection to the gas, water, oil, etc., service should be
within 600 mm of the service meter, or at the point of entry to the building
if the servke meter is externa'I and must be on the consumer's side before
any branch pipework and after any insulating section in the service. The
connection must be made to hard pipework, not to soft or flexible meter
connections
542.3.2 iv the connection must be made using clamps (to BS 951) and be suitably
protected against corrosion at the point of contact.
=9
4.5 Main protective bonding of plastic services
:;a There is no requirement to main bond an incoming service where the incoming service
==3 pipe is plastic, for example, where ye'llow is used for natural gas and blue for potable
water.

On-Site Guide 1 4 1
e The Institutionof EngineeringandTedlnorogy
::g
=a Where there is a plastic incom;ng seNice and a metal installation within the premises,
main bonding is recommended unless it has been confirmed that any metallic pipework
:;a within the building is not introducing earth potential (see 4.3).

:a 544.1.2 II main bonding connections are to be applied to the consumer's side of any meter,
main stop valve or insulating insert and, where practicable, within 600 mm of the meter
outlet union or point of entry to the building if the meter is extemat
:;B
4.6 Supplementary equipotential bonding
The purpose of supplementary equipotential bonding is to reduce the voltage between
the various exposed-conductive-parts and extraneous-conductive-parts of a location
during a fault to earth.
NQ,TE: Where a required disconnection time cannot be achieved, supplementary
bonding must be applied, however, this is outside the scope of this Guide. See
Regulations 411.3.2.5 and 411.3.2.6 and Guidance Note 1.
The cross sectional area of supplementary bonding conductors is given in Table 4.6.

T Table 4.,& Supplementary bonding conductors

:a 544.2 Mjnimum cro .ea10' n.al area of supplementary bonding conductor (mm2)
Exposed--conduc:tive Exposed-conductive Extraneou.s-condudive
Size of -part to extraneous -part to exposed -part to extraneous
=a drcuit
p. e
-conductive-part
DOI
-condudive -part
not
-condudive-part-
not
conductor mechanically mechanically 11echa.nicaly medlanically mechirialfy mediankaJly
(mm2) protected prot!ded -+•...+.w1 protffll!d
1
proteded prot!Cl!d

=9 1.5 4.0 1.5 4.0 4.0

2.5 1.5 4.0 2.5 4.0 2.5 4.0
4.0 25 4.0 4.0 4.0 2.5 4.0
6.0 4.0 4.0 6.0 6 0 2.5 4.0
10.0 6.0 6.0 10.0 10.0 2.5 4.0
16.0 10.0 10.0 16.0 16.0 2.5 4.0

544.2.3 • If one of the extraneous-conductive-parts is connected to an exposed-c.onductive-part, the bonding

=9 conductor must be no smaller than that required by column l or 2.

:;a 4.7 Additional protection - supplementary

equipotential bonding
==3 415.2 Suppl.ementary equipotential bond;ng is required in some of the locations and
instal'lations falling within the scope of Part 7 of BS 7671.
On-Site Guide 142
c The lnstirution of 8'1gineering and Technofogy
::g
=a If the instal'lation meets the requirements of BS 7671:2008(2011) for earthing and
bonding, there is no specific requirement for supplementary equipotential bonding o,f:
:;a ► kitchen pipes, sinks or draining boards

:a ►
►
metaUic boiler pipework
metaUic furniture in kitchens
► metallic pipes to wash hand basins and WCs
:;B 701.415.2 ► locations containing a bath or shO\l'i.ler, providing the conditions of Regulation
701.415.2 are met.
NOTE: Metallic waste pipes deemed to be extra,neous-oonductive-parts must be
connected by main protective bonding conductors to the main earthing terminal; see
also 4.3.

4.8 Supplementary bonding of plastic pipe

installations
Suppl.ementary bonding is not required to metallic parts supplied by plastic pipes, for
example, radiators, kitchen sinks or bathroom taps.

:a 4.9 Earth eledrode

542.1.2.3 This is connected to the main earthing terminal by the earthing conductor and provides
part of the earth fault loop path for a TT installation; see Figure 2.1 (iii).
Table 41.5 It is recommended that the earth fault loop impedance for T T instaHations does not
Note 2 exceed 200 Q.
542.2.6 Metamc gas or water utility or other metallic service pipes are not to be used as an earth
electrode,. although they must be bonded if they are extraneous-conductive-parts; see also
4.3.
=9 NOTE: Regulation 542.2.6 permits the use of privately owned water supply pipework
for use as an earth electrode where precautions are taken against its removal and it has
been considered for such use. This relaxation wiU not apply to an instaUation within a
dwelling.

4.10 Types of earth eledrode

542.2.3 The following types of earth electrode are recognised;
=9 earth rods or pipes
ii earth tapes or wires
:;a iii earth plates
iv underground structural metalwork embedded in foundations
==3 v welded metal reinforcement of concrete embedded in the ground (exduding
pre stressed concrete)

On-Site Guide 1 •s
e The Institutionof Engineering and Tedlnorogy
::g
=a 542.2.5 vi lead sheaths and metal coverings of cables, which must meet all the fo'llo'Ning

:;a
conditions:
a adequate precautions t o prevent excessive deterioration by corrosion
b the sheath or covering shall be in effective contact with 'Earth
:a c the consent of the owner of fhe cable shall be obtained
d arrangements shall exist for the owner of the electrical installation to
:;B be warned of any proposed change to the cable which might affect its
suitability as an earth electrode.

4.11 Typical earthing arrangements for various

types of earthing system
Figures 2. l (i) to 2.1 (iii) show sing1e-phase arrangements but three-phase arrangements
are similar.
Table 54.7 The protective conductor sizes as shown in Figures 2.1 (i) to 2.1 (iii) refer to copper
Table 54.8 conductors and are related to 25 mm 2 supply tails from the meter.
544.1.1
542.3.1 For TT systems protected by an RCD with an earth electrode resistance 1 ohm or greater,
543.1.3 the earthing conductor siz.e need not exceed 2.5 mm 2 if protected against corrosion by
a sheath and if also protected against mechanical damage; otherwise, see Table 4.4(ii).
542.4.2 1he earthing bar is sometimes 'l:lsed as the main earthing terminal, however, means
must be provided in an accessible position for disconnecting the earthing conductor to

=a
f acilitate measurement of external earth fault loop impedance, Ze.
NOTE: For TN-S and TN-C-S installations, advice about the availability of an earthing
fac;lity and the precise arrangements for connection should be obtained from the
distributor or supplier.

=9

=9
:;a
==3

On-Site Guide
c The lnstirutionof 8'1gineeringand Technofogy
I"
::g
=a
:;a Isolation and I
:a
:;B
switching
537.2 5.1 Isolation
132.15.1 5..1..1 Requirement
Means .of isolation should be provided:
at the origin of the installation
537.1.4 A main linked switch or circuit-breaker should be provided as a means of
isolation and of interrupting the supply on load.
:a For single-phase household and similar supplies that may be operated by
unskilled persons, a double-pole device must be used for both TT and TN
systems.
For a three-phase supply to an installation forming part of a TT system, an
=a isola,tor must interrupt the line and neutral conductors. In a TN-S or TN-C-S
system only the line conductors need be interrupted.
ii for every circuit
537.2.1.1 Other than at the orig;n of the installation, every circuit or group of circuits
that may have to be isolated without interrupting the supply to other circuits
should be provided with its own isolating device. The device must switch aH
live conductors in a TT system and all line conductors in a TN system.
=9 531.2.1.2 iii for every item of equipment
iv for every motor
132.1 s.2 Every fix.ed electric motor should be provided with a readily accessible and
easily operated device to switch off the motor and all associated equipment
induding any automatic circuit-breaker. The device must be so placed as to
prevent danger.
537.1.3 v for every supply.

5.1.2 lhe switchgear

=9 537.2.2.2 The position of the contacts of the isolator must either be externally vlslb!e or be dearl y,
positively and reliably indicated.
:;a 537.2.2.3 The device must be designed or installed to prevent unintentional or inadvertent dosure.
==3 Each device used for olation must be clearly identified by position or durable marking
to indicate the installation or circuit: that it isolates.

On-Site Guide 145

e The Institution of Engineering and Tedlnorogy
::g Is
=a 537.2.1.5 If it is installed remotely from the equipment to be isolated, the device must be capable
of being seaued in the OPEN position.
:;a Guidance on the selection of devices for isolation is given in Appendix J.
:a
5.2 Switching off for mechanical maintenance
:;B
537.3

537.3.1.l A means of switching off for mechanical maintenance is required where mechanical
maintenance may involve a risk of injury- for example, from mechanical movement of
machinery or hot items when replacing lamps.
537.3.1.2 The means of switching off for mechanical maintenance must be able to be made
seoure to prevent electrically powered equipment from becoming unintentionally started
during the mechanical maintenance, unless the means of switching off is continuously
under the control of the person performing the maintenance.
Each device for switching off for mechanical maintenance must:
537.3.2.1 where practicable, be inserted in the main supply circuit
537.3.2.1 ii be capable of switching the full load current

:a
537.3.2.2 iii be manually operated
537.3.2.2 iv have either an externally visible contact gap or a clearly and reliably indicated
OFF position. An ind;cator light should not be relied upon
537.3.2.3 v be designed and/or installed so as to prevent inadvertent or unintentional
switching on
=a 537.3.2.4 vi be installed and durably marked so as to be readily identifiable and
convenient for use.
537.3.2.6 A plug and socket---0utlet or similar device of rating not exceeding 16 A may be used for
switching off for mechanical maintenance.

=9 537.4 5.3 Emergency switching

537.4.1.1 An emergency switch is to be provided for any part of an installation where it may be
5.37.4.1.2 necessary to control the supply in mder to remove an unexpected danger. Where there is
a risk of electric shock the emergency switch is to disconnect all live conductors, except
in three-phase TN-S and TN-C-S systems where the neutral need not be switched.
537.4.1.3 The means of emergency switching must act as directly as possible on the appropriate
supply conductors and the arrangement must be such that one single action only will
interrupt the appropriate supply.
=9 537.4.2.8 A plug and socket-outlet or similar device must not be selected as a device for emergency
switching.
:;a An emergency switch must be:
==3 537.4.2.1 capable of cutting off the full load current, taking account of stalled motor

I"
currents where appropriate

On-Site Guide
c The lnstirutionof 8'1gineeringandTechnofogy
::g Is
=a 537.4.2.3 ii hand operated and directly interrupt the main circuit where practicable
537.4.2.4 iii dearly identified, preferably by colour. If a colour is used, this should be red
:;a with a contrasting background
iv· readily accessible at the place where danger might occur and, 'Nhere
:a
537.4.2.5
appropriate, at any additional remote position from which that danger can be
removed
:;B 537.4.2.6 v of the latching type or capable •Ofbeing restrained in the 'OFF' or 'STOP'
position, unless both the means of operation and re-energizing are under the
control of the same person. The release of an emergency switching device
must not re-energize the relevant part of the installation; it must be necessary
to take a further action, such as pushing a 'start' button
537.4.2.7 vi so placed and durably marked so as to be readily identifiable and convenient
for its intended use.

537.5 5.4 Fundional switching

537.s.1.1 A switch must be instaHed in each part of a circuit which may require to be controlled
independent1y of other parts of the installation.

:a
530.3.2 Switches must not be installed in the neutral conductor alone.
537.5.1.3 A'II current using equipment requiring control shall be controlled by a switch.
537.5.2.3 Off-load isolators, fuses and links must not be used for functional switching.

=a NOTE: Table 53.4 of BS 7671 :2008(2011) permits the use of drcuit breakers for
functional switching purposes but, in each case, the manufacturer should be consulted
to establish suitability.

537.6 s.s Firefi ghter's switch

A firefighter's switch must be provided to disconnect the supply to any exterior electrical
=9
537.6.l
installation operating at a voltage exceeding low voltage, for example, a neon sign or any
interior discharge lighting installation operating at a voltage exc eeding low voltage.
NOTE: Such installations are outside the scope of this Guide; see Regulations 537.6.1 to
537.6.4 of BS 7671 :2008(2011).

=9
:;a
==3

On-Site Guide 1 4 7
e The Institutionof EngineeringandTedlnorogy
::g
=a
:;a
:a
:;B

:a

=a

=9

=9
:;a
==3

On-Site Guide 1 4 8
e The Institutionof EngineeringandTedlnorogy
::g
=a
:;a
:a
:;B

The foHow;ng durable labels are to be securely fixed on or adjacent to installed equipment

&.1 Additional protection

411.3.3 A spedfic 'labeUed or otherwise suitably identified socket-outlet provided for connection
(b) of a particular item of equipment.

:a &.2 Retention o f a dangerous electrical charge

416.2.5 If, behind a barrier or within an endosure, an item of equipment such as a capacitor is
installed which may retain a dangerous electrical charge after it has been switched off,
a warning label must be provided. Small capacitors sud, as those used for arc extinction
=a and for delaying the response of relays, etc., are not considered dangerous.
NDTE: Unintentional contact is not considered dangerous if the voltage resu'lting from
static charge falls below 120 V d.c. in less than 5 s after disconnection from the power
supply.

=9 6.3 Where the operator cannot observe the

operation of switchgear and controlgear
514.1.1 !Except where there is no possibility of confusion, a label or other suitable means of
identification must be provided to indicate the purpose of each item of switchgear
and controlgear. Where the operator cannot observe the operation of switchgear and
controlgear and where this might lead to danger, a suitable indicator complying, where
applicable, with BS EN 60073 and BS EN 60447, should be fixed in a position visible to
the operator.

=9
&.4 Unexpected presence of nominal voltage
:;a exceeding 230 V
==3 514_10.1 Where a nominal voltage exceeding 230 V to earth exists and it would not normally be
expected, a warning label stating the maximum voltage present must be provided where
it can be seen before gaining access to live parts.

On-Site Guide 1 4 9
e The Institutionof EngineeringandTedlnorogy
::g Is
=a 6.5 Connedion of earthing and bonding
:;a conductors
:a
514.13.1 A permanent label to BS 951 Figure 6.5 must be permanently fixed in a visible position
at or near the point of connection o
every earthing conductor to an earth electrode,
:;B ii every protective bonding conductor to extraneous-conductive-parts, and
iii at the main earth terminal, where it is not part of the main switchgear.

T f i g u r e 6.5 Label at connection of earthing and bonding conductors

l.
i
')i'li'I,: rl ) ' I
i'I I.· ·- \ I\ I . / /

:a
&.& Purpose o f switchgear and controlgear
=a 514.1.1 Unless there is no possibility of confusion, a label indicating the purpose of each item of
switchgear and controlgear must be fixed on or adjacent to the gear. It may be necessary
to label the item controlled, in addition to its controlgear.

6.7 Identification of protedive devices

=9 514.8.l A protective device, for example, a fuse or circuit-breaker, must be arranged and identified
so that the circuit protected may be easily recognised.

&.a Identification of isolators

537.2.2.6 Where it is not immediately apparent., all isolating devices must be clearly identified
by position or durable marking. The location of each d connector or isolator must be
indicated unless there is no possibility of confusion.
=9
:;a &.9 Isolation requiring more than one device
==3 514.11.1 A durable warning notice must be permanently fixed in a cleady visible position to

150
identify the appropriate isolating devices, where equipment or an enclosure contains live
parts which cannot be isolated by a single device.

On-Site Guide
c The lnstirutionof 8'1gineering and Technofogy
::g Is
=a &.1 o Periodic inspection ,and testing
:;a s14.12. 1 A notice of durable material indelibly marked with the words as F;gure 6.10 must be fixed
in a prominent pos;tion at or near the origin of every installation. The person carrying
:a out the initial verific.ation must complete the notice and it must be updated after each
periodic inspection.
:;B
T Figure &.10 Label for periodic inspection and testing

IMPORTANT
This installation should be periodically inspected and tested and
a report on its condition obtained, as prescribed in the IET Wiring
Regulations BS 7671 Requirements for Electrical Installations.

Date o f last inspection ..."."""""•"····. -".___..._...."..

Recommended date of next inspection ·-·-·-·-·-·-·-·-·-·-··-..··-·-·

:a

=a 6.11 Diagra111s
514.9.l A diagram, chart or schedule must be provided indicating:
the number of points, size and type of cables for each circuit,
ii the method of providing protection against e'lectric shod,
iii information to identify devices for protection, isolation and switching, and

=9 iv any circuit or equipment vulnerable during a typical test, e.g. SELV power
supply units of lighting cirruits which could be damaged by an insulation test.
For simple installations, the foregoing information may be given in a schedule, with a
durable copy pmvided within or adjacent to the distribution board or consumer unit.

6.12 Residual current devices

514.12.2 Where an installation incorporates an RCD, a notice 'Mth the words in Figure 6.12 (and no
=9 smaller than the example shown in BS 7671 :2008(2011)) must be fixed in a permanent
position at or near the origin of the installation.

:;a
==3

On-Site Guide 1 5 1
e The Institutionof EngineeringandTedlnorogy
::g Is
=a T Figure 6.12 Label for the testing of a residual current device

:;a This installation, or part of it, is protected by a device

:a which automatically switches off the power supply if an
earth fault develops. Test quarterly by pressing the
:;B button marked 'T' or 'Test The device should switch off
the supply and should be then switched on to restore the
supply. If the device does not switch off the supply when
the button is pressed seek expert advice.

&.13 Waming notice - non-standard colours

s 14.14.1 If additions or alterations are made to an installation so that some of the wiring complies
with the harmonized colours of!Table Kl I in ppendix Kl and there is also wiring in the
:a earlier colours, a warning notlce must be affixed at or near the appropriate distribution
board with the wording in Figure 6.13.

=a T Figure &.IS Label advising of wiring colours to two versions of BS 7671

CAUTION
This installation has wiring colours to
two versions of BS 7671.

=9 Great care should be taken before

undertaking extension, alteration or repair
that all conductors are correaly identified.

6.14 Warning notice - alternative supplies

=9 514.15.1 Where an installation includes additional or alternative supplies, such as a PV instal'lation,

:;a
which is used as an additional source of supply in parallel with another source, normaHy
the distributor's supply, warning notices must be affixed at the following locations in the
installation:
==3 a at the origin of the installation
b at the meter position, if remote from the origin

On-Site Guide 1 5 2
c Thelnstirution of 8'1gineeringandTechnofogy
 Is
c at the consumer unit or distribution board to which the additional or
alternative supply is connected
d at all points of isolation of all sources of supply.
The warning notice must have the wording in Figure 6.14.

T Figure 6.14 Label advising of multiple supplies

WARNING
MULTIPLE SUPPLIES
ISOLATE ALL ELECTRICAL SUPPLIES
BEFORE CARRYING OUT WORK
ISOLATE MA.INS AT
ISOLATE ALTERNATIVE SUPPLIES AT

&.15 Waming notice - high protective con.dudor

current
=.;i 543.7.1.105 At the distribution board, information must be provided indicating those circuits having
a high protective conductor current. This information must be positioned so as to be
=;a visib'le to a person who is modifying or extending the cirouit (Figure 6.15).

T Figure 6.15 Label advising of high protective conductor current

WARNING
HIGH PROTECTIVE CONDUCTOR
CURRENT
The following circuits have a high protective
conductor current:

On-Site Guide 1 5 !
e The Institutionof EngineeringandTedlnorogy
 Is
&.16 Waming notice - photovoltaic systems
=9 112.537.2.2 A:11junction boxes (PV generator and PV array boxes) must carry a warning label indlcating
that parts inside the boxes may still be live after isolation from the PV converter (Figure
:a 6.16).

:;B T Figure 6.16 Label advising of live parts within enclosures in a PV system

WARNING
PVSYSTEM
Parts inside this box or enclosure may still
be live after isolation from the supply.

:a

=a

=9

=9
:;a
==3

On-Site Guide
c The lnstirutionof 8'1gineeringand Technofogy
154
::g
=a
:;a
:a
:;B

7.1 Final circuits

411.3.2 Table 7.1 (i) has been designed to enable a radial or ring final circuit to be installed
411.3.3 without calculation where the supply is at 230 V single-phase or 400 V three-phase. 'For
525.101
other voltages, the maximum circuit length given in the table must be corrected by the
application o,f the formula:
LtxU 0

:a where:
lp = 230

L ? is the permitted length for voltage Uo

Lt is the tabulated length for 230 V
=a Uo is the supply voltage.
The conditions assumed are hat:
the installation i,s supplied by
a a TN-C-S system with a typical external earth fault loop impedance, Ze, of
0.35 Q, or
b a TN-S system with a typical Zeof 0.8 Q, or
=9 c a TT system with RCDs installed as described in 3.6
ii the fina,1 circuit is connected to a distribution board or consumer unit at the
origin of the installation
iii the installation method is listed in column 4 of Table 7.1 (i)
Table 4B1 iv the ambient temperature throughout the length of the circuit does not exceed
30 ° c
Appx3 v the characteristics ·Of protective devices are in accordance with Appendix 3 of
BS 7671
vi the cable conductors are of copper
Appx4 vii. for other than lighting circuits, the voltage drop must not exceed 5 per cent
viii the following disconnection times are applicable:
Table 41.1 ► 0.4 s for drcuits up to and including 32 A
411.3.2.3 ► 5 s for circuits greater than 32 A.

On-Site Guide 1 5 5
e The Institutionof EngineeringandTedlnorogy
 T Table 7.1 (I) Maximum cable length for a 230 V final circuit in domestic premises and similar using 70 •c thermoplastic (PVC)
insulated and sheathed flat cable

Protective device Cable size Allowed installation methods Maximum length (m) (note 1)
- z.- "-0.8- Q-TN-S -:z.-" 0.35
(mm2)
Rating (A) Type (note 2) - - -Q-TN-C-S
-
RCD 30 No RCD RCD 30 No RCD
mA mA
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
Ring final circuits (5% voltage drop, load distributed)
30 BS 1361 2.5/1.5 l 00, 102, A, C 111 59Zs 111 111
8S3036 2.5/1.5 100,102. A, C 111 49zs Ill Ill
30 BS 1361 4.0/1.5 }100,101,102,A,C 183 69zs 183 159zs
BS 3036 183 57zs 183 147zs

},...,.,_,.,
32 as se-2.2. as 88-6 2.5/1.5 106 41zs 106 106
cb/RCBOlp!B 106 106 106 106
cb/RCBO l p ! C NPsc NPzs 82se 63ZS
cb/RCBO l p ! D NPsc NPzs 2sc lzs
0 32 BS 88-2 2.5/1.5 100,102, A. C 106 4lzs 106 106
32 8S88-2 4.0/1.5 100,101,102. A, C 176 48zs 176 138zs
g·.,. 32 BS 88·3 2.5/1.5 l 00, 102, A, C 106 27ZS 106 104ZS
32 8S88-3 4.0/1.5 I00,101,I02.A, C 176 32zs 176 122zs

1:
ooo
!!I=,,
32 BS 88-2.2, BS 88-6
cb/RCBO Type B
cb/RCBO Type C
4.0/1.5
} 100.10,.,ou c
176
176
NPsc
47ZS
127zs
NPzs
176
176
l33sc
137ZS
176
73zs
o..v,
cb/RCBO Type D NPsc NPzs 3sc lzs
[- Lighting circuits (3% voltage drop, load distributed)
a.f2
,2<5:
- < t'D 5 BS 1361 l.0/1.0 } 100,101,102,103, A. C 71 71 71 71
Ill
BS 3036 71 71 71 71
OI
 'Y Table 7.1 (i) continued
Protective device cable size Allowed installation methods Maximum length (m) (note 1)
(mm') (note 2)
Rating (A) Type ------------
Z. s 0.8 C TN-S Z. s 0.35 0 TN-C-S
RCD 30 No RCD RCD 30 No RCD
mA mA
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
Lighting circuits (3% voltage drop, load distributed)
5 BS 1361 1.5/1.0 } 100,101,102,103, A, C 108 108 108 108
BS 3036 108 108 108 108
5 8S88-3 1.0/1.0 100,101,102,103, A. C 71 71 71 71
5 BS 88-3 1.5/1.0 100. 101,102,103, A. C 108 108 108 108
6 BS 88-2.2, BS 88-6 1.0/1.0 59 59 59 59
cb/RCBO Type B } 100, IOI, 102,ICJ3, A, C 59 59 59 59
cb/RCBO Type C 59 59 59 59
cb/RCBO Type D 25sc 25zs 365c 36zs
6 BS 88-2 1.0/1.0 100,101,102,103, A. C 59 59 59 59
6 BS 88-2.2, BS 88-6 1.5/1.0 90 90 90 90
0 cb/RCBOTypeB } 100,101,102,103, A,C 90 90 90 90
'ft cb/RCBOTypeC 90 83:zs 90 90
cb/RCBO2tP.! D 38sc 30zs 53sc 43:zs
g·.,. 6 BS 88-2 1.5/1.0 100,101,102,103, A. C 90 90 90 90
10 BS 88-2.2, BS 88-6 1.0/1.0 35 35 35 35
cb/RCBO Type B }•oo. 35 35 35 35
1:
IOI, 102,A,C
cb/RCBO Type C 34sc 34D 35 35
ooo cb/RCBO Type D 8sc 8zs 18sc 18zs
!!I=,,
o..v, 10 BS 88-2.2, BS 88-6 1.5/1.0 52 52 52 52
[ ' cb/RCBO Type B }1 0 0 . 10 1 , IOSA,C 52 52 52 52
a.f2 cb/RCBO Type C Slsc 41zs 52 52
,2<5:
-< ,,, cb/RCBO Type D 12sc 9zs 27sc 22zs
"'...
 • Table 7,1(1) continued
Protedive device cable size Allowed installation methods Maximum length (m) (note 1)
Rating (A) Type (mm2 ) (note l )
------------
z. s 0.8 Q TN-5
RCD 30 No RCD
z. s 0.lS Q TN-C-5
RCD 30 No RCD
mA mA
I 2 l 4 5 6 7 8
Lighting circuits (3% voltage drop, load distributed)
10 BS 88·2 1.0/1.0 100, 101, 102, A. C 35 35 35 35
10 BS88-2 1.5/1.0 100, 101, 10:Z. A, C 52 52 52 52
15 BS 1361 1.5/1.0 100, 102, C 36 36 36 36
15 85 1361 2.5/1.5 100, 101, 10:Z. A, C 58 58 58 58
16 BS 88-2.2, BS 88-6 1.5/1.0 33 33 33 33
cb/RCBO Type B } 100,102, C 33 33 33 33
cb/RCBO Type C 21sc 17zs 33 30zs
cb/RCBO Type D NPsc NPzs 12sc 10zs
16 85 88-2.2, BS 88-6 2.5/1.5 53 53 53 53
0 cb/RCB01'ype8 } 100. 101, 10>. A, C 53 53 53 53
"ft cb/RCBO Type C 35sc 27zs 53 46D
cb/RCBO 1'ype D NPsc NPn 20sc 15zs
g·.,. 16 BS 88-2 1.5/1.0 100, 102,C 33 33 33 33
16 BS88-2 2.5/1.5 100, 101, 10:Z. A, C 53 53 53 53

1:
ooo
!!I=,,
16
16
BS 88-3
8588-3
1.5/1.0
2.5/1.5
100, 102, C
100, 101, 10:Z. A, C
33
53
33
53
33
53
33
53
o..v, Radial final drcuits (5'111volta1e drop, terminal load)
[- 5 851361 1.0/1.0 56 56 56 56
a_f;' 100, 101, 10:Z. 103, A, C
,2<5:
- < t'D BS3036 56 56 56 56

• 5 BS 88-3 1.0/1.0 100, 101, 102, 103, A. C 56 56 56 56

 'Y Table 7.1 (i) continued
Protective device cable size Allowed installation methods Maximum length (m) (note 1)
(mm') (note 2)
Rating (A) Type ------------
Z. s 0.8 C TN-S Z. s 0.35 0 TN-C-S
RCD 30 No RCD RCD 30 No RCD
mA mA
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
Radial final drcults (5Cl'D vofta1e drop. terminal load)
5 BS 1361 1.5/1.0 } 100, 101, 102, 103, A. C 88 88 88 88
BS 3036 88 88 88 88
5 8S88-3 1.5/1.0 100, 101, 102, 103, A. C 88 88 88 88
6 BS 88-2.2, BS 88-6 1.0/1.0 46 46 46 46
cb/RCBO Type B } 100, 101, 102, 103, A, C 46 46 46 46
cb/RCBO Type C 46 46 46 46
cb/RCBO Type D 25sc 25zs 36sc 36zs
6 8S88-2 1.0/1.0 100, 101, 102, 103, A. C 46 46 46 46
6 BS 88-2 1.5/1.0 100, 101, 102, 103, A. C n 72 n n
6 85 88-2.2. BS 88-6 1.5/1.0 72 72 72 72
cb/RCB01ypeB } 100, 101, 10,. 103, A, C 72 72 72 72
0 cb/RCBO 1ype C 72 72 72 72
'ft cb/RCB01ype0 38sc 30zs 53sc 43zs
g·.,. 10 BS 88-2.2, BS 88-6 1.0/1.0 26 26 26 26
cb/RCBO Type B } 100, 101, 102, M 26 26 26 26
cb/RCBO Type C 26 26 26 26

1:
cb/RCBO Type D 8sc 8zs 18sc 18zs
10 BS 88-2.2. BS 88-6 1.5/1.0 39 39 39 39
ooo cb/RCBO 1ype B 39 39 39 39
!!I=,, } 100, IOI, 10,. 103,A, C
o..v,
cb/RCBO 1ype C 39 39 39 39
[ ' cb/RCBO 1ype D Ilse 9zs 27sc 22zs
a.f2
,2<5:
-< ,,, 10 BS 88-2 1.0/1.0 100, 101, 102, A, C 26 26 26 26
Ill
IO
 T Table 1.1 (I) continued
Protedive device cable size Allowed installation methods Maximum length (m) (note 1)
Rating (A) Type (mm2 ) (note l )
------------
z. s 0.8 Q TN-5
RCD 30 No RCD
z.s 0.lS Q TN-C-5
RCD 30 No RCD
mA mA
I 2 l 4 5 6 7 8
Radial final circuits (51\11 voltage drop, terminal load)
10 BS 88·2 1.5/1.0 100, 101, 102, 103, A. C 39 39 39 39
15 BS 1361 1.0/1.0 C 17 17 17 17
8S3036 NP NPol NPol NPol NPol
15 BS 1361 1.5/1.0 100,102,C 26 26 26 26
BS 3036 NP NPol NPol NPol NPol
15 BS 1361 2.5/1.S 1DO, 101, 102. A. C 43 43 43 43
8S3036 1D0,102, C 45 45 45 45
15 BS 1361 4.0/1.5 100, 101, 102, 103, A. C 72 72 72 72
BS 3036 100. 101. 102, A. C 75 75 75 75

0
'ft
16 BS 88-2.2, BS 88-6
cb/RCBOTypeB
cb/RCBO Type C
1.0/1.0
}c 16
16
145c
16
16
14D
16
16
16
16
16
16
cb/RCBO Type D NPsc NPD 85c 8D
g·.,. 16 BS 88-2 1.5/1.0 100, 102, C 24 24 24 24
16 8S88-2 2.5/1.S 100, 101, 102. A. C 40 40 40 40

1:
ooo
!!I=,,
16
16
BS 88-2
BS88-3
4.0/1.5
1.5/1.0
100, 101, 102, 103, A. C
1DO, 102, C
66
24
66
24
66
24
66
24
o..v,
16 BS 88-3 2.5/1.5 100, 101, 102, A. C 40 40 40 40
[ '
a.f2 16 8S88-3 4.0/1.S 1DO, 101, 102, 103, A, C 66 66 66 66
,2<5:
-< ,,,

OI
0
 'Y Table 7.1 (i) continued
Protective device cable size Allowed installation methods Maximum length (m) (note 1)
(mm') (note 2)
Rating (A) Type ------------
Z. s 0.8 C TN-S Z. s 0.35 0 TN-C-S
RCD 30 No RCD RCD 30 No RCD
mA mA
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
Radial final drcults (5Cl'D vofta1e drop. terminal load)
16 BS 88-2.2, BS 88-6 1.5/1.0 24 24 24 24
cb/RCBO Type B 100, 102, C 24 24 24 24
cb/RCBO Type C 21sc 17zs 24 24
cb/RCBO Type D NPsc NPD Ilse lOzs
16 BS 88-2.2, BS 88-6 2.5/1.5 100, 101, 102, A, C 40 40 40 40
cb/RCBO Type B 40 40 40 40
cb/RCBO Type C 35sc 27zs 40 40
cb/RCBO Type D NPsc NPIS 20sc 15zs
16 BS 88-2.2, BS 88-6 4.0/1.5 66 66 66 66
cb/RCBO Type B } 100, 101, 10,. 103, "- C 66 66 66 66
cb/RCBO Type C 57sc 31zs 66 54zs
cb/RCBO lype D NPsc NPzs 33sc 18zs
0 20 BS 88•2.2, BS 88·6 2.5/1.5 100, 102,A,C 31 31 31 31
"ft BS 1361 100, 102, A, C 31 31 31 31
g'.,. BS 3036 NP NPol NPol NPol NPol
::, cb/RCBO Type B 31 31 31 31
2. cb/RCBO Type C } 100, 102, A. C 19sc 14zs 31 31

1:oo
cb/RCBO Type D NPsc NPIS 12sc 9zs
20 BS 88-2.2, BS 88-6 4.0/1.5 100, 101, 102, A, C 53 48zs 53 53
o BS 1361 100. 101. 102, A, C 53 44zs 53 53
!!I=,
o..v, 8S3036 C 57 48zs 57 57
[- cb/RCBO Type B 53 53 53 53
a_f;' cb/RCBO Type C 100, 101, 10:Z. A, C 31sc 17zs 53 39zs

-
,2<5:
- < t'D
cb D NPsc NPzs 20sc llzs
CII
 T Table 1.1 (I) continued
Protedive device cable size Allowed installation methods Maximum length (m) (note 1)
Rating (A) Type (mm2 ) (note l )
------------
z. s 0.8 Q TN-5
RCD 30 No RCD
z.s 0.lS Q TN-C-5
RCD 30 No RCD
mA mA
I 2 l 4 5 6 7 8
Radial final drcults (51\11 voltage drop, terminal load)
20 BS 88-2.2. BS 88-6 6.0/2.5 100,101,102, 103,A,C 81 77D 81 81
BS 1361 100, 101,102, 103, A, C 81 71zs 81 81
8S3036 100, 102, A, C 85 171$ 85 85
cb/RCBO Type B 81 81 81 81
cb/RCBO Type C } 100, 101,102, 103, A. C 47sc 277$ 81 632s
cb/RCBO Type D NPsc NPzs 30lc 17zs
20 BS 88-2 2.5/1.5 100, 102,A. C 31 31 31 31
20 8S88-2 4.0/1.S 100, 101, 102, A, C 48sc 48sc 53 53
20 BS 88-2 6.0/2.5 100, 101,102, 103, A, C nsc. 77SC. 81 81
20 BS88-3 2.5/1.5 100, 102, A, C 31 31 31 31
0
"ft 20 BS 88-3 4.0/1.5 100, 101, 102, A, C 53 53 53 53
20 8588-3 100,101,102. 103,A,C 81 81 81 81
g·.,. 6.0/2.5

},
25 BS 88-2.2, BS 88-6 2.5/1.5 26 26 26 26
cb/RCBO Type B 26 26 26 26

1:
cb/RCBO Type C 6sc 5zs 26 24zs
cb/RCBO Type D NPsc NPzs 6sc 4zs
ooo 25 BS 88-2.2, BS 88-6 4.0/1.5 42 31zs 42 42
!!I=,,
o..v,
cb/RCBO Type B 42 42 42 42
[- cb/RCBO Type C
} 11111, 102. A. C
IDie 6D 42 28zs
a_f;' cb/RCBQ D NPsc NPD 9sc 5zs
,2<5:
- < t'D

OI
w
 T Table 7.1 (I) continued
Protective device cable size Allowed installation methods Maximum length (m) (note 1)
(mm') (note 2)
Rating (A} Type ------------
Z. s 0.8 C TN-S Z. s 0.35 0 TN-C-S
RCD 30 No RCD RCD 30 No RCD
mA mA
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
Radial final dn:ults (5C!'D vofta1e drop. terminal load)
25 BS 88-2.2, BS 88-6 6.0/25 64 50zs 64 64
cb/RCBO Type B 100, 101, 102, A, C 64 64 64 64
cb/RCBO Type C 16sc 9zs 64 45zs
cb/RCBO Type D NPsc NPzs 145c 8zs
25 BS 88-2 2.5/1.5 C 26 23zs 26 26
25 8S88-2 4.0/1.5 100, 102, A. C 42 27zs 42 42
25 BS 88-2 6.0/2.5 100,101, 102,A.C 64 44zs 64 64
30 BS 1361 4.0/1.5 C 36 17zs 36 36
8S3036 NP NPol NPol NPol NPol
30 BS 1361 6.0/2.5 100, 102, A. C 53 27zs 53 53
BS 3036 C 57 23zs 57 57
0
'ft 30 BS 1361 10.0/4.0 100, 101, 102, 103, A, C 90 45zs 90 90
853036 100. 102, A. C 93 37zs 93 93
g·.,.

},
32 BS 88·2.2, BS 88·6 4.0/1.5 33 l lzs 33 33
cb/RCBO Type B 33 31zs 33 33
cb/RCBO Type C NPsc NPzs 33 18ZS

1:
ooo
!!I=,,
32
cb/RCBO Type D
BS 88-2.2, BS 88-6
cb/RCBO Type B
6.0/25
NPsc
49
49
NPzs
19zs
49
lsc
49
49
NPzs
49
49
o..v, 100,102, A, C
cb/RCBO Type C NPsc NPzs 49 29zs
[ ' cb D NPsc NPzs 1SC 1zs
a_f;'
,2<5:
-< ,,,

..
OI
 T Table 1.1 (I) continued
Protedive device cable size Allowed installation methods Maximum length (m) (note 1)
Rating (A) Type (mm2 ) (note l )
------------
z. s 0.8 Q TN-5
RCD 30 No RCD
z.
s 0 . l S Q TN-C-5
RCD 30 No RCD
mA mA
I 2 l 4 5 6 7 8
Radial final drcults (51\11 voltage drop, terminal load)
32 BS 88-2.2. BS 88-6 10.0/4.0 81 31zs 81 81
cb/RC801ypeB 100, 101, 10:Z. 103, A, C
81 81 81 81
cb/RCBO 1ype C NPsc NPZ5 81 47ZS
cb/RCBO'JweD NPsc NPD 2K 1D
32 BS 88·2 4.0/1.S C 33 12zs 33 33
32 8S88-2 &.o/25 100, 102. A, C 49 19zs 49 49
32 BS 88·2 10/4.0 100, 101, 102. 103, A. C 81 31ZS 81 81
32 8S88-3 4.o/1.5 C 33 8D 33 30zs
32 BS 88-3 6.0/2.S 100, 102, A. C 49 13zs 49 48zs
0 32 8S88-3 10/4.0 100, 101, 102. 103, A, C 81 21ZS 81 79zs

},
40 BS 88-2.2, BS 88-6 6.0/2.5 43 43 43 43
g·.,. cb/RCBO Type B 43 20zs 43 43
cb/RCBO Type C NPsc NPzs 30sc 17zs
cb/RCBO Type D NPsc NPzs NPsc NPzs

1:
ooo
!!I=,,
40 BS 88-2.2, BS 88-6
cb/RCBOlypeB
cb/RCBO 'Jwe
C
10.0/4.o
}100.10>. A , C
66
66
NPsc
66
45zs
NPD
66
66
51sc
66
66
29zs
o..v,
cb/RCBO lype D NPsc NPZ5 NPsc NPZ5
[ ' 40 BS 88·2.2, BS 88-6 16.0/6.0 104 104 104 104
a.f2
,2<5:
-< ,,, cb/RCBO Type B } 100, 101, 102, llll, A, C
104 68zs 104 104

•
cb/RCBO Type C NPsc NPzs 81SC 44ZS
Ill cb/RCBO Type D NPsc NPzs NPsc NPzs
T T a b l e 7.1 (I) continued
Protective device cable size Allowed installation methods Maximum length (m) (note 1)
Rating (A} (mm') (note 2) Z. s 0.8 C TN-S Z. s 0.35 0 TN-C-S
Type ------- -------
RCD 30 No RCD RCD 30 No RCD
mA mA
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
Radial f i n a l d n : u l t s (5C!'D vofta1e drop. terminal load)
40 BS 88-2 6.0/2.S C 43 NPls 43 3Szs
40 8S88-2 10.0/4.0 100, 102, A, C 66 NPzs 66 57zs
40 BS 88-2 16.0/6.0 100, 101, 102, 103, A. C 104 NPls 104 B7zs
45 BS 1361 6.0/2.S C 21sc NPad 35 22ad
853036 NP NPol NPol NPol NPol
45 BS 1361 10.0/4.0 100, 102, C 36sc Sad 58 58
BS 3036 C 62 62 62 62
45 BS 1361 16.0/6.0 100, 101, 102, A, C 581c 31D 91 91
8S3036 102,C 97 97 97 97
45 BS 88·3 6.0/2.5 C 35 NPls 35 21zs
45 B588-3 10.0/4.0 100, 102, C SB NPzs SB 34zs
45 BS 88-3 16.0/6.0 100, 101, 102, A, C 91 NPls 91 51zs
Notes to Table 7.1 (i):

Voltage drop is the limiting constraint on the circuit cable length unless marked as follows:
► ad Limited by reduced csa of protective conductor (adiabatic limit)
► ol uble/device/toad combination not allowed in any of the installation conditions
► zs Limited by earth fault loop impedance z..
► sc Limited by line to neutral loop impedance (short-circuit).
l The allowed installation methods are listed, see Tables 7.1 (ii) and 7.1 (iii) for further description.
l NP - Not Permi11ed, prohibiting factor as note t.
For application of RCOs and RCBOs, see 3.6.3.
::g
=a T Table 7. lfli) Installation reference methods and cable ratings for 70 °C

:;a
thermoplastic. (PVC) insulated and sheathed flat cable with
protective conductor

:a Installation reference method

Ref. Description
Conductor cross--sectional area (mm1)
1.0 1.5 2.5 4 6 10 16
:;B A A A A A A A
C Clipped direct 16 20 27 37 47 64 85
a• Enclosed in conduit or 13 16.5 23 30 38 52 69
trunkins on a wall, etc.
102 In a stud wall with thermal 13 16 21 27 35 47 63
.insulation with cable touching
the wall
100 In contact with plasterboard 13 16 21 27 34 45 57
cet1ing or joists covered
by thermal insulation not
exceedins 100 mm
A Enclosed in conduit in an 11.5 14.5 20 26 32 57
:a
44
insulated wall
101 In contact with plasterboard 10.5 13 17 22 27 36
cet1ins or joists covered by
thermal insulation exceedins
=a 103
100mm
Surrounded by thermal 8 10 13.5 17.5 23.5 32 42.5
insulation including in a stud
wall with thermal insulation
with cable not touching a wall
Notes:

=9 1 cable ratings taken from Table 405 of BS 7671.

8"' token from Table 4D2A of BS 7671,!see Appendix F. I

=9
:;a
==3

On-Site Guide
e The Institution of Engineering and Tedlnorogy
I"
::g
=a T Table 7.1 flil) Installation methods spedfically for flat twin and earth cables in

:;a
thermali insulation

lnstaUntion Method Reference

:a Method to
be used to
determine
:;B Number Examples Description
cunent-cerrying
capacity
100 Installation methods for flat Table 405
twin and earth c.able dipped
direct to a wooden joist, or
touching the plasterboard
ceiling surface, above a
plasterboard ceiling with
thermal insulation not
exceeding 100 mm in thickness
having a minimum U value of
0.1 W)m2K
101 lnstalation methods for flat Table4D5

:a twin and earth cable dipped

drect to a wooden joist. or
touching the plaslerboard
ceilif1l surface, above a plaster-
board ceiling with thermal
=a insulation m:eedioa100 m n
in thickness having a rnininum
U value of 0.1 W/m2K
102 Installation methods for flat Table 405
twin and earth cable in a stud
wall with thermal insulation
\Wh a minimum U value of
=9 0.1 W)m2K with t h e �
to1Jching the inner wall surface,
0
or touching the plasterboard
ceiling surface, and the inner
skin having a minimum U value
of 10W/m2K
103 lnstalation methods for flat Table4D5
twin and earth cable in a stud
0 wall with thermal insulation
=9 with a mininum U value of
0.1 W/n,2K with the cableoot

:;a Notes:
t Q u d q the inner wall Sl.lface

1 Wherever practicable, a cable should be fixed in a position such that it will not be covered with
==3 1
thermal insulation.
Regulation 523.9, BS 5803•5: Appendix C Avoidance of overheating of electric cables', Building
egulations Approved 'Document B an ermal Insulation: avoiding risks, BR 262, BRE 2001 refer.

On-Site Guide 1 6 7
e The Institutionof EngineeringandTedlnorogy
::g
=a 7.1 Standard final circuits
:;a 7.2.1 Grouping of circuit cables
:a The tables assume heating {including water heating) cables are not grouped.
For cables •of household or similar installations (heating and water heating excepted), if
:;B the following rules are fol'lowed, derating for grouping is not necessary:
Cables are not grouped, that is, th e y are separated by at least two cable
diameters when installed under thermal insulation, namely installation
methods lOQ, 101, 102 and 103.
ii Cables clipped direct (including in cement or plaster) are dipped side by side
in one layer and separated by at least one cable diameter.
iii Cables above ceilings are dipped to joists as per installation methods 100 to
103 of Table 4A2 of SS 7671.
For other groupings, amblent temperatures h1gher than 3 0 °C or enclosure in thermal
insulation, cabte csa will need to be increased as per Appendix F of this Guide.

7.2.2 Socket..outlet circuits

:a The length represents the total ring cable loop length and does not indude any spurs.
As a rule of thumb for rings, unfused spur lengths should not exceed 1/8 the cable
length from the spur to the furthest point of the ring.

=a The total number of fused spurs is unlimited but the number of non-fused spurs is not to
exceed the total number of socket--outlets and items of stationary equipment connected
directly in the circ1uit.
A non fused spur feeds only one twin socket-outlet or one permanently connected item
of electrical equipment. Such a spur is connected to a circuit at the terminals of socket-
outlets or at junction boxes or at the origin of the circuit in the distribution board.

=9 A fused spur ,is connected to the circuit through a fused connection unit, the rating of
the fuse in the unit not exceeding that of the cable forming the spur and, in any event,
not exceeding 13 A The number of socket-outlets which may be supplied by a fused
spur is unlimited.
The circuit is assumed to have a load of 20 A at the furthest point and the balance to
the rating of the protective device evenly distributed. (For a 32 A device this equates to
a load of .26 .A at the furthest point.)

7.2.J Lighting circuits

=9 A maximum voltage drop of 3 per cent of the 230 V nominal supply voltage has been
anowed in the circuits; see Append F.
:;a The circuit is assumed to have a load equal to the rated current (In) of the circuit
protective device, evenly distributed along the circu;t. Where this is not the case, circuit
==3

168
lengths wi'II need to be reduc.ed where voltage drop is the Hmiting factor, or halved where
load is aB at the extremity.

On-Site Guide
e The Institutionof Engineeringand Tedlnorogy
::g
=a The most onerous installation condition acceptable for the load and device rating is
presumed when cal.rulating the limiting voltage drop. If the installation conditions are not
:;a the most onerous a;Howed (see column 4 of Table 7.1 (i)) the voltage drop will not be as
great as presumed in the table.
:a 7.2.4 RCDs
:;B Where circuits have residual current protection, the Hmiting factor is often the maximum
loop impedance that will result in operation of the overcurrent device within 5 seconds
for a short-circuit (line to neutral) fault. (See note 1 to Table 7.1 (i) and limiting factor sc.)

7.2.5 Requirement for RCDs

RCDs are required:
411.5 where the earth fault loop impedance is too high to provide the required
disconnection, for example, where the distributor does not provide a
connection to the means of earthing - TT earthlng arrangement
41L3.3(i) ii for socket-outlets where used by ordinary persons for general use
701.411.3.3 iii for all circuits of locations containing a bath or shower
iv for circuits supplying mobile equlpment not exceeding 32 A for use outdoors
:a
411.3.3(ii)
522.6.101 v for cables without earthed metallic covering installed in walls or partitions at
522.6.102 a depth of less than 50 mm and not protected by earthed steel conduit or
522.6.103 similar
vi for cables IIIJithout earthed metallic covering installed in walls or partitions

=a with metal parts (not including screws or nails) and not protected by earthed
steel conduit or the like.
RCD protedion can be omitted in the following circumstances:
411.3.3(b) specific labelled socket-outlets, for example, a socket-outlet for a freezer.
However, the circuit cables must not require RCD protection as per v and vi
above, that is, circuit cables must be endosed in earthed steel conduit or
have an earthed metal sheath or be at a depth of at least 50 mm in a waH or
partition without metal parts
411.3.J(a) ii socket outf et circuits in situations where the use of equipment and work
on the building fabric and electrical installation is controUed by skilled or
instructed persons, for example, in some industrial and commercial locations;
l s e e 3.6.2.2. I

Cables install.ed on the surface do not specifically require RCD protection, however, RCD
411.S.2 protection may be required for other reasons, such as where the installation forms part
of a TT system and the earth fault loop impedance values for the overcurrent protective
device cannot be met.

On-Site Guide 1 6 9
e The Institutionof EngineeringandTedlnorogy
::g
=a 41L3.3{b) It is expected that all socket-outlets in a dwelling will have RCD protection at 30 mA,
however, the exception of Regulation 411.3.3 can be applied in certain cases.
:;a
7.2.6 n systems
:a For TT systems the figures for TN-C-S systems, with RCDs, may be used provided that:

:;B the cirruit is protected by an ROD to BS 4293, BS EN 61008, BS EN 61009 or

IEC 62325 with a rated residual operating current not exceeding that required
for its circuit position,
ii the total earth fault loop impedance is verified as being less than 200 o, and
iii a device giving both overload and short circuit protection is installed in the
circ-uit. This may be an RCBO or a combination of a fuse or circuit-breaker
with an RCD.
7.2. 7 Choice of protective device
The selection of protective device depends upon:
prospective fault current
ii cirouit load characteristics
iii cable current-carrying capacity
:a iv disconnection time limit.
Whilst these facto•rs have generally been allowed for in the standard flnail circuits in Tab[e
7.1 (i), the fdlowing additional guidance is given:

1 Prospective fault current

434.5.1 If a protective devlce is to operate safely, ,ts rated short circu!t capacity must be not
less than the prospective fault rurrent at the point where it is installed. See Table
7.2.7(i).
313.1 The distributor needs to be consulted as to the prospective fault current at the
origin of the Installation. Except for London and some other major city centres, the
maximum fault current for 230 V single-phase supplies up to 100 A will not exceed
16 kA. In genera I, the fault current is unlikely to exceed 16.5 kA.

On-Site Guide 1 7 0
c The lnstirutionof 8'1gineeringand Technofogy
::g
=a T Table 7.2.7(1), Rated short-circuit capacities

:;a Device type Device

designation
Rated short--circuit
capacity (kA)

:a Semi-enclosed fuse to BS 3036

with categoiy of duty
SlA
S2A
1
2
:;B cartridge fuse to BS 1361 type I
S4A 4
16.5
type II 33.0
General purpose fuse to BS 88-2 50at415V
BS 88-3 type I 16
type II 31.5
General purpose fuse to BS 88-6 16.5 at 240 V
80 at 415 V
Circuit-breakers to BS 3871 Ml 1
(replaced by BS EN 60898) Ml.5 1.5
M3 3
M4.5 4.5

:a M6
M9
6
9
Circuit-breakers to BS EN 60898• lcn lcs
and RCBOs to BS EN 61,009 1.5 (15)

=a
3.0 ,(3.0)
6 (6.0)
10 ,(7.5)
15 {7.5)
20 ,(10.0)
25 {12.5)
* Two S:hort-circuit capacities are defined in BS E 60898 and BS EN 61009:

=9 lcn the rated short-circuit capacity (marked on the dev:ice).

la the in-service short-circuit capacity.
The differenoe between the two is the oondition of the circuit-breaker after manufacrurers testing.
lo, is the maximum fault current the brea,ker can interrupt safely, although the breaker may no longer
be usable.
lc:s is the maximum fault current the breaker can interrupt safely without toss of performance.
The b value (in amperes) is normally marked on the device in a rectangle, for example, 6000 and for
the majority of applications the prospective fault ament at the terminals of the circuit-breaker should not
exceed this value.

=9 For domesti.c installations the prospective faulc rurrent is unlikely to exceed 6 kA, up to which value the
lcn will equal tcs.

:;a The shon-circuit capadty of devices to BS EN 60947·2 ts as speci fied by the manufacturer.

==3

On-Site Guide 1 7 1
e The Institutionof EngineeringandTedlnorogy
::g
=a ii Circuit load characteristics

:;a 553.1.1.3 a Semi-endosed fuses. Fuses should preferably be of the cartridge type.
However, semi endosed fuses to BS 3036 are still permitted for use

:a in domestic and similar premises if fitted with a fuse element which, in

the absence of more specific advice from the manufacturer, meets the
requirements of Tab'le 53.1.
:;B b Cartridge fuses to 85 1361 (now withdrawn, replaced by 85 88-3:2010).
These are for use in domestic and similar premises.
c Cartridge fuses to BS 88 series. Three types are specified:
gG fuse links with a full-range breaking capacity for general application
gM fuse links with a full range breaking capacity for the protection of motor
circuits
aM fuse links for the protection of motor drcuits.
d Circuit-breakers to BS EN 60898 (or BS 3871-1) and RCBOs to BS EN 61009.
Guidance on selection is given ,n Table 7.2.7(ii).

• Table 1.2.7(H) Application of circuit-breakers

Circuit- Trip a1rrent Application

:a breaker type
1
(D. I s to 5 s)
2.7 to 4 In Domestic and commercial installations having little
B 3 to 5 In or no switching surge
2 4 t o 7 In General use in commercial/industrial installations
=a C
3
5 to 10 In
7 to 10 In
where the use of fluorescent lighting, small motors,
etc., can produce switching surges that would
operate a Type 1 or B circuit-breaker. 1ype C or 3
may be necessary in highly inductive circuits such as
banks of fluorescent lighting
4 10 to 50 In N'ot suitable for general use
D 10 to 201 0 Suitable for transformers, X-ray mac-hines, industrial
=9 welding equipment, etc., where high inrush currents
may occur
NOTE: I" is the nominal rating of the circuit-breaker.
m Cable current-carrying capacities
For guidance on the coordination of device and cable ratings see Appe11dix F.

iv Disconnection times
411.3.2.2 The protective device must operate within the required disconnection time as
=9 411.3.2.3
411.3.2.4
appropriate for the circuit. Appendix B provides maximum permissible measured
earth foult loop impedances for fuses, circuit-breakers and RCBOs.
:;a 411.8.3

==3

On-Site Guide
c The lnstirutionof 8'1gineeringand Technofogy
172
::g
=a 7.3 lnstaHation considera:fions
:;a 7.3.1 Floors and ceilings
:a 522.6,100 Where a low voltage cable is installed under a floor or above a ceiling it must be run in
suoh a position that it is not 1;able to be damaged by contact with the floor or ceiling or
the fixings thereof. A cable passing through a joist or ceiling support must:
:;B be at least 50 mm from the top or bottom, as appropriate, or
ii have earthed armouring or an earthed metal sheath, or
iii be enclosed in earthed steel conduit or trunking, or
iv be provided with mechanical protection sufficient to prevent penetration •Of
the cable by nails, sorews and the like NOTE: the requirement to prevent
penetration ;s difficult to meet), or
414 v form part of a SELV or PELV circuit.

See Figure 7.3.1.

Figure 7.3.I Cables through joists

:a Maximum depth
of notch should be
0.125 x joist depth
Maximum diameter
of hole should be
0.25 x joist depth

=a Notches on top
in a zone between
0.07 and 0.25 x span

----
=9
Holes on oentre line
in a zone between

Span

=9
:;a
Notes:

1 Maximum diameter of hole should be 0.25 x joist depth.

2 Holes on centre line in a zone bet1iveen 0.25 and 0.4 x span.
==3 3
4
Maximum depth of notch should be 0.125 :x joist depth.
Notches on top in a zone between 0.07 and 0.25 x span.
5 Holes in the same joist should be at least 3 diameters apart.

On-Site Guide I 73
e The Institution of Engineering and Tedlnorogy
::g
=a 7.3.2 Walls and partitions
:;a s22.s.101 A cable concealed in a wall or partition must:
be at least 50 mm from the surface, or
:a ii have earthed armouring or an earthed metal sheath, or
iii be enclosed in earthed steel conduit or trunking, or
:;B iv be provided with mechanical protection sufficient to prevent penetration of
the cable by nails, screws and the like NOTE: the requirement to prevent
penetration ;s difficult to meet), or
v be installed either hori2ontally within 150 mm of the top of the wall or
partition or vertic-ally within 150 mm of the angle formed by two walls, or run
horizontally or vertically to an accessory or consumer unit (see Figure 7.3.2),
or
414 v i form part of a SELV or PELV circuit.
In domest,ic and similar installations, cables not installed as per i, ii, iii or iv but complying
with v must be protected by a 30 mA RCD.
522.6.102 In domestic and similar installations, cables installed in walls or partitions with a metal or
part metal construction must be either:

:a a
b
m,
installed as ii, iv or vi above, or
protected by a 30 mA RCO.
For instaUations under the supervision of a skilled or instructed person, such as

=a
commercial or industrial where only authorized equipment is used and only skilled
persons will work on the building, RCD protection as described above is not required.
NOTE.: Domestic or similar insta'llations are not considered to be under the supervision
of skilled or instructed persons.

T Figure 7.J.2 Zones prescribed in Regulation 522.6.lOl(v) (see v above)

=9

Room2

=9 Room 1

:;a
==3

On-Site Guide 1 7 4
c Thelnstirution of � n g andTechnofogy
::g
=a 528 7.4 Proximity t o eledrical and other services
:;a 528.3 Electrical and all other services must be protected from any harmfu'I mutual effects
foreseen as likely under conditions of normal service. For example, cables should not be
:a in oontact with or run alongside hot pipes.

:;B 7.4.1 Segregation of Band I and Band II circuits

s2a.1 Band I (extra-low voltage) circuits must not be contained within the same wiring system
Part 2 (for example, trunking) as Band I (low voltage) circuits unless:
every cable is insulated for the highest voltage present, or
ii each conductor of a, muhicore cable is insulated for the highest voltage present,
or
iii the cables are instalted in separate compartments, or
iv the cables fixed to a cable tray are separated by a partition, or
v for a, multicore cable, they are separated by an earthed metal screen of
equivalent current-carrying capacity to that of the largest Band II circuit.
Definitions of voltage bands

:a
Band I circuit: Circuit that is nominally extra-low voltage, i.e. not exceeding 5 0
V a.c. or 120 V d.c. For example, SELV, PELV, telecommunications, data and
signalling
Band II circuit: Cirwit that is nominally low voltage, i.e. 51 to 1000 V a.c. and
121 to 1500 V d.c. Telecommunication cables that are generally ELV but have
=a ringing vo[tages exceeding 5 0 V are Band L
s2s.1, NOTE.: Fire alarm and emergency lighting circuits must be separated from other cables
Note 2 and from each other, in compliance with '8S 5839 and BS 5266.

7.4.2 Proximity to communications cables

528.2 An adequate separation between telecommunication wiring Band I) and electric
=9 power and lighting (Band II) circuits must be maintained. This is to prevent mains
voltage appearing in telecommunication circuits with consequent danger to personnel.
BS 6701 :2004 recommends that the minimum separation distances given in Tables
7.4.2,Q) and 7.4.2(ii) should be maintained.

T Table 1·. 4.2(1), External cables

Minimum separation distanc-es between external low voltage electricity supply
cables operating in exceS-s of soV a.c. or 120 V d.c. to earth, but not exceeding 600

=9 V a.c. or 900 V d.c. to earth (Band II), and telecommunications cables (Band f).
Voltage to earth Nonnal separation Exceptions to nonnal separation

:;a Exceeding 50 V a.c.

distances
so mm
distances. p,lu:s conditions to exception
Below this figure a non-conducting divider
or 120 V dac., but not should be inserted between the cables
==3 exceeding 600 V a.c.
or 900V d.c.

On-Site Guide 1 7 5
e The Institutionof EngineeringandTedlnorogy
::g
=a T Table 7. 4.2(11) Internal cables

:;a Minimum separa.tion distances between intemaf low voltage electricity supply
cables operating in excess of SO V a.c. or 120 V d.c. to earth, but not exceeding 600

:a
V a.c. or 900 V d.c. to earth (Band II), and telecommunications cables (Band l).
Voltage to earth Normal separation Exceptions to normal separation
distances distances, plus conditions to exception
:;B Exceeding 50 V a.c. so mm 50 mm separation need not be
or 120 V doc., but not maintained, provided that
exceeding 600 V a.c. (i) the LV cables are enclosed in
or900V d.c. separate conduit which, if metallk,
is earthed in accordanc:e with
BS 7671, OR
(ii) the LV cables are enclosed in
separate trunking which, if metallic,
is earthed in ac.cordanc:e with BS
7671, OR
(iii) the LV cable is of the mineral
insulated type or is of earthed
armoured construction.

:a Notes:

1 Where the LV cables share the same tray then the normal sepa ration should be met
2 Where LV and telecommunications cables are obliged to cross. additional insulation should be
provided at �he crossing point; this is not necessary if either cable is armoured.

=a 7.4.J Separation of gas installation pipework

Gas installation pipes must be spaced:
a at least 150 mm away from electricity meters, controls, electrical switches or
socket-outlets, distribution boards or consumer units;
b at least 25 mm away from electricity supply and distribution cables.
=9 See also 2.3 and Rgure 2.3.
528.3.4 (The cited distances are quoted within BS 6891 :2005(2008) Installation of low pressure
Note gas pipework in domestic premises, dause 8.16.2.)

7.4A lndudion loops

A p a r ticular form of ham,ful effect may occur when an electrical installation shares the
space occupled by a hearing aid induction loop.

=9 Under these circumstances, if Hne and neutral conductors or switch feeds and switch
wires are not run dose together, there may be interference with the induction loop.
:;a This can occur when a conventional two-way lighting circuit is ;nstalled. Th;s effect can
be reduced by connecting as shown in Figure 7.4.4.
==3

On-Site Guide 176

c The lnstirution of 8'1gineering and Technofogy
::g
=a T Figure 7.4.4 Circuit for reducing interference with induction loop

:;a
:a switch feed
line neutral
:;B
f-switch
wire
light point

2-way switch

cores grouped
together

:a

=a 2-way switch

circuit shown switched off

=9 Table s1 NOTE: Black/grey switch conductors to be identified in accordance with Table Kl.

s43.7 7.5 Earthing requirements for the installation

of ,equipment having high protective
conductor cunent
7.5.1 Equipment
=9 543.1.1.101 Equipment having a protective conductor current exceed;ng 3.5 mA but not exceeding
543.1.1.102 10 mA must be either permanently connected to the fixed wiring of the installation or

:;a connected by means of an industrial plug and socket complying with BS EN 60309-2.
!Equipment having a protective conductor current exceeding 10 mA should be connected
==3 by one of the following methods:

On-Site Guide
e The Institutionof EngineeringandTedlnorogy
177
::g
=a permanently connected to the wiring of the installation, with tlie protective
conductor selected in accordance with Regulation 543.7.1.103. The
:;a permanent connection to the wiring may be by means of a flexible cable
ii a flexible cable with an industrial plug and socket to BS EN 60309-2, provided
:a that either:
a the protective conductor of the associated flexible cable is of cross-
:;B sectional area not less than 2.5 mm 2 for plugs up to 16 A and not less
than 4 mm 2 for plugs rated above 16 A, or
b the protective conductor of the associated flexible cable is of cross-
sectional area not less than that of the line conductor
iii a protective c-0nductor complying with Section 543 with an earth monitoring
system to BS 4444 installed which, in the event of a continuity fault occurring
in the protective conductor, automatica\ly disconnects the supply to the
equipment.

7.5.2 Circuits
543.7.1.103 The wiring of every final circuit and distribution circuit having a protective conductor
current likely to exceed 10 mA must have high integrity protective conductor connections
complying with one or more of the following:
:a a single protective conductor having a cross•sectional area not less than 10
mm 2, oomplying with Regulations 543.2 and 543.3
ii a single copper protective conductor having a csa not less than 4 mm2,

=a
complying with Regulations 543.2 and 543.3, the protective conductor being
enclosed to provide additional protection against mechanical damage, for
example within a flexibl.e conduit
543.7.1.104 iii two individual protective conductors, eadh complying with Section 543, the
ends being terminated independently
543.7.1.103 iv earth monitoring or use of double-wound transformer.
543.7.1.105 NOTE: Distribution boards are to indicate circuits with high protective conductor currents (see 6.15).

7.5.3 Socket-outlet final drcuits

:;a 543.7.2.101 For a final1 circuit with socket•outlets or connection units, where the protective conductor
current in normal service is likely to exceed 10 mA, the following arrangements are
acceptable:
a ring final circuit with a ring protective conductor. Spurs, if provided, require
high integrity protective conductor connections (Figure 7.5.3(i)), or
ii a radial final circuit with:
=9 a a protective conductor c-0nnected as a ring (Figure 7.5.3(ii)), or
b an additional protective conductor provided by metal conduit or ducting.
:;a
==3

On-Site Guide
c The lnstirution of 8'1gineering and Technofogy
I'
::g
=a T Figure 7.5.J(i) Ring final circuit supplying socket-outlets

:;a
:a Distribution
board
PE
-. -- • •
Soc:ket-ou lets must have two
terminals for protective conductors
:;B Separate
connections One termrnal to be used for each
prot.ectfve conductor
Minimum size of 1.5 mm2

. . •· -. •
.. .-
I I •

'Y Figure 7.5.J(H), Radial fina'I circuit supplying socket-outlets with duplicate
protective oonductors
P£ Separate
connections

:a
Duplicate protective conductor. Keep dose
to circuit conductors to reduce EMC effects
I(

Distribution

=a
board
• • • • . ·• . -
Socket-outlets must have two termlnal.s for protective conductors
One lerminal to be used for each protective conductor
Minimum size of l.S mm 2

=9
7.6 Eledrical supplies to furniture
Where electrical equipment is insta,lled within purpose-built items of furniture, such as
cupboa,rds, shop displays or lecterns, and supplied from a p!ug and socket arrangement,
no specific standard exists for such installations, therefore guidance is given here which,
essentially, follows the principles of BS 7671. For electrical systems in office furniture and
educationa,I furniture, BS 6396:2008 currently exists for installations which are supplied
via a 13 A as 1363 plug.
=9 The following points should be adhered to:

:;a 415.1.l ► socket-outlets supplying items of furniture must be protected by an RCO

providing additional protection at 30 mA
==3 ► cables of Band I and Band II circuits to be kept apart as far as is reasonably
practicable;!see also 7.4.1 I

On-Site Guide 1 7 9
e The Institutionof EngineeringandTedlnorogy
::g
=a ► cables of Band I and Band II circuits, which are often hidden beneath the
desk, should be sufficiently mechanically protected from damage caused by
:;a movement of chairs, storage of materials and the movement of feet and legs
► cable management systems or containment, such as conduit or trunking,
:a should be installed to aUow the safe routing, protection and separation of
cables through the equipment
:;B ► long-term use of multi-gang extension leads should be avoided by installing
a sufficient number of socket-outlets to supply the equipment to be used;
employers should not allow ad hoe solutions to be created by users. See also
see BS 6396:2008
► ensure that cables are sufficiently protected and c,annot become trapped
or damaged where des ks are designed to be extended or altered to suit
different activities or users.
543.2.1 There is no general requirement to ensure electrical continuity across the metallic frame
543.2.6 of an item of forniture unless the frame has been designed to be used as a protective
conductor.

:a

=a

=9

=9
:;a
==3

On-Site Guide
c The lnstirutionof 8'1gineering and Technofogy
180
::g

B
=a
:;a Locations containing
:a
:;B
a bath or showelr

8.1 S1ummary of requirements

701 Due to the presence of water, locations containing a bath or shower are onerous for
equipment and there is an increased danger of electric shock.
The additional requirements c-an be summarised as follows:
701.411.3.3 all low voltage circuits of the location must be protected by 30 mA RCDs
701.512.3 ii socket-outlets, e.g. BS 1363, are not allowed within 3 metres of zone 1 (the

:a 701.512.2
edge of the bath or shower basin)
iii protection against ingress •Of water is specified for equipment within the
zones, see Table 8.1 and Figures 8.1 (i) to 8.1 (iii)
701.512.3 iv there are restrictions as to where appliances, switchgear and wiring

=a
accessories may be installed, see Table 8.1 and Figures 8.1 (i) to 8.1 (iii).
701.415.2 Supplementary bonding of locations containing a bath or shower is required unless all
the following requirements are m e t
411.3.2.2 ► all circuits of the location meet the required disconnection times,
701.411.3.3 ► all circuits of the location have additional protection by 30 mA RCDs, and
411.3.1.2 ► all extraneous conductive parts within the location are effectively connected

=9 by main protective bonding conductors to the main eairthing terminal of the

installation.

=9
:;a
==3

On-Site Guide 1 8 1
e The Institutionof EngineeringandTedlnorogy
::g la
=a T Table 8.1 Requirements for equipment (current-using and accessories) in a

:;a
location containing a bath or shower

Zone Minimum Cummt-using equipment Switchgear and accessories

:a degree of
protedion

:;B 0 IPX7 Only 12 V a.c. rms or 30

V ripple-free d.c. SELV, the
None allowed.

safety source installed

outside the zones.
1 IPX4 (IPXS 25 V a.c. rms or 60 V ripple- Only 12 V a.c. rms or 30 V
if water free d.c. SEllf or PBY, the ripple free d.c. SEllf switches,
jets) safety source installed the safety source installed
outside the zones. outside the zones.
The following mains voltage
fixed, permanently connected
equipment allowed:
whirlpool units, electric
showers, shower pumps,
ventilation equipment,
:a towel rails, water heaters,
luminaires.
2 IPX4 (IPXS rixed permanently connected Only switches and sockets
if water equipment allowed. General of SELV circuits allowed, the

=a jets) rules apply. source being outside the

zones, and shaver supply
units complying with BS EN
61558-2-5 if fixed where
direct spray is unlikely.
Outside IPXXBor General rules apply. Accessories, SEllf socket-
zones IP2X outlets and shaver supply
units t o 85 EN 61558-2-5
=9 allowed.
Socket-outlets allowed 3
m horizontally from the
bounda of zone 1.

=9
:;a
==3

On-Site Guide
e The Institutionof EngineeringandTedlnorogy
182
 la
T Figure 8.1 (i) Zone dimensions in a location containing a bath
Section Plan

---------------------
Zonel Zone 2 Outside Zones

r
Window re<:er1s Zone 2 ZoneO Zone2 Outside Zones
2.2Sm

0.6m ..

Zon.eO
S - thickness of partition

The space under the bath is:

Zone 1 if acc.essible without the use of a tool
outside the zones if accessible only wfth the use of
a tool

T Figure 8.1(11) Zones in a location containing a shower with basin and with
permanent fixed partition
Section Plan
_,..- Recess above ceiling
•
wminaire ZoneO Zone2
Zonel Zone2 Outside Zones
s
i0.6 -S) m

Sm S = thickness of ,partition
Shower
0.6m •

ZoneO

On-Site Guide
e The Institutionof EngineeringandTedlnorogy
I'
::g la
=a T Figure 8.1 (Iii) Zones in a location containing a shower without a basin, but with
a partition
:;a Section .Plan

:a Celllng

l
ZoneO Axed water
outlet
:;B Zone1 Zone1 Outside Zones
Y 1.2m

'.
Outside Zones
2..2.Sm
in-.

S = thickness of parti ion

Y = radial distance from the fixed water outlet to
the Inner corner of the partition

8.2 Shower cubicle in a room used for other

:a purposes
Where a shower cubicle is instaHed in a room other than a bathroom or shower room the
requirements for bathrooms and shower rooms must be compHed with.

=a
8.3 Underfloor heating systems
8.3.1 Locations containin!1 a bath and shower
701.753 Underfloor heat;ng installations in locations containing a bath and shower should have
an overall earthed metallic grid or the heating cable should have an earthed metalHc
=9 sheath, which must be connected to the protective conductor of the supply circuit.

:;a 8.J.2 other areas

753.411.3.2 In areas other than special locations, Class I heating units which do not have an exposed-
conductive-part i.e . integrated earth screen or sheath, must have a metallic grid, with
a spadng of not more than 30 mm, installed above the floor heating elements. The
grid must be connected to the protective conductor of the electrical installation and
the heating system protected by an RCD with a rated residual operating current not
=9 415.1.1 exceeding 30 mA.
753.415.l In areas where occupants are not expected to be completely wet, a circuit supplying
701.753 heat,ing equipment of Class II construction or equivalent insulation should be provided
with additional protection by the use of an RCD with a rated residual operating current
==3 not exceeding 30 mA.

On-Site Guide
c The lnstirutionof 8'1gineering and Technofogy
184
::g
=a
:;a lnspedion and
:a
:;B
testing
9.1 Inspection and testing
610.1 Every installation must be inspected and tested during erection and on completion before
being put into service to verify, so far as is reasonably practicab'le, that the requirements
of the Regulations have been met.
Precautions must be taken to avoid danger to persons and to avoid damage to property
and installed equipment during inspection and testing.

:a
631.4 If the inspection and tests are satisfactory, a signed Electrical Installation Certificate
632.l together with a Schedule of Inspections and a Schedule of Test Results (as in Appendix
632.3 G) are to be given to the person ordering the work.

Inspection
=a 9.J
9.2.1 Procedure and purpose
611.l Inspection must precede testing and must normally be done with that part of the
installation under inspection disconnected from the supply.
611.2 The purpose of the inspection is to verify that equipment is:

=9 correctl y selected and erected in accordance with BS 7671 (and, if

appropriate, its own standard)
ii not visibly damaged or defective so as to impair safety.

9..2.2 Inspection checklist

611.3 The inspection must include at least the checking of relevant items from the following
checklist:
526 connection of conductors
=9 514.3
522.6
ii identification of conductors
iii routing of cables in safe zones or protection against mechanical damage

:;a 433
525
iv selection of conductors for current-carrying capacity and voltage drop, in
accordance with the design
v connection of single-pole devices for protection or switching in line
==3
132.14.1
conductors only
526 v i correct connection of accessories and equipment (in.eluding polarity)

On-Site Guide 1 8 5
e The Institutionof EngineeringandTedlnorogy
::g
=a 527.2 vii. presence of fire barriers, su;table seals and protection against thermal effects
viii methods of protection against electric shock:
:;a
410.3.3
a basic protection and fault protection, i.e.

:a 414 SELV
PHV
412 double insulation
:;B reinforced insulation
b basic protection, i.e.
416.l insulation of live parts
416.2 ► barriers or enclosures
c fault protection
411 automatic disconnection of supply
The following to be confirmed for presence and sized in accordance
with the design:
- earthing conductor
- circuit protective conductors
- protective bonding conductors
:a - earthing arrangements for combined protective and functional
purposes
- presence of adequate arrangements for alternative source(s),
where applicable
=a - PELV
- choice and setting of protect;ve and monitoring devices (for fault
and/or overcurrent protection)
413 electrical separation
418.3
415.1 d additional protection by RCDs
132.11 ix prevention of mutual detrimental influence (refer to 7.4)
=9 537 x presence of appropriate devices for isolation and switching correctly located
445 xi presence of undervoltage protective devices (where appropriate)
514 xii labeHing of protective devices induding circuit-breakers, RCDs, fuses, switches
and te rm inals, main earthing and bonding connections
522 xiii selection of equipment and protective measures appropriate to external
influences
132.12 xiv adequacy of ac.cess to switchgear and equipment
514 x v presence of danger notices and other warning signs (see Section 6)
514.9 xvi presence of diagrams, instructions and s;milar information
=9 522 xvii erection methods.

:;a
==3

On-Site Guide
c The lnstirutionof 8'1gineeringand Technofogy
186
::g
=a 9.3 Testing
:;a Testing must include the relevant tests from the fo'llowing checklist.

:a s12.1 When a test shows a, failure to comply, the failure must be corrected. The test must then
be repeated, as must any earlier test tl,a,t could have been influenced by the failure.

:;B 9.J.1 Testing checklist

612.2 continuity o f conductors:
► protective conductors including main and supplementary bonding
conductors
ring final cirouit conductors including protective conductors
612.3 ii insulation resistance (between live conductors and between each 'live
conductor and earth). Where appropriate during this measurement, line and
neutral conductors may be connected together, for example, where many
lighting transformers are installed on a lighting circuit
612.6 iii polarity: this includes checks that single-pole control and protective devices,
for example, switches, circuit-breakers and fuses, are connected in the line

:a
conductor only, tli at bayonet and Edison screw lampholders (except for E14
and E27 to, BS EN 60238) have their outer contacts connected to the neutral
conductor and that wiring has been correctly connected to socket-outlets and
other accessories
612.7 iv earth electrode resistance (TT systems)
=a 612.9
612.11
v earth fault loop impedance (TN systems)
vi prospective short-circuit current and prospective earth fault current, if not
determined by enquiry of the distributor
61 2 .13 vii. function al testing, 1ind udi ng:
► testing of RCDs
► operation of all sV!Jitchgear
=9 612.14 viii verification of voltage drop (not normally required during initial verification).

=9
:;a
==3

On-Site Guide
e The Institutionof EngineeringandTedlnorogy
187
::g
=a
:;a
:a
:;B

:a

=a

=9

=9
:;a
==3

On-Site Guide
e The Institutionof EngineeringandTedlnorogy
188
::g
=a
:;a
:a
Guidance on
initial testing of
ID
:;B
installations
10.1 Safety and equipment
HSR25, Electrical testing involves danger. The Electricity at Work Regulations 1989 state that working
EWR on live conductors is permissible provided that it ;s reasonable in all the circumstances
Regulation
for the work to be carried out and that suitable precautions are taken to prevent injury.
14

:a Uve testing of electrical installations is, therefore, reasonable as it is a recognised method

of assessing the suitability and safety of an electrical insta'llation; suitable precautions
must be taken by employing the correct test equipment and suitable personal protective
equipment
Although live testing and diagnosis for fault finding may be justifiable, there could be no
justifica,tion for any subsequent repair work to be carried out live.
610.1 It is the test operative's duty to ensure their own safety, and the safety of others, whilst
612.1 working through test procedures. When using test instruments, this is best achieved by
precautions such as:
knowledge and experience of the correct application and use of the test
instrumentation, leads, probes and accessories (is of the greatest importance)
512.1 ii checking that the test instrumentation is made in accordance with the
appropriate safety standards such as BS EN 61243 3 for two pole voltage
detectors and BS EN 61010 or BS EN 61557 for instruments
iii checking before each use that all leads, probes, accessories (including aH
devices such as crocodile clips used to attach to conductors) and instruments
induding the proving unit are dean, undamaged and functioning; also,
checking that isolation can be safely effected and that any locks or other
means necessary for securing the isolation are availab[e and functional
GS38 i v observing the safety measures and procedures set out in HSE Guidance
Note GS 38 for all instruments, leads, probes and accessories. Some
test instrument manufacturers advise that their instruments be used in
conjunction with fused test leads and probes. Others advise the use of non-
fused leads and probes when the instrument has in-built electrical protection
but it should be noted that such electrical protection does not extend to the
probes and leads.

On-Site Guide 1 8 9
e The Institutionof EngineeringandTedlnorogy
 10.2 Sequence .of tests
NOTE: The advice given does not preclude other test methods.
612.1 Tests should be carried out in the following sequence:

1D.2.1 Before the supply is connected (I.e. isolated)

612.2.1 continuity of protective conductors, induding main and supplementary
bonding
612.2.2 ii continuity of ring final circuit conductors, including protective conductors
612.3 iii insulation resistance
612.6 iv polarity (by continuity method)
612.7 v earth electrode resistance, using an earth electrode resistance tester (see vii
also).

1 O..J.2 W:dh the supply connected and energised

GS38 vi check polarity of supply1 using an approved voltage indicator
� 612.7, Note vii. earth electrode resistance, using a loop impedance tester
612.9 viii earth fault loop impedance
612.11 ix prospective fault current measurement, if not determined b yenquiry of the
distributor
612.13 x functional testing, including RCDs and switchgear.
Results obtained during the various tests should be recorded on the Schedule of
Test Resu'lts (Appendix G) for future reference and checked for acceptability against
prescribed criteria.

10.J Test procedures

612.2., 10.3.1 Continuity of drcuit protective conductors and
protedive bonding conductors (for ring final
drcuits see 1o J.2)
Test methods l and 2 are alternative ways of testing the continuity of protective
conductors.
Every protective conductor, including circuit protective conductors, the earthing
conductor, main and supplementary bonding conductors, should be tested to verify that
the conductors are electricaHy sound and correctly connected.
Test method 1 detailed below, in addition to checking the continuity of the protective
conductor, also measures (R, + R2) which, when added to the external ,impedance (Ze),
enables the earth fault loop impedance (Zs) to be checked against the design, see 10.3.6.
NOTE.: (R1 + R2) is the sum of the resistances of the line conductor (R1) and the circuit
protective conductor (R2) between the point of utilisation and origin of the installation.
Use an ohmmeter capable of measuring a 'low resistance for these tests.

On-Site Guide
c The lnstirution of 8'1gineering and Technofogy
190
::g
=a Test method 1 can only be used to measure (R 1 + R i ) for an 'all-insulated' installation,

:;a
such as an installation wired in 'twin and earth'. Installations incorporating steel conduit,
steel trunking, MICC and PVC/SWA cables wm produce parallel paths to protective
conductors. Such installations should be inspected for soundness of construction and
:a test method 1 or 2 used to prove continuity.

:;B 612.2. 1 i Continuity of circuit protective condudors

Continuitytestmethod 1
Bridge the line conductor to the protective conductor at the distribution board so as to
include an the circuit. Then test between line and earth terminals at each point in the
drouit. The measurement at the cirouit's extremity should be recorded and is the value
of (R 1 + Ri) for the circuit under test (see Figure 10.3.1 (i)).
If the instrument does not indude an 'auto-nuU' facility, or this is not used, the resistance of
the test 'leads should be measured and deducted from the resistance readings obtained.

T Figure 10.J.1{1) Connections for testing continuity of circuit protective

conductors using test method 1

:a
ceiling rose ,
at end •Ofclrru i't

_,.. .
.·•i� p o ra ry llnk

=a • •

•
N
•L •••••
L J J J JJ JJ J J
main switch off,
all fuses removed.
drcuit-breaken and RCBOs off

=9 lamps removed

Continuitytestmethod2
Connect one terminal of the test instrument to a long test lead and connect this to the
instaHation main earthing termina'L
Connect the other terminal of the instrument to another test lead and use this to make
=9 t
contact w i h the protective conductor at various points on the circuit, such as luminaires,
switches, spur outlets, etc. (see Figure 10.3.l (ii)).
:;a If the instrument does not Include an 'auto•nuU' facility, or this is not used, the res;stance of
the test leads should be measured and deducted from the resistance readings obtained.
==3 The resistance of the protective oonductor R 2 is recorded on the Schedule of Test
Results; see Appendix G.

On-Site Guide 1 9 1
e The Institutionof EngineeringandTedlnorogy
::g
=a T Figure 10.J.lfii) Continuity test method 2

:;a ceiling rose

:a at end of crroult

:;B long wander

lead
• •

• • •••••••••
L f.llJJJJlJ
main switch off,
all fuses removed,
c1rcuit•breakers and RCBOs off

lamps removed
test instrument ·

:a
ii Continuity of the earthing condudor and protedive bonding
condudors
=a Continuity test method 2
For main bondin& connect one terminal of the test instrument to a long test lead and
connect this to the installation main earthing terminal. C.onnect the other terminal of the
instrumentto another test lead and use this to make contact with the protective bonding
conductor at its further end, such as at its connection to the incoming metal water, gas
or oil service.

=9 The Continuity and connection verified boxes on the Electrical lnstaHation Certificate
should be ticked if the continuity and connection of the earthing conductor and of each
main bonding conductor are satisfactory. The details of the material and the cross
sectional areas of the conductors must also be recorded.

612.2.2 10.3.2 Continu'ity of ring final circuit conductors

A three-step test is required to verify the continuity of the line, neutral and protective
conductors and the correct wiring of a ring final circuit. The test results show if the ring
has been interconnected to create an apparently continuous ring circuit which is in fact
=9 broken, or wrongly wired.

:;a Use a low-resistance ohmmeter for this test.

Ste;p 1
==3

192
The line, neutral and protective conductors are identified at the distribution board and
the end-to-end resistance of each is measured separately (see Figure 10.3.2(i)). These

On-Site Guide
c The lnstirution of 8'1gineering and Technofogy
::g
=a resistances are r1, rn and r2 respectively. A finite reading confirms that there is no open

:;a
circuit on the ring conductors under test. The resistance values obtained should be
the same (within 0.05 Q) if the conductors are all of the same size. If the protective
conductor has a reduced csa the resistance r2 of the protective conductor loop will be
:a proportionally higher than that of the line and neutral loops, for example, 1.67 times for
2.5/1.5 mm 2 cab'le. If these relationships are not achieved then either the conductors
:;B are incorrectly identified or there is something wrong at one or more of the accessories.

Y Figure 10.S.2(1) Step 1: The end-to-end resistances of the line, neutral and
protective conductors are measured separatel,y

initial check for c.ontinuity

at ends of ring

:a

=a test instrument --line

cpc
- neutra'I

Step 2
=9 The line and neutral conductors are then connected together at the distribution board
so that the outgoing line conductor is connected to the returning neutral conductor and
vlce versa (see Figure 10.3.2(ii)). The resistance between line and neutral conductors
is measured at each socket-outlet. The readings at each of the socket-outlets wired into
the ring will be substantially the same and the value will be approximately one-quarter
of the resistance of the line plus the neutral loop resistances, i.e. (r1 + rn)/4.. Any socket-
outlets wired as spurs will have a higher resistance value due to the resistance of the
spur conductors.

=9 NOTE: Where sing1e-core cables are used, care should be taken to verify that the
line and neutral conductors of opposite ends of the ring circuit are connected together.
:;a An error in this respect will be apparent from the readings taken at the socket-outlets,
progresswely increasing in value as readings are taken towards the midpoint of the ring,
then decreasing again towards the other end of the ring.
==3

On-Site Guide 1 9 !
e The Institutionof EngineeringandTedlnorogy
::g
=a T Figure 1O.J.:Z(li) Step 2: The line and neutral conductors are cross-connected

:;a
and the resistance measured at each socket-outlet

:a
:;B =
- line
cpc
- neutral

Step 3
The above step is then repeated, this time with the line and cpc cross-connected at

:a
the distribution board (see Figure 10.3.2(iii)). The resistance between line and earth
is measured at each socket-outlet The readings obtained at each of the socket outlets
wired into the dng will be substantially the same and the value will be approximately
one-quarter ·of the resistance of the line plus cpc loop reststances, i.e. (r 1 + ri)/4. As
before, a higher resistance value will be measured at any socket outlets wired as spurs.
=a The hi.ghest value recorded represents the maximum (R 1 + Rv of the circuit and is
recorded on the Schedule of Test Results. The value can be used to determine the earth
fault I.cop impedance (Zs) of the cirouit to verify compliance with the 'loop impedance
requirements of BS 7671 (see 10.3.6).

T Figure 10.3.2(1ii) Step 3: The line conductors and cpc are cross-connected and
the resistance measured at each socket-outlet
=9
- line
- cpc
- neutral

=9
:;a •connection for taking '
reading5 of Ri + R2
at sockets
�----'

==3

194
This sequence of tests also verifies the polarity of each socket-outJet, except that where
the testing has been carrled out at the terminals on the reverse of the accessories; a

On-Site Guide
e The Institutionof Engineeringand Tedlnorogy
::g
=a visual inspection is required to •Confirm correct polarity connections, and dispenses with
the need for a separate polarity test.
:;a
10.3.3 Insulation resistance
:a
612.3
Pre-test checks

:;B a Pilot or indicator lamps and capacitors are disconnected from circuits to
prevent misleading test values from being obtained
b If a circuit indudes vo!tage sensitive electronic devices such as RCCBs,
RCBOs or SRCDs incorporating electronic amplifiers, dimmer switches, touch
switches, delay timers, power controllers, electronic starters or controlgear for
fiuorescent lamps, etc., either:
1 the devices must be temporarily disconnected, or
2 a measurement should be made between the live conductors (line and
neutral) connected together and the protective earth only.
ii Tests
Tests should be carried out using the appropriate d.c. test voltage specified in Table 10.3.3.
The tests should be made at the distribution board or consumer unit wi h the main

:a switch off.
When testing simple installations, i.e. those consisting of one consumer unit only, the
installation could be tested as a whol.e with aU fuses in place, switches and circuit-
breakers dosed, lamps removed and other current-using equipment disconnected; see

=a Figure 10.3.3(i).
T figure 10.3.3(1) Insulation resistance test of the whole installation

=9 zr-i·
switch on
-.
main switch off
circuit-breakers closed
mair1 protective

=9 lamps removed □no

:;a test instrument. □- earthing

conductor

==3 When testing individual cirouits, it is important to remove the fuse or open the circuit-
breaker of that circuit; this ensures that no other circuits at the board influence the result
of the test.
On-Site Guide 1 9 5
e The Institutionof ErlgineeringandTedlnorogy
::g
=a Where the removal of lamps and/or the disconnection of current-using equipment is

:;a
impracticable, fhe loca'I switches controlling such lamps and/or equipment should be
open.

:a Where a, cir,cuit contains two-way switching, the two.way switches must be operated one
at a time and further 1nsu'lation resistance tests carried out to ensure that all the circuit
wiring is tested.
:;B
' f Table 10.J..J Minimum values of Insulation resistance
Table 61
Circuit nominal voltage Test voltage Minimum insulation
(V d.c.) resistance (MQ)
SELV and PELV 250 0.5
Up to and induding 500 V with the exception 500 1.0
of SELV and PELY, but induding FELV
Notes:
I Insulation resistance measurements are usually much higher than those of Table I 0.3.3.
2 More stringent requirements are app!icabfe for the wiring of fire alarm systems in buildings; see BS
5839·1.

:a For an installation operating at 400/230 V, although an insulat,]on resistance va'lue of

only 1 M Q ,complies with BS 7671, where the insulatlon resistance measured is less than
2 MC the possibility of a latent defect exists. In these circumstances, each circuit should
then be tested se pa rately.
=a Where surge protective devices (SPDs) or other equipment such as electronic devices or
RCDs with amplifiers are likely to influence the results of the test or may suffer damage
from the test voltage, such equipment must be disconnected before carrying out the
insulation resistance test.
612.3.2 Where it is not reasonably practicable to disconnect such equipment, the test voltage
for the particular circuit may be reduced to 250 V d.c. but the insulation resistance must
=9 be at least 1 MQ.
Where the drouit indudes electronic devices which are likely to influence the results or
be damaged, only a measurement between the live conductors connected together and
earth should be made and the reading should be not less than the value stated in Table
10.3.3.

m Insulation resistance 'between live conductors

Single-phaseand three-phase
=9 Test between all the live (line and neutra'I) conductors at the distribution board (see
Figure W.3.3(i)).
:;a Figure 10.3.3(ii) shows an insulation resistance test performed between live conductors
of a single circuit.
==3

196
Resistance readings obtained should be not less than the value stated in Table 10.3.3.

On-Site Guide
c The lnstirutionof 8'1gineeringand Technofogy
::g
=a T Figure 10.J.3(11) Insulation resistance test between live conductors of a circuit

:;a
:a
:;B
two-way switches switch on

main protective
bonding conductor
lamps removed

test instrument earthing

conductor

:a NQ,TE: The test m a y�nrrially be carried out on the complete installation.

iv Insulation resistan.ce t o earth
Single-phase

=a
Test between. the live conductors (line and neutral) and the circuit protective conductors
at the distribution board (Figure 10.3.3(iH) illustrates neutral to earth only).
For a circuit containing two-way switching or two-way and intermediate switching, the
switches must be operated one at a time and the drc-Uit subjected to additional insulation
resistance tests.

=9

=9
:;a
==3

On-Site Guide
e The Institutionof EngineeringandTedlnorogy
197
::g
=a T Figure 10.J.3(111) Insulation res;stance test between neutral and earth

:;a
:a
:;B -
two-way switches switchOfl

main protective
bonding conductor
lamps removed

test instrument eanhing

conductor

:a Notes:
1 The test may initially be carried out on the complete installation.
l Earthing and bonding connections are in place.
612.3.1 J The earth[ng conductor must connect the main earthing terminal to the means of eanh[ng whilst

=a testing.

Three-phase
Test to earth from all live conductors (induding the neutral) connected together. Where
a low reading is obtained it is necessary to test each conductor separately to earth, after
disconnecting all equipment.
Resistance readings obtained should be not less than the value stated in Table 10.3.3.
=9 v SELV and PELV circuits
612.4., Test between SE'lV and PELV cir,cuits and live parts of other circuits at 500 V d.c.
612.4.2
Test between SELV or PELV conductors at 250 V d.c. and between PELV conductors and
protective conductors •Ofthe PELV cirruit at 250 V d.c.
Resistance readings obtained should be not less than the value stated in Table 10.3.3.

vi FELV circuits
=9 612.4.4 FELV circuits are tested as low voltage cirruits at 500 V d.c.
:;a
==3

On-Site Guide
c The lnstirution of 8'1gineering and Technofogy
198
::g
=a 10.3.4 Polarity
:;a See Figure 10.3.4.
The method of test prior to connecting the supply is the same as test method 1 for
:a checking the continuity of protective conductors which should have already been
carried out (see 10.3.1). For r;ng final circuits a visual check may be required (see 10.3.2
:;B following step 3}.
H. is import�nt to confirm that:
1 overcurrent devices and single-pole controls are in the line conductor,
l except for E14 and E27 lampholders to BS EN 60238, centre contact screw
lampholders have the outer threaded contact connected to the neutral, and
3 socket-outlet and simHar aiccessory polarities are correct.
After connection of the supp'ly, correct polarity must be confirmed using a voltage
indicator or a, test lamp (in eifher case with leads complying with the recommendations
GS 38 of HSE Guidance Note GS 38).

T Figure 10.3.4 Polarity test on a lighting circuit

:a ceiling rose
at end of circuit

·l
=a
• -• •••••••• -·
.-·i ; orary llnk
• • •
• • • • • • • • •
- • • • j,e • • •

N
• •l • • •
•
• l JJJJJJJJJ
•
=9 main switch off
circuit-breakers off

test instrument
lamps removed

=9 NQ,tE: The test may be carried out either at l;ighting points or switches.

10.3.5 Earth electrode resistance measurement

:;a
10.3.5.1 l o o p impedance method
==3 If the electrode under test is being used in conjunction with an RCD protecting an
installatio,n forming part ,of a TT system, the following method of test may be applied.

On-Site Guide 1 9 9
e The Institutionof EngineeringandTedlnorogy
::g
=a A loop impedance tester is connected between the line conductor at the origin of the
installation and the earth electrode with the test link open and a test performed. This
:;a impedance reading is treated as the electrode resistance and is then added to the
resistance of the protectrve conductor for the protected circuits. The test should be
:a carried out before energising the remainder of the instaHation.
Table 41.5 The measured resistance should meet fhe following criteria and those ·Of 10.3.6 but, in
:;B Note 2 any event, should not exceed 200 Q.
411.5.3 For TT systems, the value of the earth electmde resistance RA in ohms multiplied by the
operating a.ment in amperes of the protective device IM should not exceed 50 V.
For example, if RA = 200 Q, then the maximum RCD operating current should not
exceed 250 mA.
REMEMBER TO REPLAC1E THE TEST LINK.

10.3.S.2 Proprietary earth electrode test instrument

The test requires the use of two temporary test spikes (electrodes), and is carried out in
the following manner.

:a Connection to the earth electrode, E, is made using terminals Cl and P1 of a four-

terminal earth tester. To exclude the resistance of fhe test leads from the resistance
reading, individual leads should be taken from these terminals and connected separately
to the electrode. If the test lead resistance is insignificant, the two terminals may be
short-circuited at the tester and connection made with a single test lead, the same bein_g
=a true if using a three-terminal tester. Connection to the temporary spikes is made as
shown in Figure 10.3.5.2. The distance between the test spikes is important If they are
too dose together, their resistance areas will overlap.
In general, reliab'le results may be expected if the distance between the electrode
under test and the current spike Tl is at least ten times the maximum dimension of
the electrode system, for example, 30 m for a 3 m long rod electrode. With an auxiliary
=9 electrode T2 inserted halfway between the electrode under test E and tempo ra ry
electrode Tl, the voltage drop between E and T2 is measured. The resistance of the
electrode is then obtained by the test instrument from the voltage between E and T2
divided by the current ff.owing between E and Tl, prov[ded that there is no overlap of
the resistance areas.
To confirm that the electrode resistanc-e obtained above is a true value, two further
readings are taken, firstly with electrode T2 moved ""'6 m further from electrode E and
secondly with electrode T2 moved 6 m closer to electrode E. If tt,e results obtained
from the three tests above are substantially the same, the average of the three readings
=9 is taken as the resistance of the ea,rth •electrode under test. If the results obtained are

:;a
significantly different, the above procedure should be repeated with test electrode T1
placed further from the electrode under test

==3

On-Site Guide I 100

c The lnstirutionof 8'1gineeringandTechnofogy
::g
=a T Figure 10.J.5.2 Earth electrode test

:;a
:a
:;B
test tnstrument

electrode
undertest

:a 15•25m 15-25m

1he instrument output current ma,y be a,c. or reversed d.c. to overcome electrolytic
effects. As these types of test instrument employ phase-sensitive detectors (PSD), the

=a
errors associated with stray currents are eliminated. The instrument should be capabte
of checking that the resistance of the temporary spikes used for testing is within the
accuracy limits stated in the instrument specification. This may be achieved by an
indicator provided on the instrument, or the instrument should have a sufficiently high
upper range to enable a discrete test to be performed on the spikes. If the tempora ry
spike resistance is too high, measures to reduce the resistance will be necessary, such as
driving the spikes deeper into the ground.

=9 1O.J.6 Earth fault loop impedance

612.9 The earth fault loop impedance (Zs) is required to be determined for the furthest point
of each circuit. It may be determined by:
► direct measurement of Zs, or
► direct measurement of Ze at the origin and adding (R, + R2) measured during
the continuity tests (10.3.l and 10.3.2) {Zs = Ze + (R1 + R2)}, or
► adding (R1 + R2) measured during the continuity tests to the value of Ze

=9 dedared by the distributor (see 1.1 (iv) and 1.3(iv)).

The effectiveness of the distributor'.s earth must be confirmed by a test.
:;a The external impedance (le) may be measured using a line-earth loop impedance tester.

==3

On-Site Guide 1101

e The Institutionof EngineeringandTedlnorogy
::g
=a The main switch is opened and made secure to isola;te the installation from the source
of supply. The earthing conductor is disconnected from the main eairthing terminal and
:;a the measurement made between line and earth of the supply.

:a REMEMBER TO RECONNECT THE EARTHIN,Ci CONDUCTOR TO THE EARTH

TERMINAL AFTER THE TEST.
Direct measurement of Zscan only be made on a live 1nstaUation. Neither the connection
:;B with earth nor bonding conductors are d'5connected. The reading given by the loop
impedance tester will usually be less than 4! + (R1 + Ri) because of paraUel earth return
paths provided by any bonded extraneous--conductive-parts. This must be taken into
account when comparing the results with design data.
610.1 Care should be taken to avoid any shock hazard to the testing personnel and to other
persons on site during the tests.
The value of Zsdetermined for each circuit should not exceed the value given in Appendix
8 for the particular overcurrent device and cable.
411.4.9 For TN systems, when protection ts afforded by an RCD, the rated residual operating
current in amperes times the earth fault loop impedance in ohms should not exceed 50
V. This test should be carried out before energising orlier parts of the system.
:a N:O,TE: For further information on the measurement of earth fault loop impedance, refer
to IET Guidance Note 3 - Inspection & Testing.

10.3.7 Measurement of prospective fault current

=a 612.11
It is not recommended that installation designs are based on measured values of
prospective fault current, as changes to the distribution network subsequent to
completion of the instaHation may increase fault levels.
Designs should be based on the maximum fault current prov[ded by the distributor (see
7.2.7{i)).
=9 If it is desired to measure prospective fault 'levels this should be done with all main
bonding in place. Measurements are made at the d stribution board between live
conductors and between 'line conductors and earth.
For three-phase supplies, the maximum possible fault leve'I will be approximately twice
the single-phase to neutral value. (For three-phase to earth faults, neutral and earth path
impedances have no influence.)

1O.J.8 Check. of phase sequence

=9 512.12 In the case
maintained.
·Of three-phase circu ts, it should be verified that the phase sequence is

:;a
==3

On-Site Guide
c The lnstirutionof 8'1gineeringandTechnofogy
1102
 10.J.9 Functional testing
612.13 RCDs should be tested as described ,n Section n.
Switchgear, controls, etc., should be functionally tested; that is, operated to check that
they work and are properly mounted and installed.

10.3.1 O Verification o f voltage drop

N01TE: Verificat;on of voltage drop is not normal\y required during initial verification.
612.14 Where required, it should be verified that voltage drop does not exceed the limits stated
in relevant product standards of installed equipment.
s2s.100 Where no such limits are stated, voltage drop should be such that it does not impair the
proper and safe functioning of ;nstalled equipment.
Typically, voltage drop wm be evaluated using the measured circuit impedances.
The requirements for voltage drop are deemed to be met where the voltage drop
between the origin and fhe relevant piece of equipment does not exceed the values
stated in Appendix 4 of BS 7671 :2008(2011).

:a Appx. 4
Table 4Ab
Appendix 4, paragraph 6.4, gives maximum values of voltage drop for both lighting and
other uses and depending upon whether the installation is supplied directly from an LV
distribution system or from a private LV supply.
It should be remembered that voltage drop may exceed the values stated in Appendix

=a 4 in situations, such as motor starting periods and where equipment has a high inrush
current, where such events remain within the limits specified in the relevant product
standard or reasonable recommendation by an equipment manufacturer.

=9

=9
:;a
==3

On-Site Guide 1 1 0 3
e The Institutionof EngineeringandTedlnorogy
::g
=a
:;a
:a
:;B

:a

=a

=9

=9
:;a
==3

On-Site Guide
e T h e Institution o f Engineering and Tedlnorogy
I '°'
::g
=a
:;a Operation of 11
:a
:;B
RC s 1 D

Residual current device (ROD) is the generic term for a device that operates when the
residual current in the circuit reaches a predetermined value. An RCD is a protective
device used to automatically disconnect the electrical supply when an imbalance is
detected between the 'line and neutral conductors. In the case of a single-phase drcuit,
see Figure 11.0, the device monitors the difference in currents between the line and
neutral conductors. In a healthy circuit, where there is no earth fault current or protective
conductor current, t he sum of the currents in the line and neutral conductors is zero. If a
line to earth fau'lt deve'lops, a portion of the line conductor aurrent will not return through
:a the neutral conductor. The device monitors this difference, operates and disconnects
the circuit when the residual current reaches a preset limit, the residual operating current
(ltin).

=a . - Figure n.,o RCD operahon

Test button Exposed-conductive-part

Contacts Test circuit

=9 L
Toroid

Trip c o i l

N ■■----_,,/._ _ ..
=9
:;a E

==3

On-Site Guide 1 1 0 5
e The Institutionof Engineeringand Tedlnorogy
::g
=a 612.8 1'1.1 General test procedure
:;a The tests are made on the load side of the RCD, as near as practicab'le to its point of
installation and between the 'line conductor of the protected circuit and the associated
:a drouit protective conductor. The load supplied should be disconnected during tne test.

:;B 11.2 General-purpose RCCBs t o as 4293

With a leakage current flowing equivalent to 50 per cent of the rated tripping
current of the RCD, the device should not open.
ii With a leakage current flowing equivalent to 100 per cent of the rated tripping
current of the RCD, the device should open in less than 200 ms. Where the
RCD incorporates an intentional time del a y it should trip within a time range
from '500/o of the rated time delay plus 200 ms' to '100% of the rated time
delay plus 200 ms'.

11.3 General-purpose RCCBs t o BS EN 61008 or

RCBO,s.to as EN 61009
:a With a leakage current flowing equivalent to 50 per cent of the rated tripping
current of the RCD, the device should not open.
ii With a leakage current flowing equivalent to 100 per cent of the rated tripping

=a
current of the RCD, the device should open ;n less than 300 ms unless it is
of 'Type S' (or selective) which incorporates an intentional time delay. In this
case, it should trip within a time range from 130 ms to 500 ms.

11.4 RCD protected socket-outlets to BS 7288

With a leakage current flowing equivalent to 50 per cent of the rated tripping
=9 ii
current of the RCD, the device should not open.
With a leakage current flowing equivalent to 100 per cent of the rated tripping
current of th.e RCD, the device should open in less than 200 ms.

11.S Additional protection

612.10 Where an RCO with a rated residual operating current IA11 not exceeding 30 mA is used
415.1.1 to provide additiona\ protection (against direct contact), with a test current of 5 IMi the
device should open in less than 40 ms. The maximum test time must not be longer than
=9 t
40 ms, un1less the protec ive conductor potential rises by less than 50 V. (The instrument
supplier will advise on compliance.)
:;a
==3

On-Site Guide 1 1 0 6
c Thelnstirution of 8'1gineeringandTechnofogy
::g
=a 1'1.& Integral test device
:;a 612.13.1 An integral test device is incorporated in each RCD. This device enables the electrical
and mechanica'I parts of the RCD to be verified, by pressing the button marked T' or 1

:a 'Test' (Figure 11.0).

Operation of the integral test device does not provide a means of checking:
:;B a the continuity of the earthing conductor or the associated circuit protective
conductors
b any earth electrode or other means of earthing
c any other part ·of the associated installation earthing.
The test button will only operate the RCO if the device is energised.
Confirm that the notice to test RCDs quarterly (by pressing the test button) is fixed in a
prominent position (see 6.12).

11.7 Multipole RC,Ds

:a
As each lrive conductor of the RCD is incorporated in the magnetic sensing circuit it is
not necessary to perform the test for poles L2 and L3. However, if there is any doubt as
to the authenticity of the device in question - in terms of a fake or counterfeit device -
the advice would be to repeat the test for poles L2 and L3. It goes without saying that
such important devices, designed to protect 'life and property, should be obtained from
=a trusted sources and made by reputable manufacturers.
If a decision is made to test the RCD on all three lines, there should be Httle on no
discemable difference in operating times as each pole is incorporated in the magnetic
sensing circuit If, for example, the test performed on one pole did not meet rlie required
disconnection time, yet tests on the other two poles were satisfactory, the device should
be considered faulty and rep'laced.
=9

=9
:;a
==3

On-Site Guide
e The Institutionof EngineeringandTedlnorogy
1107
::g
=a
:;a
:a
:;B

:a

=a

=9

=9
:;a
==3

On-Site Guide
e The Institutionof EngineeringandTedlnorogy
1108
::g
=a
:;a
:a
Appendix
Maximum demand
■
:;B
and diversity

311 This appendix provides information on the determination of the maximum demand for
an instaHation and includes the current demand to be assumed for commonly used
equipment. It also includes some notes on the application of allowances for diversity.
The information and values given in this appendix are intended only for guidance be-
cause it is impossible to specify the appropriate allowances for diversity for every type of
:a installation and such allowances caU for special knowledge and experience. The values
given in Table A2 1 therefore, may be increased or decreased as decided by the installa-
tion designer concerned. No guidance is given for blocks of residential dwellings, large
hotels, industrial and large commercial premises; such installations should be assessed
=a on a case-by-case basis.
The current demand of a final circuit is determined by adding the current demands of
all points of utilisation and equipment in the circuit and, where appropriate, making an
allowance for diversity. Typical current demands to be used for this addition are given
in Table Al.
The current demand of an installation cons;sting of a number of final circuits may be
=9 assessed by using the allowanc-es for diversity given in Table A2 which are applied to
the total current demand of all the equipment supplied by the installation. The current
demand of the installation should not be assessed by adding the current demands of
the individual final circuits obtained as outlined above. In Table A2 the allowances are
expressed either as percentages of the current demand or, where followed by the letters
f.L (full load), as percentages of the rated full load current of the current-using equip-
ment. The current demand for any final circuit which is a standard circuit arrangement
complying with Appendix H is the rated current of the overcurrent protective device of
that circuit
=9 An alternative method of assessing the current demand of an installation supplying a

:;a number of final circuits is to add the drversified current demands of the individual circuits
and then apply a1iurther allowance for diversity. In this method the allowances given in
Table A2 should not be used, the values to be chosen being the responsibility of the
==3 installation designer.

On-Site Guide 1 1 0 9
e The Institutionof EngineeringandTedlnorogy
::g Appendix
=a The use of other methods of determining maximum demand is not preduded where
specified by the installation designer. After the design currents for all the circuits have
:;a been determined, enabling the cor:iductor sizes to be chosen, it is necessary to check
that tihe Hmitation on voltage drop is met.
:a
T Table A l Current demand to be assumed for points of utilisation and current-
:;B using equipment
Point of utilisation or current-using Current demand to be nssumed
equipment
Socket-outlets other than 2 A socket-
outlets and other than 13 A socket-
outlets
See note 1
2 A socket-outlets At least 0.5 A
Lighting outlet current equivalent to the connected load,
See note2 with a minimum of 100 W per
lampholder

:a Electric dock, shaver supply unit

(complying with BS EN 61558-2-5),
May be neglected for the purpose of this
assessment
shaver socket-outlet (complying with BS
4573), bell transformer, and current using
equipment of a rating not greater than
=a SVA
Household cooking appliance 1he first 1o A of the rated a1rrent plus
30CM, of the remainder of the rated
a1rrent plus 5 A if a socket-outlet is
incorporated in the control unit
All other stationary equipment British Standard rated a1rrent, or normal
Qlrrent
=9
Notes:

1 See Appendix H for the design of standard circuits using soc-ket-outfets to BS 1363-2 and BS EN
60309-2 (BS 4343).
2 Final drwits for discharge lighting must be arranged so as to be capable of carrying the total steady
C-Urrem, viz. that of the lamp(s) and any associated controlgear and also their harmonic currents.
Where more exact information is not available, the demand in volt-amperes is taken as the rated
lamp watts multiplied by not less than l.8. This multiplier is based upon the assumption that the
circuit is c-0rrected to a p01Ner factor of not less than 0.85 lagging, and takes into ace.aunt controlgear
losses and harmonic current
=9
:;a
==3

On-Site Guide I 110

e The Institutionof EngineeringandTedlnorogy
 T Table A l Allowances for diversity (see opposite for notes *and t )

Purpose of the final circuit Type of premises

fed: lhe
c:;::, ::,rs Individual household Small shops. stores, offices and Small hotels, boarding houses,
gea - 1 t he
: installations induding business premises guest houses, etc.
iversity app •es
individual dwellings of a block
1 Lighting 66% of total c-urrent demand 90% of total current demand 75% of total current demand
2 Huling and power (but - 3 to 100-ill of total current demand 100-ill l l of larpst appiance +7511b 100-ill l l of larpst appliance +8011t
&below) up to 10 I +SOllb of IJJlff current U. of remaining appliances U. of second l a l p l l appl"IIRCe
demand in u c e n of 10 a +601Mi l l of remaining appiances
3 Cooking appliances 10 a + 30% f.l. of connected 100% f.l. of largest appliance +80% 100% f.l. of largest appliance +80%
cooking appliances in excess of f.l. of second largest appliance f.l. of second largest appliance
1O a + 5 a if a socket-outlet is +60% f.l. of remaining appliances +60% f.l. of remaining appliances
incorporated in the control unit
4Motcn Not applialble 100-ill l l of larpst motor +80llt l l 100-ill l l of laipst motor +SOCMI l l
(otlw than &ft moliocs, which are of second l a p s t motor+60llli lL of remaining motors
subject to special consideration) of remaininc motors
5 Water-heaters (Instantaneous 100% I.I. of largest appliance 100% f.l. of largest appliance 100% f.l. of largest appliance
type)• + 100% f.l. of second largest + 100% f.l. of second largest +100% f.l. of second largest
appliance +25% f.l. of remaining appliance +25% I.I. of remaining appliance +25% f.l. of remaining
appliances appliances appliances
Noclivenityallowablet

7 Floor warming installations No diversity allowablet

a lhermal storage spam healing No CMnity •llowablet
installations

-- )>
 T Table Al continued

Purpose of the final circuit Type of premises

fed: lhe
c:;::, ::,rs Individual household Small shops. stores, offices and Small hotels, boarding houses,
gea - 1 t he
: installations induding business premises guest houses, etc.
iversity app •es
individual dwellings of a block
9 Standard arrangement of 100% of current demand of largest 100% of current demand of largest
final circuits in accordance with circuit +40% of current demand of circuit +50% of current demand of
Appendix H every other circuit every other cira.iit
10 Socbt-oullm lOl)ql, of current demand of l l r p s t lOl)ql, of aurent demand of l l r p s t lOl)ql, of current demand of lmpit
(Olhe, than those included in 9 point of uli1isation +40III, of Qlnent point of utilisation +'JOIII, of current point of utilisation +7511b of Qlnent
above and iationary equipment demand of ewcy Olhe, point of demand of ew,y otlw point of demand of ewty Olhe, point in
other than those lisled above) utilisation utilisation main rooms (dining rooms, etc.)
+40IIII of CUIIWlt demand of ewty
other point of uli1isation

Notes to Table Al:

0
• 10 this context an instantaneous water-heater is considered to be a water-heater of any loading which heats water only while the tap is turned on and therefore uses
electricity interminently.
"ft t It is imporomt to ensure that distribution boards or consumer units are of sufficient rating to take the total load connected to them without the application of any
g·.,. diversity.

2.

1:
ooo
!!I=,,
o..v,
[·
a.f2

-
,2<5:
-< ,,,

.., )>
::g
=a
:;a Appendix •
•
:a
:;B
Maxim,um permissible
measured earth, fault
loop imp,ed'ance

612.9 The tables in this appendix provide maximum permissible measured earth fault loop
411.4.6 impedances (Zs) for compliance with BS 7671 where the standard final circuits of Table
411.4.7 7.1 (i) are used. The values are those that must not be exceeded in the tests carried out

:a 411.4.e under 10.3.6 at an ambient temperature of 10 °c. Table B8 provides correction factors
for other ambient temperatures.
Where fhe cables to be used are to Table 4, 7 or 8 of BS 6004 or Table 3, 5, 6 or 7 of
BS 7211 or are other thermoplastic (PVC) or theirmosetting (low smoke halogen-free -

=a LSHF) cables to these British Standards and the cable loading is such that the maximum
operating temperature is 70 °c, then Tables B l - B 5 give the maximum earth fault loop
impedances for circuits with:
I protective conductors of copper a1nd having from 1 mm 2 to 16 mm 2 cross-
sectional area1
l an overcurrent protective device (I.e. a fuse) to:
- BS 3036 (Table B1)
=9 - BS 88-2.2 a,nd BS 88-6 (Table 82)
- BS 88-2 (Table B3)
- BS 88-3 (Table B4)
- BS 1361 (Table 85).
For eaoh type of fuse, two tables are given:
411.3.2.2 ► where the circuit concerned is a final drcuit not exceeding 32 A and the
maximum disconnection time for compliance with Regulation 411.3.2.2 is
0.4 s for TN systems, and
=9 411.3.2.3 where the circuit concerned is a final circuit exceeding 32 A or a distribution

:;a circuit, and the disconnection time for compliance with Regulation 411.3.2.3
is 5 s for TN systems.

==3 543.1.3 In each table the earth fault loop impedances given correspond to the appropriate
disconnection time from a comparison of the time/current characteristics of the device
concerned and the equation given in Regulation 543.1.3.

On-Site Guide I 11:S

e The Institutionof Engineeringand Tedlnorogy
::g Appendix Is
=a The tabulated values app'ly only when the nominal voltage to Earth (U 0) 230 V.

:;a Table 86 gwes the maximum measured Zs for circuits protected by circuit-breakers to BS
3871-1 and BS EN 60898 and RCBOs to BS EN 61009.

:a Note: The impedances tabulated in this appendD< are lower than those in Tables 41.2,
4 L 3 and 4 l 4 ·Of BS 7671 as the impedances in th;s appendix are measured values at
:;B an assumed conductor temperature of 10 °c whilst those in BS 7671 are design figures
at the conductor norma'I, operating temperature. The correction factor (divisor) used is
1.24. For smaller section cables the impedance may also be limited by the adiabatic
equation of Regulation 543.1.3. A value of k of 115 from Table 54.3 of BS 7671 is used.
This is suitable for PVC insulated and sheathed cables to Table 4, 7 or 8 of BS 6004 and
for thermosetting (LSHF) insulated and sheathed cabtes to Table 3, 5, 6 or 7 of BS 7211.
The k value is based on both the thermoplastic (PVC) and LSHF cables operating at a
maximum temperature of 70 °C.
The IET Commentary on the Wiring Regulations provides more information.

Table 81 Semi-endosed fuses. Maximum measured earth fault loop impedance

(in ohms) at ambient temperature where the overcurrent protective
:a device ;s a semi-enclosed fuse to BS 3036

0.4 secon.d disconnection (final circuits not exceeding 32 A in TN

systems)

=a Protective
condudor (mm2)
5 15
Fuse rating (A)
20 30
1.0 7.7 2.1 1.4 NP
c!! 1.5 7.7 2.1 1.4 0.9

ii 5 seconds disconnection (final circuits exceeding 32 A and

=9 - - - -
distributio,n, circuits in TN systems)
- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -

Protective Fuse rating (A)

condudor (mm2) 20 30 45 60
1.0 2.7 NP NP NP
1.5 3.1 2.0 NP NP
2.5 3.1 2.1 1.2 NP
4.0 3.1 2.1 1.3 0.8
=9 :i:6.0 3.1 2.1 1.3 0.9

:;a NOTE: NP means that the combination of the protective conductor arid the fuse is Not Permitted.

==3

On-SiteGuide 1 1 1 4
e The Institutionof EngineeringandTedlnorogy
::g Appendix Is
=a T Table B2 BS 88-2.2 and BS 88-6 fu.ses. Maximum measured earth fault loop

:;a
impedance (in ohms) at ambient temperature where the overcurrent
protective device is a fuse to BS 88-2.2 or BS 88-6

:a 0.4 secon.d disconnecti.on (final circuits not exceeding 31 A in 'JN

.systems)
:;B Protective Fuse rating (A)
condudor (mm l) 6 10 16 20 25 32
1.0 6.9 4.1 2.2 1.4 1.2 0.66
1.5 6.9 4.1 2.2 1.4 1.2 0.84
�2.5 6.9 4.1 2.2 1.4 1.2 0.84

ii s secon.ds disconnection (fin.al circuits exceeding 31 A and

distribution, circuits in TN syst.ems)
Protective Fuse rating (A)
condudor (mml) 63 100
20 25 32 40 SO 80

:a 1.0
15
1.7
2.3
1.2
1.7
0.66
1.1
NP
0.64
NP
NP
NP
NP
NP
NP
NP
NP
2.5 2.3 1.8 1.5 0.93 0.55 0.34 NP NP
NP
=a
4.0 23 1.8 1.5 1.1 0.77 0.50 0.23
6.0 2.3 1.8 l.5 1.1 0.84 0.66 0.36 0.22
10.0 2.3 1.8 1.5 1.1 0.84 0.66 0.46 0.33
16.0 2.3 1.8 l.5 1.1 0.84 0.66 0.46 0.34
NOTE: NP means that the combination of the protective conductor and the fuse is Not Permitted.

=9

=9
:;a
==3

On-Site Guide I 1 1 5
e The Institution of Engineering and Tedlnorogy
::g Appendix Is
=a T Table B J BS 88-2 fuses. Maximum measured earth fault loop impedance

:;a
(in ohms) at ambient temperature where the overcurrent protective
device is a fuse to BS 88-2

:a 0.4 secon.d disconnecti.on (final circuits not exceeding 31 A in 'JN

.systems)
:;B Protective Fuse rating (A)
condudor (mm l ) 6 10 16 20 25 32
1.0 6.6 3.9 2.0 1.4 1.1 0.63ad
1.5 6.6 3.9 2.0 1.4 1.1 0.83
2.5 6.6 3.9 2.0 1.4 1.1 0.83

ii s secon.ds disconnection (fin.al circuits exceeding 31 A and

distribution, circuits in TN syst.ems)
Protective Fuse rating (A)
co•ndudor
(mm 2) 20 25 32 40 50 63 80 1DO

:a 1.0 l.67ad 1.02ad o�64ad NP NP NP NP NP

1.5 2.36 1.31ad 0.97ad 057ad NP NP NP NP
2.5 2.36 1.8 1.47 0.89ad 0.SSad 0.33ad NP NP
=a 4.0
6.0
2.36
2.36
1.8
1.8
1.47
1.47
1.1
1.1
0.75ad
0.84
0.53ad
0.66
0.2Sad
0.36ad
NP
0.22ad
10.0 2.36 1.8 1.47 1.1 0.84 0.66 0.46 0.32ad
16.0 2.36 1.8 1.47 1.1 0.84 0.66 0.46 0.37
N.OTE I : NP means that the combination of me protective conductor and the fuse is Nor Permitted.
NOTE l : ad - adiabatic limitation.
=9

=9
:;a
==3

On-Site Guide 1 1 1 6
e The Institution of Engineering and Tedlnorogy
::g Appendix Is
=a T Table B 4 BS 88-3 fuses. Maximum measured earth fault loop impedance

:;a
(in ohms) at ambient temperature where fhe overcurrent protective
device ;s a semi-endosed fuse to BS 88-3

:a 0.4 secon.d disconnecti.on (final circuits not exceeding 31 A in 'JN

.systems)
:;B Protective Fuse rating (A)
condudor (mm 1) 20
5 16 l2
1.0 8.36 1.94 1.63 0.6ad
1.5 to 16 8.36 1.94 1.63 0.77

ii s secon.ds disconnection (fin.al circuits exceeding 31 A and

distdbutfon, circuits in TN systems)
Protective Fuse rating (A)
condudor (mm2) 20 32 45 63 80 100
1.0 2.32ad 0.62ad NP NP NP NP

:a 1.5
2.5
2.72
2.72
0.84ad
1.23ad
NP
0.62ad
NP
o.2sad
NP
NP
NP
NP
4.0 2.72 1.32 0.84 0.41acl 0.23ad 0.13acl

=a
6.0 2.72 1.32 0.84 0.58 0.33ad 0.19ad
10 2.72 1.32 0.84 0.58 0.43 0.32
1·6 2.72 1.32 0.84 0.58 0.43 0.32
NOTE 1: NP means that the combination of the protective conductor and the fuse is Not Permitted.
NOTE 2 ad - adiabatic limitation.

=9

=9
:;a
==3

On-Site Guide 1 1 1 7
e The Institutionof Engineeringand Tedlnorogy
::g Appendix Is
=a T Table 8 5 BS 1361 fuses. Maximum measured earth fault loop impedance

:;a
(in ohms) at ambient temperature where the overcurrent protective
device ;s a semi-enclosed fuse to BS 1361

:a 0.4 secon.d disconnecti.on (final circuits not exceeding 31 A in 'JN

.systems)
:;B Protective Fuse rating (A)
condudor (mm 1)
5 15 20 30
1.0 8.4 2.6 1.4 0.81
---
1.5 8.4 2.6 1.4 0.93
2.5 to 16 8.4 2.62 1.4 0.93

ii s secon.ds disconnection (fin.al circuits exceeding 3 1 A and

distribution, circuits in T N syst.ems)
Protective Fuse rating (A)
condudor (mm1)
20 30 45 60 8G 100

:a 1.0
15
1.7
2.2
0.81
1.2
NP
0.34
NP
NP
NP
NP
NP
NP
2.5 2.3 1.5 0.52 0.21 NP NP
NP
=a
4.0 2.3 1.5 0.69 0.37 0.22
6.0 2.3 1.5 o.n 0.53 0.30 0.15
10 2.3 1.5 0.77 0.56 0.40 0.22
1·6 2.3 1.5 o.n 0.56 0.40 0.29

N.OTE: NP means that the combination of the protective conductor and the fuse is Not Permitted.

=9

=9
:;a
==3

On-Site Guide 1 1 1 8
e The Institutionof Engineering and Tedlnorogy
T Table 8 6 Cirruit-breakers. Maximum measured earth fault loop impedance (in ohms) at ambient temperature where the overrurrent
device is a cirruit-breaker to 85 3871 or 85 EN 60898 or RCBO to 85 EN 61009

0.1 to S second disconnection times

Cira.iit-breaker Ciraiit-breaker rating (A)
type
5 6 10 15 16 20 25 30 32 40 45 50 63 100

9.27 7.75 4.64 3.09 2.90 2.32 1.85 1.55 1.45 1.16 1.03 0.93 0.74 0.46

2 5.3 4.42 2.65 1.77 1.66 1.32 1.06 o.88 0.83 0.66 0.59 0.53 0.42 0.26

B 7.42 6.18 3.71 2.47 2.32 1.85 1.48 1.24 1.16 0.93 0.82 0.74 0.59 0.37

3&C 3.71 3.09 1.85 1.24 1.16 0.93 0.74 0.62 0.58 0.46 0.41 0.37 0.29 0.19

D 1.85 1.55 0.93 0.62 0.58 0.46 0.37 0.31 0.29 0.23 0.21 0.19 0.15 0.09

Regulation 434.5.2 of 85 7671:2008(2011) requires that the protective conductor csa meets the requirements of 85 EN 60898-1, -2 or 85 EN
61009-1, or the minimum quoted by the manufacturer. The sizes given in Table 87 are for energy limiting dass 3, Types 8 and C devices only.
::g Appendix I B
=a T Table B 7 Minimum protective conductor size (mm 2)*

:;a Energy limiting dass 3

device rating
lfault level
(kA)
Protective conductor csa
(mm2)

:a Type B Type C
Up to and including 16 A 3 1.0 1.5
:;B Up to and induding 16 A S6 2.5 2.5
over 16 up to and including 32 A S3 1.5 1.5
0ver 16 up to and including 32 A S6 2.5 2.5
40A 53 1.5 1.5
40A S6 2.5 2.5
• For other device types and ratings or higher fault levels, consult manufacture(s data. See
Regulation 434.5.2 and the IET publication Commentary on the IEE Wiring Regulations.

T Table 8 8 Ambient temperature correction factors

:a Ambient temperature
(°C)
Correction factor (from 10 °C)
(notes 1 and 2)
0 0.96
5 0.98

=a 10 1.00
20 1.04
25 1.06
30 1.08
Notes:

=9 1 The correction factor is given by: {1 + 0..004(ambiem temp- 10)} where 0.004 is the simplified
resistance c-oeffident per "Cat 20 •c given by 8S EN 60228 for both copper and aluminium
c,onductors.
l The factors are different to those ofTab!e 12 because Table B8 corrects from 1o °C and rab,e 12
from 20 °C.

The appropriate ambient correction factor from Table 88 is applied to the earth fault loop
impedances of Tables 81-86 if the ambient temperature is other than 10 °C when the
circuit loop impedances are measured.

=9 For example, if the ambient temperature is 25 °C the measured earth fault loop
impedance of a circuit protected by a 32 A type B circuit-breaker to BS EN 60898 should
:;a not exceed 1.16 x 1.06 = 1.23 Q.

==3

On-Site Guide 1 1 2 0
e The Institutionof EngineeringandTedlnorogy
::g
=a
:;a Appendix
:a
:;B Sel1edion of types of
cable for particular
uses and external
influences

s2 For compl;iance with the requirements of Chapter 52 for the selection and erection of
:a wiring systems in relation to risks of mechanical damage and corrosion, this appendix
lists, in two tables, types of cable for the uses indicated. These tables are not 'intended
to be exhaustive and other limitations may be imposed by the relevant regulations of
BS 7671, in particular, those concerning maximum permissible operating temperatures.

=a Information is also included in this appendix on protection against corrosion of exposed

metal,Work of wiring systems.

=9

=9
:;a
==3

On-Site Guide 1121

e The Institutionof EngineeringandTedlnorogy
::g Appendix I(
=a T Table C l Applications of cabtes for fixed wiring

:;a Type of cabfe

(note 7)
Uses Comments

:a 'fflermoplastic
(PVC) or
For use in conduits, cable
ducting or trunking
lnter:mediate support may be
required on long vertical runs
:;B th.ermosetting
insulated non-
70 °C maximum c-0nductor
temperature for normal wiring
sheathed cable grades induding thermosetting
(BS 7211, BS 7919) types (note 4)
Cables run in PVC conduit should
not operate with a conductor
temperature greater than 70 °C
(note 4)
Flat thennaplastlc For general indoor use in Additional mechanic.al protection
(PVC)or dry or damp locations. May may be necessary where exposed
thenna11111As be embedded in plaster to mechanical stresses

..........._..
lnsulllllld and F or use on exterior surface
walls, boundary walls and
Protedion from direct sunlight may
be necessary. Black sheath colour

:a
(858004) the like is better for a b l e s exposed to
For use as overhead wiring sunlight
between buHdinp May need to be hard drawn (HD)
F or use unde,.round in copper conductors for overhead
wiring (note 6)
=a
conduits or pipes
F or use in building voids or
duds formed in-situ Unsuitable for embedding directly
---
in conaete
Mineral insulated General Ml cables should have overall PVC
(BS EN 60702• 1) covering where exposed to the
weather or risk of corrosion, or
where installed underground, or in
=9 concrete ducts
1hermoplastlc General Additional protection may be
or tllennoNlll111 necessary where exposed to
lnsul . . . mechanical stresses
annourecL Protedion from direct sunlight may

..........
thennopl8ldc

(8554e7,IS1341,
be necessary. Black sheath colour
is better for a b l e s exposed to
sunlight

=9
85 6724, I S 7846) --------------------------
Notes:

:;a 1 The use of cable covers or equivalent medlanical protection is desirable for all underground cables
which might otherwise subsequently be disturbed. Route marker tape should also be installed,
buried Just below ground level. cables should be buried at a sufficient depth.
==3 1 C4bles having thermoplastic (PVC) insulation or sheath should preferably not be used where the
ambient temperature is cons stently below o c or has been within the preceding 24 hours. Whete
0

they are to be installed during a period of low temperature. precautions should be taken to avoid

On-Site Guide
e The Institution of Engineering and Tedlnorogy
1122
::g Appendix le
=a risk of mechanical damage durlng handling, A minimum ambLent temperature of 5 •c is advised in
BS 7540:2005 (series) Electric cables - Guide t o use for cables with orated voltage not exceeding
:;a 450/750 vtor some types .of PVC insulated and sheathed cables.
J cables must be suitable for me maximum amb nt temperature, and must be protected from any

:a
excess heat produced by other equipment. including other cables.
t The,mosening cable types (to BS 721 l or BS 5467) can operate with a conductor temperature of
90 •c. This must be limited to 70 "C where drawn into a conduit, etc., with thermoplastic (PVC)
insulated conductors or connected to erectrical equipment (512.1.5 and 523. l),or where such
:;B cab!es are installed in plastic conduit or trunking.
5 For cables to BS 6004, BS 6007, BS 7211, BS 6346, BS 5467 and BS 6724, further guidance may be
obtained from those staridards. Additional advice is given in BS 7540:2005 (series) Guide t o use of
cables with orated voltage not exceeding 450/750 Vforcables to BS 6004, 8S 6007 and BS 7211.
& cables for O\lerhead wiring between buildings must be ab!e to support their m-vn weight and any
imposed wind or ice/snow 1oading. A catenary support is usual but hard drawn copper types may
be used.
7 BS 5467: Electric cables. Thermosetting insulated, armoured cables for voltages of 600/1000 V
and 1900/3300 v
BS 6004: Electric cables. PVC insulated, non-armoured cables for voltages up to and including
450/750 V for electric power, lighting and internal wiring
BS 6346: Electric cables. PVC insulated, armoured cables for voltages of 600/1000 V and
1900/3300V
BS 6724: Electric cables. Thermosetting ;nsulated, armoured cables for voltages of 600/1000 V
and 1900/3300 V, having low emissioo of smoke and corrosive gases when affected by fire

:a
BS 7.211: Electric cables. Thermosetting insulated, non-,armoured cables for voltages up to and
induding 450/750 V, for electric pO\!Ver, lighting and internal wiring. and having low emission of
smoke and corrosive gases when affected by fire
BS 7846:. Electric cables. 600/1000 V armoured fire-resistant cables having thermosetting
insulation and low emission of smoke and cmosive gases when affected by fire

=a
BS EN 60702-1: Mineral insulated cables and their terminations with a rat(!d voltage not
exceeding 750 V. Gables

Migration of plasticiser from thermoplastic (PVC) materials

Thermoplastic (PVC) sheathed cables, including thermosetting insulated with thermoplastic
sheat h, e.g. LSH must be separated from expanded polystyrene materials to prevent take-
up of the cab!e plasticiser by the polystyrene as this will reduce the flexibility of the cab'les.
Thermal insulation
=9 Thermoplastic (PVC) sheathed cables in roof spaces must be clipped dear of any
insulation made of expanded pol y s tyrene granules.
C ble clips
Polystyrene cab!e dips are softened by contact with thermoplastic (PVC). !Nylon and
polypropylene are unaffected.
Grommets
Natural rubber grommets can be softened bycontactwith thermoplastic (PVQ. Synthetic
=9 rubbers are more resistant. Thermoplastic (PVC) grommets are not affected, but could

:;a
affect other plastics.
Wood preservatives

==3 Thermoplastic (PVC} sheathed cables should be covered to prevent contact with
preservative fluids during application. After the solvent has evaporated (good ventilation
is necessary) the preservative has no effect
On-Site Guide 1 1 2 : S
e The Institution of Engineering and Tedlnorogy
::g Appendix I(
=a C reosote

:;a Creosote should not be applied to thermoplastic (PVQ sheathed cables because it
causes decomposition, solution, swelling and 'loss of pliability.

:a T Table C l Applications of flexible cables to BS 6500:2000 and BS 7919:2001

:;B Type of flexible cable Uses

Light thermoplastic (PVC) insulated Indoors in household or c-0mmercial premises in
and sheathed flexible cable dry situations, for Ught duty
Ordinary thermoplastic (PVC) Indoors in household or commercial premises.
insulated and sheathed flexible including damp situations, for medium duty
cable For cooking and heating appliances where not in
contact with hot parts
For outdoor use other than in agriaJltural or
industrial applications
For electrically powered hand tools
60 °c thermosetting (rubber) Indoors in household or c-0mmercial premises
insulated braided twin and three- where subject only to low mechanical stresses
:a core flexible cable
60 °C thermosetting (rubber) Indoors in household or commercial premises
insulated and sheathed flexible where subject only to low mechanical stresses
cable For occasional use outdoors
=a 60 °C thermosetting (rubber)
For electrically powered hand tools
For general use, unless subject to severe
insulated oil-resisting with flame- mechanical stresses
retardant sheath For use in fixed installations where protected by
conduit or other enclosure
90 °C thermosetting (rubber) General, including hot situations, e.g. night storage
=9 insulated HOFR sheathed heaters, immersion heaters and boilers
90 °C heat-resisting thermoplastic General, induding hot situations, e.g. for pendant
(PVC} insulated and sheathed luminaires
150 °C thermosetting (rubber) For use at high ambient temperatures
insulated and braided For use in or on luminaires
185 °C glass-fibre
i
insulated single- For internal wiring of luminaires only and then
core, t w sted twin and three-core only where permitted by BS 4533
185 °C glass-fibre insulated For dry situations at high ambient temperatures
=9 braided drcular and not subject to abrasion or undue flexing
For the wiring of -luminaires
---------
:;a N.otes:
1 cables having thermoplastic (PVC) insulation or sheath should preferably not be used where the
ambient temperature is consistently below O DC. Where they are to be i11Stalled during a period of
==3 2
IO\IV temperature, precaulions should be caken to avoid risk of mechanical damage during handling.
cables should be suitable for the maximum ambient temperature, and should be protected from

1124
any exGess heat produced by other equipment. including other cables.

On-Site Guide
e TheInstitutionof Engineeringand Tedlnorogy
::g Appendix le
=a 3 For flexible cords and cab1es to BS 6007, BS 6141 and BS 6500funher guidance may be obtained
from those standards, or from B-S 7540:2005 (series) Guide to use of c-ables with orated voltage
:;a 4
not exceeding 450/750 V.
Where used as connections to equipment, flexible cables shou1d, where possible, be of the

:a
minimum practicable llength t.o minimize dan_ger. The length of the flexible cable must be Sllch that
will permit correct operation of the protective device.
s Where attached to equipment flexible cables should be protected against tension, crushing.
:;B
abrasion, torsion and kinking. particularly at the inlet po;nt to the electrical equipment. At such inlet
points it may be necessary to use a device which ensures that the cal>le is not bent to an internal
radius be'low that given in the appropriate part of Table 4 of BS 6700. Strain relief, damping devices
or cable guards should 110t damage the cable.
& Flexible cables shouk1 not be run under carpets or other floor coverings whete furniture or other
equipment may rest on them or where heat dissipation from the cable will be affected. Flexible
cables should not be placed where there is a risk of damage from traffic passing over them, unless
suitably protected.
7 Flexible cab!es shouk1 not be used in contact with or dose to heated surfaces, especia11y if the
surface approaches the uppe< thermal limh of the cable.
Protection o f exposed metalwork and wiring systems against corrosion
522.3 In damp situations, where metal cable sheaths and armour •Of cables, metal conduit and
522.5 e-onduit fittings, metal ducting and trunking systems, and associated metal fixings, are liabte
to chemical deterioration or electrolytic attack by materials of a structure with which they

:a may come in contact, it is necessary to take suitable precautions against corrosion.

Materials likely to cause such attack include:
► materials containing magnesium chloride which are used in the construction
of floors and plaster mouldings
=a ► plaster undercoats which may include corrosive salts
► lime, cement and plaster, for exampte on unpainted walls
► oak and other acidic woods
► dissimilar metals likely to set up electrolytic action.
Application of suitable coatings before erection or prevention of contact by separation
with plastics, are recognized as effective precautions against corrosior t
=9 Special care is required in the choice of materials for dips and other fittings for bare
aluminium sheathed cables and for aluminium conduit, to avoid r;sk of local corrosion in
damp situations. Examples of suitable materia'ls for this purpose are the fo'llowing:
► porcelain
► plast;cs
► aluminium
► corrosion-resistant aluminium alloys
► zinc alloys complying with BS 1004
iron or steel protected against corrosion by galvanizing, sherardizing. etc.
=9 s22.s.2 Contact between bare aluminium sheaths or aluminium conduits and any parts made of
:;a brass or other metal having a high copper content should be especially avoided in damp
situations, unless the parts are suitably plated. If such contact is unavoidable, the joint
should be completety protected against ingress of moisture. Wiped joints in aluminium
==3 sheathed cables should always be protected against moisture by a suitable paint, by an
impervious tape, or by embedding in bitumen.

On-Site Guide 1 1 2 5
e The Institutionof EngineeringandTedlnorogy
::g
=a
:;a
:a
:;B

:a

=a

=9

=9
:;a
==3

On-Site Guide 1 1 H
e The Institutionof EngineeringandTedlnorogy
::g
=a
:;a Appendix I
:a
:;B Methods of support
for cables, co,nductors
and wiring systems

This appendix describes examples of methods of support for cables, conductors and
522.8 wiring systems which should satisfy the relevant requirements of Chapter 52 of BS
7671. The use of other methods is not precluded where specified by a suitably quaHfied

:a electrical engineer.

cables generally
Items 1 to 8 below are generally applicable to supports on structures whkh are subject

=a
only to vibration of low severity and a low risk of mechanical impact
1 For non-sheathed cabl.es, instaHation in conduit without further fixing of the cables,
precautions being taken against undue compression or other mechanical stressing
of the insulation at the top of any vertical runs exceeding 5 m in length.
2 For cables of any type, installation in ducting or trunking without further fixing of
the cables, vertical runs not exceeding 5 m in length without intermediate support.
3 For sheathed and/or armoured c-ables installed in accessible positions, support by
=9 dips at spacings not exceeding the appropriate value stated in Table Dl.
4 For cables of any type, resting without fixing in horizontal runs of ducts, conduits,
cable ducting or trunking.
s For sheathed and/or armoured cables in horizontal runs which are inaccessible and
unlikely to be disturbed, resting without fixing on part of a building, the surface of
that part being reasonably smooth.
6 For sheathed and-armoured cables in vertica,1 runs which are inaccessible and
unlikety to be disturbed, supported at the top of the run by a dip and a rounded
support of a radius not less than the appropriate value stated in Table D5.
=9 7 For sheathed cables without armour In vertical runs which are inaccessible and
unlikely to be disturbed, supported by the method described in Item 6 above; the
:;a length of run without Intermediate support not exceeding 5 m for a thermosetting
or thermoplastic sheathed cable.
==3 8 For thermosetting or thermoplastic (PVQ sheathed cables, installation in conduit
without further fixing of the cables, any vertical runs belng in conduit of suitable
size and not exceeding 5 m in length.

On-Site Guide 1 1 2 7
e The Institutionof Engineeringand Tedlnorogy
::g Appendix I D
=a Partimlar applications
:;a 721.522.8 9 In caravans, for sheathed cables in inaccessible spaces such a,s ceiling, wall and
floor spaces, support at intervals not exceeding 0.4 m for vertical runs and 0.25 m

:a for horizontal runs.

10 In caravans, for horizontal runs of sheathed cables passing through floor or ceiling
joists in inaccessible ·floor or ceiling spaces, securely bedded in them,al insulating
:;B material, no further fixing is required.
11 For fiexible cables used as pendants, attachment to a ceiling rose or similar accessory
by the cable grip or other method of strain relief provided in the accessory.
12 For temporary installations and installations on construction sites, supports so
arranged that there is no appreciable mechanical strain on any cable termination or
joint.

Overhead wiring
13 For cables sheathed with thermosetting or thermoplastic material, supported by a
separate catenary wire, either continuously bound up with the cable or attached
thereto at intervals, the inte rvals not exceeding those stated in column 2 of Table D1.
14 Support by a catenary wire incorporated in the cable during manufacture, the

:a spacings between supports not exceeding those stated by the manufacturer and
the minimum height above ground being in accordance with Table 02.
15 For spans without intermediate support (e.g. between buildings) of thermoplastic
(PVC) insulated thermoplastic (PVC) sheathed cable, or thermosetting insulated
cable having an oil-resisting and flame-retardant or HOFR sheath 1 terminal supports
=a so arranged that:
no undue strain is placed upon the conductors or insulation of the cable 1
adequate precautions are taken against any risk of chafing of the cable sheath,
and
the minimum height above ground and the length of such spans are in
accordance with the appropriate values indicated in Table D2.
=9 16 Bare or thermoplastic (PVC) covered conductors of an overhead line for distribution
between a building and a remote point of util ation (e.g. another building)
supported on insulators, the lengths of span and heights above ground having the
appropriate values indica,ted in Table D2 or otherwise installed in accordance with the
E1.ectricity Safety, Quality and Continuity Regulations 2002 (as amended).
17 For spans without intermediate support (e.g. between buikJings) and which are in
situations inaccessible to vehicular traffic, cables installed in heavy gauge steel conduit.
the length of span and height above ground being in accordance with Table 02.

=9 conduit and cable trunking

:;a 18
19
Ri.gid e-onduit supported in accordance with Table 03.
Cable trunking supported in accordance with Table D4.
20 Conduit embedded in the material of the bui,lding.
==3 21 Pliable conduit embedded in the material of the building or in the ground, or
supported in accordance with Table D3.

On-Site Guide 1 1 2 8
c The lnstirutionof 8'1gineering and Technofogy
 T Table D1 Spacings of supports for cables in accessible positions

Maximum spacings of dips (mm)

overall diameter Non-armoured thermosetting or thermoplastic (PVC) Mineral insulated copper

of cable. d• sheathed cables
Armoured sheathed or aluminium
(mm) Generally In caravans cables sheathed cables
Horizontal t Vertie.al t Horizontal t Vertie.al t Horizontal t Vertie.al t Horizontal t Vertical t
2 ] C 5 6 7 8 9
d s:9 250 400 250 400 600 800
(for all sizes) (for aII sizes)
9<ds 15 300 400 350 450 900 1200
15<ds:20 350 450 400 550 1500 2000
20<d!::40 400 550 450 600

•Note:For flatForcables
the spacing of supports for cables having an overall diameter exceeding 40 mm. the manufacturer's recommendations should be observed.
taken as the dimension of the major axis.
0
t The spacings stated for horizontal runs may be applied also to runs at an angle of more than 30• from the venical. For runs at an angle of 30• or less from the
vertical, the vertical spacings are applicable.
"ft
g·.,.
2.

1:
ooo
!!I=,,
o..v,
[·
a.f2

-
,2<5:
-< ,,,

0
::g Appendix lo
=a T Table D2 Maximum lengths of span and minimum heights above ground for

:;a
overhead wiring between buildings, etc.

Minimum height of span above ground (m)t

:a Type of system Maximum
len,th of
At road
aossin,p
In positions
- � ...le
In positions
inaccesst"ble
:;B span (m) to vehicular
traffic.
to vehicular
traffiC-
other than
aossirt,s
'
Cables sheathed with 3 5.8 5.8 3.5
thermoplastic (PVQ or
having an oil-res isting and
flame-retardant or HOFR sheath,
without intermediate support.
cables sheathed with 3 5.8 5.8 3
thermoplastic (PVC) or
having an oil-resisting and
:a flame-retardant or HOFR sheath,
in heavy gauge steel conduit of
diameter not less than 20 mm
and not jointed in its span.

=a
Thermoplastic (PVC) covered 30 5.8 5.8 3.5
overhead lines on insulators
without intermediate support.
Bare overhead lines on 30 5.8 5.8 5.2
insulators without intennediate
support
Cables sheathed with No limit 5.8 5.8 3.5
=9 thermoplastic (PVC) or
havin,g an oil-res isting and
flame-retardant or HOFR sheath,
supported by a catenary wire.
Aerial cables incorporating a Subject to 5.8 5.8 3.5
catenary wire. Item 14
A bare or insulated overhead
line for distribution between
buildings and structures must
=9 be installed to the standard
required by the Electricity
:;a Safety, Quality and Continuity
Regulations 2002.
"'
==3
Columns is not applicable in agrirultural premises.
t In some special cases, such as where cranes are pre sent, 1t will be necessary to increase the
minimum height of span above ground. It is preferable to use underground cables in such locations.

On-Site Guide 1130

e The Institution of Engineering and Tedlnorogy
::g Appendix lo
=a T Table D:S Spacings of supports for conduits

:;a Maximum distance between supports (m)

:a
Rigid metal Rigid insulating Pliable
Nominal diameter
•Ofconduit di (mm) Ho · Vertical Horizontal Vertical Horizontal Vmiral

:;B
2.0
2S<ds40 2.0 2.25 1.75 2.0 0.6 0.8
d>40 2.25 2.5 2.0 2.0 0.8 1.0
Notes:
1 The spacings tabulated allow for maximum fill of cables permitted by the Regulalions and the
thermal limits specified in the re1evam British Standards. They assume that the conduit is not
exposed to other mechanical stress.
2 Supports should be posii;oned within 300 mm of bends or fntings. A flexible conduit should be of
such tength that it does not nee<J to be supported in its run.
3 The inner radius of a conduit bend should be not less than 2.5 times the outside diameter of the
conduit.

:a '9' Table D4 Spacings of supports for cable trunking

Maximum distance between supports (m)

=a Cross-sectional area of
trunking, A (mm 2) Horizontal
Metal
Vertical Horizontal
Insulating
Vertical
1

700<A 1500 1.25 1.5 0.5 0.5

1SOO<A�2500 1.75 2.0 1.25 1.25
=9 2500 < A 5000 3.0 3.0 1.5 2.0
A>SOOO 3.0 3.0 1.75
Notes
1 The spacings tabulated aUmv for maximum fill of cables permitted by the Regulations and the
thermal limits specified in the re1evant British Standards. They assume that the trunking is not
exposed to other mechanical stress.
2 The above fi_gures do not apply to lighting suspension trunking, where the manufacturer's
instructions must be fo11owed, or where special strengthening couplers are used. Supports should
be positioned wi,thin 300 mm of bends or fittings.
=9
:;a
==3

On-Site Guide 1 1 3 1
e The Institution of Engineering and Tedlnorogy
::g Appendix lo
=a T Table D5 Minimum internal radii of bends in cables for fixed wiring

:;a Insulation Finish overall

diameter. d•
Fedor to be appJied
to overall diameter

:a (mm) of cable to detenn ine

minimum internal
radius of bend
:;B Thermosetting or Non-armoured d s: 10 3(2)t
thermop]astic (PVC)
(circular, or drcular 10 < d s:25 4(3)t
stranded copper or
aluminium d>25 6
conductors)
Armoured Any 6
111ermosetting or Armoured or Any 8
thermoplastic (PVC) non-armoured
(solid aluminium
or shaped copper
conductors)
Mineral Copper sheath Any
:a with or without
covering
"' For flat cables the diameter refers to the major axis.
t The value in brackets relates to single-core circular conductors •Of stranded construction installed in

=a *
conduit, ducting or ounking.
Mineral insulated cab,es may be bent to a radius not less than three times the cab,e diameter over
the copper sheath. provided that the bend is not reworked, i.e. straightened and re-bent

=9

=9
:;a
==3

On-Site Guide 1132

C The Institution of Engineering and Technology
::g
=a
:;a Appendix
:a
:;B
Cab,le ,capacities of
condu1it and trunking

A number of variable factors affect any attempt to arrive at a standard method of

assessing the capacity of conduit or trunking.
Some of these are:
reasonable care (of drawing-in)
acceptable use of the space available
:a tolerance in cable sizes
tolerance in conduit and trunking.
The following tab'les can only give guidance on the maximum number of cables which
should be drawn in. The sizes should ensure an easy pull with low risk of damage t o the
=a cables.
Only the ease of drawing�in is taken into account. The electrical effects
of grouping are not. As the number of circuits increases the installed
current-carrying capacity of the cable decreases. Cable sizes have to be
increased with. consequent increase in cost of c"8ble and conduit.
It may sometimes be more attractive economically to divide the cirruits concerned
=9 between two or more enclosures.
If thermosetting cables are installed in the same conduit or trunking as thermoplastic
(PVC) insulated cables, the conductor operating temperature of any of the cables must
not exceed that for thermoplastic (PVC), i.e. thermosetting cables must be rated as
thermoplastic (PVC).
The following three cases are dealt with. Single-core thermoplastic (PVC) insulated
cables in:

=9 straight runs of conduit not exceed;ng 3 m in length (Tables El and E2)

ii straight ru ns ·Of conduit exceeding 3 m in length, or in runs of any length
:;a incorporating bends or sets (Tables E3 and E4)
iii trunking (Tables ES and E6).

==3 For cables and/or conduits not covered by this appendix, advice on the number of cables
that can be drawn in should be obtained from the manufacturer.

On-Site Guide 1 1 3 3
e The Institutionof EngineeringandTedlnorogy
::g Appendix
=a i Single-core thermoplastic (PVC) insulated cables in straight runs o f

:;a
conduit not exceeding 3 m in len.gth
For each cable it is intended to use, obtain the appropriate factor from Table El.

:a Add the cabte factors together and compare the total with the conduit factors given in
Table E2.
:;B The minimum conduit size is that having a factor equal to or greater than the sum of the
cable factors.

T Table E l Cable factors for use in conduit ;n short straight runs

Type of conductor Conductor cross--sectional Cable factor
area (mm2)
Solid 1 22
J.5 27
2.5 39
Stranded 1.5 31
2.5 43

:a 4
6
10
58
88
146
16 202
25 385

=a T Table E2 Conduit factors for use in short stralght runs

Conduit diameter (mm) Conduit factor
16 290
20 460
25 800
=9 32 1400
38 1900
50 3500
63 5600

=9
:;a
==3

On-Site Guide
e The Institutionof Engineeringand Tedlnorogy
1134
::g Appendix
=a ii Single-core thermoplastic (PVC) insulated cables in strai,ght runs of

:;a
conduit exceeding 3 min. length, or in runs •Ofany length incorporating
bends or sets

:a For each cable it is intended to use, obtain the appropriate factor from Table E3.
Add the cabte factors together and compare the total with the conduit factors given in
:;B Table E4, taking into account the length of run it is inte11ded to use and the number of
bends and sets in that run.
The minimum conduit size is that size having a factor equal to or greater than the sum of
the cable factors. For the larger sizes of conduit, multiplication factors are given relating
them to 32 mm diameter conduit

,.. Table E.J Cable factors for use in conduit in 'long straight runs over 3 m, or runs
of any length incorporating bends

Type of Condudor cross-sectional Cable

oondudor area (mm 2) factor
Solid 1 16

:a or
Stranded
1.5
2.5
4
22
30
43
58
10 105

=a 16
25
145
217

The inner radius of a conduit ber:id should be not less than 2.5 times the outside
diameter of the conduit.

=9

=9
:;a
==3

On-Site Guide 1 1 3 5
e The Institutionof EngineeringandTedlnorogy
 T Table E 4 Conduit factors for runs incorporating bends and long straight runs

Length Conduit diameter (mm)

ofrun 16 20 25 32 16 20 25 32 16 20 25 32 16 20 25 32 16 20 25 32
(m) � � � � �

188 303 543 947 1n 286 514 900 158 256 463 818 130 213 388 692
Covered by
1.5 182 294 528 923 167 270 487 857 143 233 422 750 111 182 333 600
2 Tables 1n 286 514 900 158 256 463 818 130 213 388 692 97 159 292 529
2.5 171 278 500 878 150 244 442 783 120 196 358 643 86 141 260 474
El and E2
3 167 270 487 857 143 233 422 750 111 182 333 600
3.5 179 290 521 911 162 263 475 837 136 222 404 720 103 169 311 563
4 177 286 514 900 158 256 463 818 130 213 388 692 97 159 292 529
4.5 174 282 507 889 154 250 452 800 125 204 373 667 91 149 275 500
5 171 278 500 878 150 244 442 783 120 196 358 643 86 141 260 474
0 6 167 270 487 857 143 233 422 750 111 182 333 600
7 162 263 475 837 136 222 404 720 103 169 311 563
g·.,. 8 158 256 463 818 130 213 388 692 159 292 529
9 154 250 452 800 125 204 373 667 91 149 275 500

1:
ooo
!!I=,,
10 150 244
Additional factors:
442 783 120 196 358 643 86 141 260 474
>
o..v, ► For 38 mm diameter use l .4 x (32 mm factor)
[ ' ► For so mm diameter use 2.6 x (32 mm factor) ::,
c.
a_f;' ► For 63 mm diameter use 4.2 x (32 mm factor)
x·
-
,2<5:
- < t'D

:s: m
::g Appendix
=a iii Single-core thermoplastic (PVC) insulated cables in trunking

:;a For each cable it is intended to use, obtain the appropriate factor from Table ES.
Add the cable factors together and compare the total with the factors for trunking given
:a in Table E6.
The minimum siz.e of trunking is that size having a factor equal to or greater than the sum
:;B of the cab1le factors.

'9' Table E S Cable factors for trunking

Condudor PVC Thermosetting

Type of condudor aoss-sectiomd BS 6004 BS n 1 1
area (mml) Cable fador Cable factor
Solid 1.5 8.0 8.6
2.5 11.9 11.9
Stranded 1.5 8.6 9.6
2.5 12.6 13.9
16.6 18.1

:a
21.2 22.9
10 35.3 36.3
16 47.8 50.3
25 73.9 75.4

=a
Notes:
1 These faetors are for metal trunking and may be optimistic for plastic trunking, where the
cross-sectional area available may be significantly reduced from the nominal by the thickness of the
wall material.
2 The provision of spare space is advisable; however, any circuits added at a later date must take ;nro
account grouping, Regu,ation 523.5.

=9

=9
:;a
==3

On-Site Guide 1137

e The Institution of Engineering and Tedlnorogy
::g Appendix I E
=a T Table E6 Factors for trunking

:;a Dimensions
of trunking Factor
Dimensions
of trunking Factor
:a (mm xmm)
50x38 767
(mmxmm)
200 X 100 8572
:;B 50x50 1037 200x 150 13001
75 X 25 738 200x 200 17429
75x38 1146 225x38 3474
75x50 1555 225 X 50 4671
75x75 2371 225x75 7167
100 X 25 993 225 X 100 9662
100x38 1542 225 X 150 14652
100 X 50 .2091 225 X 200 19643
100x75 3189 225x225 22138
100 X 100 4252 300 X 38 4648

:a 150x38
150 X 50
2999
3091
300x50
300 x75
6251
9590
150x75 4743 300x 100 12929

=a 150 X 100
150 X 150
6394
9697
300 X 150
300x200
19607
26285
200 X 38 3082 300 X 225 29624
200x50 4145 300x300 394 28
200 X 75 6359

=9 Note: Space factor is 45% with trunking thickness taken into account

other sizes and types of cable or trunking

For sizes and types of cable or trunking other than those given in Tables ES and E6,
the number of cables installed should be such that the result;ng space factor does not
exceed 45% of the net internal cross-sectional area.
Space factor is the ratio (expressed as a percentage) of the sum of the overall
cross-sectional areas of cables (induding insulation and any sheath) to the internal
=9 cross-sectional area of the trunking or other cable enclosure in which they are installed.
The effective overaU cross sectional area of a non-circular cable is taken as that of a circle
:;a of diameter equal to the major axis of the cab'le.
Care should be taken to use trunking bends etc which do not impose bending radii on
==3 cables less than those required by Table 05.

On-Site Guide
e The Institutionof EngineeringandTedlnorogy
1138
::g
=a
:;a Appendix
:a
:;B
Current- carrying 1

capacities and voltage

drop for copper
conductors

523 Current-carrying capacity

435.l In this simplified approach the assumption is made that the overcurrent protective device
provides both fault current and overload current protection.
For cables buried in the ground, refer to BS 7671 :2008(2011 ), Appendix 4.

=a Procedure
Appx 4, 3 I The design current (lb) of the circuit must first be established.
433.1.1 l The overcurrent device rating (I n) is then selected so that In is greater than or
equal to lb
In lb
=9 The tabulated current-carrying capacity of die selected cable (I t) is then given by:
It In
C-iCgCCt
for simultaneously occurring factors.
C is a rating factor to be applied where the installation conditions differ from those for
which values of current-carrying capacity are tabulated in this appendix. The various
rating factors are identified as follows:
=9 Ca for ambient temperature, see Table Fl
Cg for grouping, see Table F3
:;a Ci for thermal insulation, see Table F2 (Note: For cables installed in thermal
insulat;on as described in Tables F4(i), FS{i) and F6, C = 1)
==3

On-Site Guide 1 1 3 9
e The Institutionof EngineeringandTedlnorogy
::g Appendix I f
=a c, for the type of protective device, i.e.:
-
:;a
433.1.101 where the protective device is a semi-enclosed fuse to BS 3036,
Ct=0.725
- for aH other devices Ct = 1.
:a Voltage do p r

:;B 525
Appx 4,6
To cakulate the voltage drop in volts the tabulated value of voltage drop (mV/A/m) has
to be multiplied by the design current of the circuit Clb), the length of run in metres (L),
and divided by 1000 (to convert to vo'lts):
(mV/A/m) X lb X L
voltage drop =
1000
The requirements of BS 7671 are deemed to be satisfied if the voltage drop between
the origin of the installation and a Hghting point does not exceed 3 per cent of the
nominal voltage (6.9 V) and for other current-using equipment or socket-outlets does
not e x c eed 5 per cent (11.5 V single-phase).

Table 481 'Y Table FI Rating factors (Ca) for ambient air temperatures other than 30 °C to be

:a applied to the current-carrying capacities for cables in free air

Insulation
Mineral

=a Ambient 70 °C
temperature thermoplastic
90 °C
thennosetting
lhermoplastic
covered o,r bare
Bare and not
exoosed to
re> and exposed to
touch 70 °C
touch 105 °C

25 l.03 1. 02 1.07 1.04

30 1.00 1.00 1.00 1.00

=9 35
40
0.94
0.87
0.96
0.91
0.93
0.85
0.96
0.92

=9
:;a
==3

On-Site Guide 1140

c The lnstirution of 8'1gineering and Technofogy
::g Appendix I f
=a s23.9 lhermal insulation
:;a Where a cable is to be run in a space to whicl, thermal insulation is likely to be applied,
the cable should, wherever practicable, be fixed in a position such that it wrn not be

:a covered by the thermal insulation. Where fixing in such a position is impracticable, the
cross-sectional area of the cable must be increased appropriately.

:;B For a cable installed in thermal insulation as described in Tabl.es F4(i), FS(O and F6 no
correction is required.
N'ote: Reference methods 100, 101 and 102 require the cable to be in contact with the
plasterboard or the joists, see Tables 7.1 (ii) and 7. l (iii) in Section 7.
For a single cable likely to be totally surrounded by thermally insulating material over a
length of more than 0.5 m, the current-carrying capacity should be taken, in the absence
of more precise information, as 0.5 times the current-carrying capacity for that cabte
clipped direct to a surface and open (reference method C).
Where a, cable is totally surrounded by thermal insulation for less than 0.5 m the current-
carrying capacity of the cable should be reduced appropriately depending on the size of
cable, length in insulation and thermal properties of the insu'lation. The derating factors

:a
in Table F2 are appropriate to conductor sizes up to 10 mm 2 in thermal insulation having
a thermal conductivity (A) greater than 0.04 Wm· 1 K· 1 •

Table ' Y Table F2 Cable surrounded by thermal insulation

52.2
=a Length in insulation (mm)
50
Derating factor (CJ
0.88
100 0.78
200 o.,63
400 0.51
::?500 0.50

=9

=9
:;a
==3

On-Site Guide 1141

e The Institution of Engineering and Tedlnorogy
T Table F l Rating factors (C".g) for one circuit or one multicore cable or for a group of circuits, or a group of multicore
Table 4C1 cables (to be used with the current-carrying capacities of Tables F4(i), FS{i) and F6)

Number of drcuits or multicore cables Applic.able reference

Arrangeme t
method for CUrffnt-canying
(cables touching) 1 2 3 4 s 6 7 a 9 12 capacities
Bunched in air,
on a surface, 1.0 0.80 0.70 0.65 0.60 0.57 0.54 0.52 0.50 0.45 A to F
embedded or enclosed
Single layer on wall
1.0 0.85 0.79 0.75 0.73 0.72 0.72 0.71 0.70 0.70 C
or floor
Single layer multicore on a perfo-
rated horizontal or vertical cable 1.0 0.88 0.82 o.n 0.75 0.73 0.73 0.72 0.72 0.72 E
tray system
Single layer multicore
on a cable ladder system 1.0 0.87 0.82 0.80 0.80 0.79 0.79 0.78 0.78 0.78 E
or cleats, etc.

"T1
 Notes to Table F3:

These factors are applicable to uniform groups of cables, equally loaded.

2 Where horizontal dearances between adjacent cables exceed twice their overall diameter, no rating factor need be applied.
3 The same factors are applied to:
groups of iwo or three single-core cables
multicore cables.
4 If a group consists of both two- and three-core cables, the total number of cables is taken as the number of circuits, and the
corresponding factor is applied to the tables for two loaded conductors for the two-core cables, and to the tables for three loaded
conductors for the three-core cables.
5 If a group consists of n single-core cables it may either be considered as n/2 cirruits of two loaded conductors (for single-phase
cirruits) or n/3 circuits of three loaded conductors (for three-phase circuits).
6 The rating factors given have been averaged over the range of conductor sizes and types of installation included in Tables 4D1A to 4J4A
of SS 7671 (this includes F4(i), F5(i) and FG of this guide) and the overall accuracy of tabulated values is within 5%.
7 For some installations and for other methods not provided for in the above table, it may be appropriate to use factors calculated for
specific cases, see for example Tables 4C4 and 4C5 of SS 7671.
8 Where cables having differing conductor operating temperature are grouped together, the current rating is to be based upon the lowest
operating temperature of any cable in the group.
523.5 9 If, due to known operating conditions, a cable is expected to carry not more than 3 0 % of its grouped rating, it may be
ignored for the purpose of obtaining the rating factor for the rest of the group. For example, a group of N loaded cables would
normally require a group rating factor of Cg applied to the tabulated It. However, if M cables in the group carry loads which are
not greater than 0.3 Cglt amperes the other cables can be sized by using the group rating factor corresponding to (N minus
M) cables.

"'T1
 T Table F4(1) Single-core 70 •c thermoplastic (PVC) or thermosetting (note 1) insulated cables, non-armoured, with or
Table 401A without sheath (copper conductors)
Ambient temperature: 30 •c
Conductor operating temperature: 70 °C
Current-carrying capacity (amperes):
Conductor Reference method A Reference method B Reference method C Reference method F
uos.s- (endosed In (endosed In
sealonal conduit In thermally conduit on a wall or In (In free air or on a perforated cable tny
area lnsullltln1 walL etc.) trunldn1, etc.) (dipped direct) horizontal or vertical)
Spaced by one
3 or4
Touchln1 cable diameter
lcables, cables.
3 or4 3 or4 slnsle- three- 2 cables, 2 cables slnsJe-phase
2 cables, cables, 2 cables, cables, phase 11.c. phase a.c. si I!- 3 cables, 3 cables 11.c. or d.c.. or
slnx!e- three- single- thrre- or d.c. flat ■nd phase ■.c. three- thrre- 3 cables three-
phase phase phase phase flat and tou,chlna or d.c. phase a.c. phase a.c. phase a.c.
a.c. or d.c. a.c. a.c. or d.c. a.c. touchlfll or trefoil flat flat trefoil flat
horizontal vertical
2 3 4 5 6 7 8 !I 10 11 12
()
mm> A A A A A A A A A A A
"ft
I·.,.
g_ 2.5 20 18 24 21 27 25

i"
,.oo
o
4
6
26
34
24
31
32
41
28
36
37
47
33
43 ::r:,,
!oJ' . .:;>
v, 10 46 42 57 50 65 59
ttl
[i%. 16 61 56 76 68 87 79 ::i
c.
a. x·
-
,2i5: 25 80 73 101 89 114 104 131 114 110 146 130
- < /'I)

t "T1
T Table F4(1) continued
Cond11dcM' Reference method A Reference method B Reference method C Reference method F
aoss-- (endosed In (endosed In
sedlonal conduit in therma.lly wndult on a wall or in (In free air or on a perforated c.aible m y
re insulati n g wall, ek.) trunking. etc.) (dipped direct) ho,ri:zont I or vertlc I)
3 or4 Spaced by one
2 c bles. C.llbles. Toudting uble diameter
3 or4 3 or4 sln&fe- three- 2 cables, 2 cables slnsle-ph se
2 aibles, c.ables. 2 c.ables, cables, phase .c. phase .c. slns'e- 3 c.ables, 3 c.ables .c. or d.c. or
slnl'e- three- sln¥1e- three- or d.c. flat and phase a.c. three- three- 3 cables three-
phase phase phase phase flat and touching or d.c. phase &c. phase a.c. phase a.c.
• - ' or d - ' L
C. LC. Of d.c. L
C. touching or trefoil flat flat trefoil flat
horizontal vertical
2 l 4 s 6 7 II 9 10 11 12

mm• A A A A A A A A A A A
35 99 89 125 110 141 129 162 143 137 181 162
50 119 108 151 134 182 1117 19& 174 1117 219 197
70 151 136 192 171 234 214 251 225 216 281 254
95 182 164 232 'll.11 284 261 304 275 264 341 311

Notes to Table F4(i):

The ratings for cables with thermosetting insulation are applicable for cables connected to equipment or accessories designed to operate with cables which run at a
temperature not exceeding 70 •c. Where conductor operating temperatures up to 90 •care acceptable the oment rating is increased - see Table 4E IA of BS 7671.
2 Where the conductor is to be protected by a semi-enclosed fuse to BS 3036, see the introduction to this appendix.
l The current-carrying capacities in columns 2 to 5 are also applicable to flexible cables to BS 6004 Table I (c) and to 90 •c heat-resisting PVC cables to BS 6231
Tables B and 9 where the cables are used in fixed installations.

"'T1
 T T a b l e F4(11) Voltage drop (per ampere per metre) at a conductor operating temperature of 70 •c
Table 4 0 I B

2 cables, slnile-phase a.c. 3 or 4 cables, three-phase a.c.

Ref-nee
Reference Reference Reference methods CS. F Reference Reference
methods methods CS. F methods CS.F Reference (dipped di.red, methods CS. F methodsCS.F
Al, B (dipped dired (dipped dire<! methodsAl,B on tray or (dipped direct, (dipped direct,
Conductor (endosed In ontnyor on tray or (endosed In In free air) on tray or on tray or
UC!li-sectlonal 2 cables conduh or In free air) In free air) conduit or Touchln1, In free air) In free air)
area d.c. trunkinl) touchln1 spaced trunklnl) Trefoil Touchln1, n n Spaced•, Flat
l 3 4 5 6 7 e 9
mm' mV/Nm mV/Nm mV/A/m mV/A/m mV/A/m mV/Nm mV/Nm mV/A/m

2.5 18 18 18 18 15 15 15 15
4 11 11 11 11 9.5 9.5 9.5 9.5
6 7.3 7.3 7.3 7.3 6.4 6.4 6.4 6.4
10 4.4 4.4 4.4 4.4 3.8 3.8 3.8 3.8
16 2.8 2.8 2.8 2.8 2.4 2.4 2.4 2.4
"ft
I·.,.
: , 25 1.75
zt
1.80
zt
1.75
zt
1.80
it

1.55
zt
1.50
zt
1.55
zt
1.55
g_
35 1.25 1.30 1.25 1.30 1.10 1.10 1.10 1.15

i.,.
ooo
50 0.93 1.00 0.95 0.97 0.85 0.82 0.84 0.86
::r:,
70 0.63 0.72 0.66 0.69 o.61 o.57 o.60 0.63
!'oJ . .:;>
v,
95 0.46 0.56 0.50 0.54 0.48 0.43 0.47 0.51
[i%" •
a. c..
x·
-
SJ>i!dngs larger than one cable diameter will result in larger voltage drop.
,2i5:
- < /'I) t The impedance values in Table F4(ii) consist of both the resistive and reactive elements of voltage drop, usually provided sepilrateiy for 25 mm 2 and above
conductor sizes.

I
For more information, see Appendix 4 of BS 7671.
"T1
 T Table F5(1) Multicore cables having thermoplastic (PVC) or thermosetting insulation (note 1), non-armoured
Table 402A (copper conductors)
Ambient temperature: 30 •c
Conductor operating temperature: 70 •c
current-carrying capacity (amperes):
Reference method E
Conductor Reference method A Reference method B (In free air or on ■ perforated
cross-sec:tlonal (endosed In conduit In 11 (endosed In conduit Reference method C uble t,ay, etc. homontal or
area therm11lly lnsulatlns wall, etc.) on II wall or In trunklni, etc.) (dipped dlred) vertical}
1 three-aire
1 thi--.:ore 1 three-core 1 thi--.:ore uble•or 1
1two- cable•or 1 1 two- cable• or I I two- cable• or I 1 two- four-<0re
core cable•, four-core core cable•, four-core core cable•, four-core core cable•, ea ble, three-
slnsl�phase uble.three- slnp�phase cable. three- slnpe-phase cable. three- slnpe-ph■se phtie
1.c. or d.c. phase LC. ■.c.. or d.c. ph1se ■.c. 1.c. or cl.c. ph1se 1.c.. ■.c. or d.c. C
I
..
2 3 4 5 6 7 8 g
mm> A A A A A A A A
0
"ft 1.5 14 13 15 19.5 18.5
16.5 17.5 22
g·.,. 2.5 18.5 17.5 23 20 27 24 30 25
4 25 23 30 X1 36 32 40 34

-
2.

1:
6 32 29 38 34 46 41 51 43
10 43 39 52 445 53 57 70 60
ooo 16 57 52 69 62 85 76 94 80 >
-0
!!I=,, -0
o..v,
25 75 90 80 112 H 119 101
[ ' c.
a_f;' 35 92 83 111 99 138 119 148 126
x·
-
,2<5:
- < t'D

"'T1
T Table F5(1) continued

Referenc,e method E
Condudor Referenc,e method A Referen.ce method B (In free air or on II perforated
cross-sectional (endosed In conduit In 11 (endosed In conduit Reference method C cable tray, etc. horizontal or
ere thermally Insulating wall. etc.) on • wall or In tnmldng. etc.) (dipped direct) ...,rtJcal)
1 three-one
1 three-core 1 three-core 1 three-core cable• or 1
1 two- cable•or 1 1 two- cable" or 1 1 two- cable" or I I two- four-<0re
core cable", four-<0re core cable", four-<0re core cable", four-<0re core cable", ea ble. three-
slnsle-phase cable.th.l'ff- single-phase cable. three- single-phase cable. three- sl ngle-ph se phase
LC. or cl.c. phase a.c. a.c.orcl.c. phase a.c. LC. or d.c. phase Le. LC. or cl.c. a.c.
2 3 • 5 6 7 a 9
mm2 A A A A A A A A
50 110 99 133 118 lfi8 144 180 153
70 139 125 168 149 213 184 232 196
95 167 150 201 179 258 223 282 238

Notes to Table FS(i):

llle ratings for cables with thermosetting insulation are applicable for cables connected to equipment or accessories designed to operate with cables which run at a
temperarure not exceeding 70 •c. Where conductor operating temperatures up to 90 •care acceptable the current rating is increased - see Table 4E2A of 8S 7671.
•2 Where the conductor is to be protected by a semi-endosed fuse to 8S 3036, see the inuoduction to this appendix.
With or without protective conductor. Circular conductors are assumed for sizes up to and induding 16 mm 2• Values for larger sizes relate to shaped conductors and
may safely be applied 10 circular conductors.

"'T1
 Appendix
::el Table 4028 T Table FS(il) Voltage drop (per ampere per metre) at a conductor operating
temperature of 70 °C

Conductor lWo-c:ore cable, Three- or four-core

:a aoss-section,al area
1
single phase a.c.
3
cable, three phase
4
:;B mm2 mV/A/m mV/A/m
1
1.5 29 25
2.5 18 18 15
4 11 11 9.5
6 7.3 7.3 6.4
10 4.4 4.4 3.8
16 2.8 2.8 2.4
zt zt
25 1.7.5 1.75 1.50

:a 35
50
1.25
0.93
1.25
0.94
1.10
0.81
70 0.63 0.65 0.57

=a t
95 0.46 0.50 0.43
The impedance values in Table FS(ii) consist of both the resistive and reactive elements of voltage
drop, usually pfovided separately for 25 mm2 and above conductor sizes.
For more information, see Appendix 4 of BS 7671.

=9

=9
:;a
==3

On-Site Guide 1 1 4 9
e The Institution of Engineering and Tedlnorogy
T Table F 6 70 •c thermoplastic (PVC)
insulated and sheathed flat cable with protective conductor (copper conductors)
Table 405 Ambient temperature: 3 0 •c
Conductor operating temperature: 7 0 •c
Current-carrying c.apadty (amperes) and voltage drop (per ampere per metre):

Conductor Reference Reference Reference Reference Reference Reference Valta1e drop

avss- method U>CI• method 101• method 102• method 103 methodC method A
sedlonalarea (above a (abOVI! II (In a stud wall
plasterboard plasterboard (In a stud wall with thermal
ceillngroffttdby ceili.ng mvered by with thermal Insulation with
thenruol lnsut tfon lhenn l lnsulatlon Insulation with aible not toudtlna (endosed In
not exceedlns_ loo exceed! ! 0Q mm cable touchln1 the the lnne, wall conduit In an
mm In thickness) In thickness) Inner wall surface) surface) (dipped direct) Insulated wall)
2 3 4 5 6 1 8
mm' A A A A A ,. mV/A/m

1.5 16 13 16 10 20 14.5 29
2.5 21 17 21 13.5 27 20 18
4 27 22 X1 17.S 37 26 11
6 34 27 35 23.5 47 32 7.3
10 45 36 47 32 64 44 4.4
16 57 46 63 42.5 85 57 2.8

Notes:
• Reference methods 100. 101 and 102 require the cable to be in contact with the plasterboard ceiling. wall()( joist see Tables 7.l(ii) and 7.l(iii) in Section 7.
1 Wherever practicable, a cable is to be fixed in a position such that it will not be covered with thermal insulation.
1 Regulation 523.9, BS 5803-5: Appendix C: Avoidance of overheating of electric cables, Building Regulations Approved Document B and Thermal insulation: avoiding
risks, BR 262, BRE, 2001 refer.

"T1
::g
=a
:;a Appendix
:a
:;B Certification and
reporting

The certificates and forms are used with the kind permission of 8S1.

GI lntrodudion
fundamentally, two types of form are recognised by BS 7671, certificates and reports:

:a ► certificates are issued for new installation work

► reports are issued for inspections of existing installations.

G2 Certification
=a Two types of certificate for new work are recognised by BS 7671:
► Electrical Installation Certificate
► Minor Electrkal Installation Works Certificate.

G2.1 Electrical Installation Certificate

The Electrical Installation Certificate is intended to be issued where more significant
=9 installation work is undertaken; examples are:
► a complete installation for a new property
► rewire of an existing installation
► replacement of a consumer unit
► addition of a new circuit from the distribution board or consumer unit

G2.2 Minor Elecbical Installation Works Certificate

The Minor Electrical Installation Works Certificate is intended to be issued for an addition
or alteration to an existing circuit; examples are:
=9 ► adding lights to a lighting circuit

:;a ► adding socket-oudets to a ring final circuit

► rerouting an existing circuit
► replacing an existing shower with a larger power rating of unit
==3 ► replacing circuit-breakers with RCBOs where there is a difference of
overcurrent type, e.g. replacing Type C for Type B.

On-Site Guide 1151

e The Institutionof EngineeringandTedlnorogy
::g Appendix I G
=a In each case, the characteristicso•f the circuit are likely to have been altered, whether it's

:;a
the addition of extra load or changes to the original earth fault loop impedance.

G2.J Aaountability
:a Certificates call for those responsible for the elec trical installation or constructlon work to
certify that the requirements of the Regulations have been met. Under no circumstances
:;B should a third party issue a certificate for installation work they have not undertaken.
It is common with larger installations for the design to be carried out by one company,
installation or construction by someone else and the inspection and testing to be
undertaken by some other, e.g. a testing organisation working on behalf of the installer;
this is quite acceptable but the company who carries out the installation must issue the
Electrical Installation Certificate.

GJ Reporting
GJ.1 Electrical Installation Condition Report
The Electrical Installation Condition Report (EICR) is intended to be issued when a
periodic inspection of an electrical installation has been carried out. The EICR does not
:a certify anything and, hence, must not be issued to certify new electrical installation work.
The purpose of the iEICR is to report on the condit;on of an existing electrical insta,llation
and, ultimately, present one of two outcomes:
► SATISFACTORY - the installation is deemed safe for continued use

=a UNSATISFACTORY - one or more issues of safety have been identified.

Where an unsatisfactory result has been recorded, C l and/or C2 observations will
have been induded identifying the reason(s) for the result. Once the report has been
issued by the inspector, the onus is then placed on the client to act in response to the
observations recorded.

GJ.2 Observations
=9 Observations to be recorded fall into three categories;
C l - Danger present. Risk of injury. Immediate remedial action required
C2 - Potentially dangerous - urgent remedial action required
C3 - Improvement recommended.
Examples of Cl
Where danger currently exists and an immediate issue of safety is apparent:
► uninsulated live conductors exposed on broken wiring accessory
=9 ► incorrect polarity at socket-outlets, e.g. live/cpc reversal
► item of metalwork that has become live due to a fault.

:;a Examples of C l
Not immediately dangerous but a dangerous condition could occur due to a fault:
==3 ► main equipotential bonding not installed to extraneous-conductive-parts
► RCD (30 mA for additional protection) fails to operate in the required time

On-Site Guide 1 1 5 2
e The Institutionof EngineeringandTedlnorogy
::g Appendix I G
=a ► double-pole fusing (line and neutral)
► no connection to means of earthing at origin
:;a no cpc for lighting circuit having Class I fittings/accessories with exposed-
cond uctive-pa rts.
:a Examples of C3

:;B Installations complying with older versions of BS 7671:

► no 30 mA RCD for additional protection for socket-outlets used by unskilled/
uninstructed persons
earth leakage circuit-breaker insta'lled at origin of TT installation
► no cpc for \ighting circuit where only Class II fittings/accessories are installed.

G3.J Dangerous situations

Where the inspector discovers an extremely dangerous situation, e.g. persons or livestock
are at immediate risk of electric shock or an imminent fire hazard is evident, urgent action
is a.dvised to remove the danger. As the expert, the inspector has been employed to
identify electrical problems and, therefore, should make safe such dangerous issues
while on the premises.

:a
The inspector is advised to exercise judgement to secure the area and inform the client
immediately, foHowed up in writing, Once permission has been obtained, the danger
should be removed.

G3.4 Remedial work

=a Often the client will ask how much time they have before any necessary remedia'I work
should be carried out once alerted of the unsatisfactory result of the inspection. There is
no standard answer that can be given as all installations and situations are different from
each other. It is worth informing the client, however, that the installation has been given
an unsatisfactory result as there are issues of electrical safety and a duty of care exists
in law to ensure that employees or members of the publk are not placed in a position
of unacceptable risk.
=9 When remedial work has been completed in response to the findings of a periodic
inspect1on, the work wiH need to be certified as described in G2.

G4 lntrodudion to Model Forms from

as 1&11:2001(2011)
For convenience, the forms are numbered as below:
=9 Form 1
Form 2
Electrical Installation Certificate (single-signature)
Elect;rical Installation Certificate
:;a form 3
Form 4
Schedule of Inspections
Generic Schedule of Test Results
Form 5 Minor Electrical Installation Works Certificate
==3 Form 6 Electrical Installation Condition Report
Form 7 Condition Report lnspect[on Schedule

On-Site Guide 1 1 5 3
e The Institutionof EngineeringandTedlnorogy
::g Appendix I G
=a Appx6 The introduction to Appendix 6 'Model forms for certification and reporting' of BS
7671 :.2008(2011) is reproduced below.
:;a (i) The Electrical Installation Certificate required by Part 6 should be made out and

:a signed or otherwise authenticated by a competent person or persons in respect

of the design, construction, inspection and testing of the work.
(ii) The Minor Works Certificate required by Part 6 should be made out and signed
:;B or otherwise authenticated by a competent person in respect of the design,
construction, inspection and testing of the minor work.
(iii) The Electrical Installation Condition Report required by Part 6 should be made out
and signed or otherwise authenticated by a competent person in respect of the
inspection and testing of an installation.
(iv) Competent persons will, as appropriate to their function under (i) (ii) and (iii)
above, have a sound knowledge and experience relevant to the nature of the work
undertaken and to the technical standards set down in these Regulations, be fully
versed in the inspe.ction and testing procedures contained in these Regulations
and employ adequate testing equipment.
(v) Electrical lnsta!'lation Certificates wm indicate the responsibility for design,
construction, inspection and testing, whether in relation to new work or further

:a
work on an e,<,isting installation.
Where design, construction, inspection and testing are the responsibility of one person a
C e rtificate with a single-signature declaration in die form shown below may replace the
multiple signatures section of the model form.

=a FOR DESIGN, CONSTRUCTl,ON, INSPECTION & TESTING

I being the person responsible for the Design, Construdion ., Inspection &
Testing of the electrical installation (as indicated b y my signature below),
particulars ,of w'hich are described above, having exercised reasonable skill
and care when. carrying out the Design, Construdion, Inspection & Testing,
b · CERTIFY
h_ere_y _ _ _ _ _th.at th e s a i___
d w o rk · h' eh
_ f orw_J b· · ·· 'bi e· si t o t h_e
_ _ I h ave_eenrespons1_ ·

=9 best of m y knowledge and belief in accordance with BS 7671 :2008, amended

to ............. (date) except for the departures, if any, detailed as follow.s.

(vi) A Minor Works Certificate win indicate the responsibility for design, constrnction,
inspection and testing of the work described on the certificate.
(vii) An Electrical Installation Condition Report will indicate the responsibility for the
inspection and testing of an existing installation within the extent and limitations
specified on the report.
(viii) Schedules of inspection and schedules of test results as required by Part 6
should be issued with the associa,ted Electrical Installation Certificate or Electrical
=9 Installation Condition Report.
(ix) When making out and signing a form on behalf of a company or other business
:;a entity, individuals should state for whom they are acting.
(x) Additional forms may be required as darification, if needed by ordinary persons,
==3 or in expansion, for larger or more complex installations.
(xj) The IET Guidance Note 3 provides further information on inspection and testing
and for periodic inspection, testing and reporting.

On-Site Guide
c Thelnstirution of 8'1gineeringandTechnofogy
1154
::g Appendix I G
=a G4.1 Electrical Installation Certificate
:;a Figures G4.l (i)-(iv) show a typical completed Electrical Installation Ce.rtificate comprising
Forms 1, 3 and 4. It is assumed that the diagrams and documentation required by

:a Regulation 514.9 are availab[e. The installation is for a music shop, which has SELV
lighting, wiring in close proximity to gas pipes, broadband and data cables, and has fire
sealed trunking through to a store room. Regarding Form 4, the continuity test has been
:;B carried out using (R1 + R2) and hence R2 testing is Not AppHcab!e; also, since RCDs 1
and 2 each protect three circuits "ditto" marks have been used on the form. Different
test instruments will show di,fferent displays indicating "out of range", e.g. +299 or >199.

:a

=a

=9

=9
:;a
==3

On-Site Guide 1 1 5 5
e The Institutionof EngineeringandTedlnorogy
 Appendix

Y Figure G4.1 (I) Electrical Installation Certificate - page l

Form 1 Form No: SY.T.. l .. ./1

ELECIBICAL INSTALLATION CERTIFICATE
(REOUIREMENTS FOR ELECTRICAL INSTAL.LATIONS - BS 7671 PET WIRING REGULATIONS))

DETAILS OF lHE CLIENT Buzz Music Store

............................................··••i1J ':::lon.Street ................................................................................ Post Cod&· AC30 .1 DC

INSTALLATION ADDRESS
Buzz Music Store
.: . :.......................................... 22.!ah.Dsroa.S.r.rccL ...................................................................... �........ Post Code: �.g9, . 1 . �
Oldtown
DESCRIPTION ANO EXTENT OF THE INSTALLATION TIIC!I boxes as appropriate
New lnstallation 121
Oescriplion ol inslallaUon:
Rewire ,of small commercial premises - music shop
Addition to an
existing lnstalalion □
Extent ol fnslalatlon covered by lhis Certificate:
Complete installation
Alteration to ar1
exiSling instaratiOn □
tUse contlnualion sheel I l'\!!CGSSBM soe conltluatlon sheet No: . A
FO.R DESIGN, CONSTRUCTION, INSPECTION a. TESTING
I b e � the person responsible fllf the design, oonslruction, inspection & testing of the electrical insla!lalion (as irllicated by my
signatu-re below), particulars ol whit!h are described above, having exeJcised reasoo.able skill and care vd1en carrying out lhe design,
construction, lnspecllon & testing hereby CERTIFY lhat the said work for which I have been res ponsible is to the best of my
knowledge and beliel In acconlance with BS 7671 :2008, amended IO ?QJJ•...•• ,(daie} excepl IOf the departures. If any, detalled as
lollows:
Details of deparlures lrom BS 7671 (RegulatiOrtS 120.3 an<l 133.5):
None

e o
: :rE:12 ::;; ; ::

CompanyPCJ,Electrical ........................................................
d

ee
:
•: 0 : : ::
:
;, ; ; ; ............

Address; - iolau1:r..Oas.e.h ..... ,.................................. .............

".CL Tel No; cHffl'5(j1"ggo··
....
••••• ., ... " ... ' ..... . ,. ., ........ ""'••mm, ••.,, ... Postoode; .h..�jj'ij'"'"'"'·"""'"""····· ....... . ,........... , ....uo.,, ........
NEXT INSPECTION
I,e,ximmend tnat tnis inst.a.nation is lurtner ir,soeoted anid tested after an inleNal of nol mol'G ·than .. S ....... y e e t S I �
T
SUP,F'LY CHARAC ERISTICS ANO EARTI-IING ARRANGEMENTS T"ic«t,,.,.. _ _ _ _ .. _
Eanhlng 11nangements Number and Type of Live 1Nl1 Jrt1 of StJpply P11r1tmeters
t Su;ppiy

□
Conductors Protective Device
TN•C
TN•S
a.c. d,c.I.a' □ Nominal vo1tago. U/Uo m ..........no.v
Cha:racteristlcs
1·J)haSe, 2-wite 2•wire D Type S.JJ Lfu
□ 2-phase, 3.-wire □
TN-C-S
TT 1•pl\ase. 3•wlre 3-wlra D Nominal fmquency, f 1'' ............. .S.O. Hz
rr □ other □ L0.9.. kA
3-Pl'laSe, 3-wire □
Pros.l)e(ltive faolt current. lit w Rated
current..............
lOO ,A
,Other sources □ 3-ptme, 4.wJre D External loop imped(U'IQ&, :Z. � ..21. n
of S1Jpply (lo be detailed
on atlached sdhedules) Con&mabon of supply l)Cii¥ity ,,.__ mb y snqu,y. (21 t1J err;ur, aa,y
121 _,..,,,.,,d

Page 1 of .f:

On-Site Guide I 156

c The lnstirution of 8'1gineering and Technofogy
 Appendix IG
T Figure G4.1 (Ii) Electrical lnstaHation Certificate - page 2

Form 1 Form No: .YI.·.L ..11

PMITICULARS OF INSTALLATION REFERRED TO IN THE CEATIF:ICATE no,_.,......,_ .._ . .
Means of Earthing Maximum 'Demand

Oistfi>utor's laCility � MaxinMJm demand (load) ......................... 00.-WM Amps o. .... • �

Details of lnstallatlon EArth Electrode (where appliclfbJo)
Install.II ion locallon Electrode rcs1Slal"IC8 to Eanh
earth eiectrode D
...................... N.I.A. ................... N/A .... n
M11tn Protective Conductors

Ear1hing OOJ'lductor; material � P � .............. csa ......... J §.... mm2 Continuity and cormection ve!lfied liZI
Main pwteclive bonding
concJuc!or.i. material � P � L ............ ,c:sa ......... JQ.... mm 2 Continuity and connection verified Ii:!
To iwoming water andfoI gas service ra- To olher elements:�A .............................................................. .
Main Switch orClrcult-br1111ker

es, Type arld No. of poles.��.�.:�!.:�.�?����). C1.men1 rating ....... J:09..A Volt.tg& r�,ng ........ i9. .... V

Location . S . t � f f i . ( w . } � I a j � ) ...................... . Fuse ta.ling or setting ......... tl/A . A

Rated residual OMrati.nc:1 curren.t ,... =..

; , l t \ mA. 11M OO!lraliM time o1Nb� ms (at l , n i - - - - - - - - • M - • - - · - - · - - -

COMMENTS ON EXilSTING INSTALLATION (in 1h11 case ol an addition at alteration see Section 633):
NIA ....................................................................................................................................................................................................... .

SCHEDULES
The attached Schedules are part of this document and thls Certificate Is vald only when they are attached lo It
...... L . Schedules of Inspections and .....L .. Schedu1es ol TeSI Results are atta.ched.
,c,,x, ...,...,.... o i - - - « i

ELECTRICAL INSTALLATION CERTIFICATE

GUIIDANCE FOR RECIPIENTS

This safety Ce:rtificate l:ias been inued to confirm that the electrical installation WOl'k to which it relates bas been designed,
00115tl\lcted, inspected and tested in accordaaoe with British Stand:ud 7671 (lhc 1ET Wiring Regulations).

You should hm·e rcce.ived an uorigin;!J'. Ccnific.act and the contractor should h(l\'C retained a duplic.aic. I f you wc,rc the
person ordering the work, bm not the own.er of the in5Ulla.tion. yoo 1hould p:m this C.Crtifieate, or a fu.11 copy of it including
the schedules, immediate I)' to the owner.

The "origrnal" Certificate shoo.Id be retuned in a safe place 3Jld be shown to any penon inspecting or undenaking further
work on the electrical installation in the fulllro. H )O
' U later ncate the property, drls Certificate 'Nill demomtrate to the new
owner that the electrical installation complied v.id:J the requimnen� of British Stand:ud 7671 at the lime lhe Cenificate was
issued. The Construction (Design 1111d M11J1agancol) Regulations require that, f'or a project covered by tho5C Regulations. a
copy of lhis Cenificate. tagctha wid! :;.ehcdulcs, is included in the projt\11 health and s.afcty dO<;Umcmation.

For safety reasons, the electrical insu1ll:u.ion will need to be inspected 111i:!.ppropriate intcM1.l1 by a compc1en1 person. The
m.uimum time interval recommended before I.he next impec:tion is stated on P�c I under• BXT INSPECTJOX·.

This Certificate is intended to be inued only for a new el.eclrical ins1al.lation or for new work usociatcd with 11Daddition or
alteration IO an existing illS!al.lat:ioo. It should not have been is.sued for the inspection of 3JI existing electrical installatioo. An
"Electrical lnstallatioo Condition Repon" 5hould be issued for such an impection.

Page 2 of .4.

On-Site Guide I 157

e The Institution of Engineering and Tedlnorogy
 Appendix
T Figure G4.l(ili) Schedule of Inspections - Electrical Installation Certificate -
page3
Form 3 Fenn No: .SVJ'�t../3

SCHEDULE OF INSPECTIONS (for new installation work only)

'Methods of proteetton against et:ectrtc shock PreventJooQ f mu1ua1 detrimentalInfluence
Both basic and fault protection: [ Z J {a) Proxrmlry io OOIH!luctricaf servJCOS r!rnd oiher ll'llluences
( Z ] (b) Sci91oga1JOn of Band land 8allCI D oreu ts « uM ol
[ Z ) (I) $Q.V (nolO 1)
isiAI (11} PE.LV
13andJ!lonsu
lstA] {c) Segrngaoonol salotydtcu 1s
� (ui) Doublo ,nsula!lon
� (tY) RoWorc:od ,nsulaoon lde:ntiflcallon
:aeslc protection: (�o i i
( Z j (a) Pw$OO(;o 01diagrams. I � . ClrCU.ICMrtund

[2J (tl lnWla1Jon of live F)aU

GZJM Baf'I\OtS orOndo$ul'OS
( Z ] (b)

Cl] {c)
� of dl!'lgot notlcos rind OCl'!ol watn1ng t!Olloos
Labelw,g ol ptOl:eclMJ dew:as. swlllft!S and IDrminals
NtA) (111) o � � (noro 3)
(Z] (d) ldOlltiricaliorl Of 00f'IC!uc:IOC's
isli:\J (rY) Alaoog CUIOI react, (note 41
C a b l e s and conductors
:Fault protection:
(i) Automatic dh,conl'l&Otlon of supply:
(lJ Seloctoonoloono::UCCO<Sforas�ne-ca,,ry,ng � , y a'ICI
�dW
[ZJ (ZJ Er9Clion melhods
[LI [ZJ Routing ol cables ,n p t � zonos
[ZJ PIOIOllOII of protoctr'ICI bond1!"1g oonduc:lors Cebte, 11'100!1]:IOnllng earthed Bffl'IO!Jf 0t $holllh. 01' n.n
�
� � of suppCornonlary bone ng, QQndl,let(Q w,tlkn an eartried wl."IIIQ system, Cll' OlnerWISe lldoquolclly

rfslAI � Of oaitlanQ Qil'Q(IOiN'l)Cl'U fOC' prolDcled against naJs. saows end lhe
cornbtnod � and rundJonal pulTJOIS(I$ (LI Mellt.onal protlldion � by 30 mA RCO IOt eablos
COl'ICOa!Od in IS (Yltl«O rocr11 rod in pr01Tli$0S no1 unelor
1/\oSupo!'V$bn cd a s 10d « in$tl\ldOd l)Ol'SOl'I)

� FELV (Z] Conno,etlon ol �

[l] Cl'IOooo and S4'lling of pmoc!IVO a.-.cl mon.lO!"ll'lg (Z] Presenco 01frro berTiors. suia'!lle seals and protocoon
against lllOnnal oftocts
C!ovioos (for tau� 111'1d/oro..orcvrronl protoctoon}
(II) ,Non-conducting tocatlon: (nole 5) General
Bii! AbsMoo 01protective concM:lors PtOSOnCO and OOl'f{lel IOalliOn o f � deviCos lot

-I.Chg-
(110 Earth•free local equipotentJaJI bo!'lding: (no106) ISOlalieln ancl SWitd\tng
� P r ( J s - 01(laah.froe IQcal oqu,pol(lnllal AdlHlU!ICY ol !ll0COSS ro !IDd othoI oqu,pmonl
bonc:bg Pani.culal protGclNO measures for spoc:ial rnstallal,ons and
(Iv) Electrical sei:,aratlon: (ncto 7} IO(;aUons
isiJl Ptov,ao<:J for c,no item of cu�-us,rrg � ol s ngre-cx,lo dov'ieoJ IOI p,ot.o,;t,on 0t
OQ!llil)'TlOl'lt $WilCh ng ,n no QOnduc:lots on!)'
� PrtMded flX more than one !tom of curont- Cotrecl oonnection 01acc:es:sones: and �
lJ'Sfng equtpmonl
"- 01·ullC:Ol"'l'O'lagO p,ococtwo Clcrrcos
Acldtuonal protection: SeloCllal ol oq1.apmonl and proledl� memuimi
[Z) Pmsonco of ros.\du:al C<ATent r:fev,COS{5) apptopna1e ro extornal lnfluor>00s
� P� Of ,supploriionlary bonditrg· (:(Jndudot$ $dod,o;\ ol approprta!O krndional sw-lOl'ling dCIV>OOS

4-Jan-2-012
NOTES:
to indlcate an ins,peclioc, h3s been carried out and the result Is sa�sfacto,y
NIA to indicate th.111 1h11lnspoc:tion is not applicable to a particular item
An 8f11ry must be rnade in IMIIY box.
1. SELV AA GXtr.1-<IOw VOllllgO syswmWhtdl is Oloctricallf
scpatalOd from Ea11n at1e1from othor s)'Sloms. Tho
- Non<oncluaiog IOeal!Otll •not •l)plicablo rn domOSllc promisos
arid toQuiMg spoei p,oeauliOI\$ (soo Rogu!alloo 418.1)
parfiCul8r roquiNIWll'lts or lbo Rogv'aiJol\$ must tio e. EaM<f-oo IOc:al oq..,;polOl'll!al 1Jood1r,g •l'IOI IOll)li(;ablo In
r:IIOCkod (SOOSOCl.«I 414) Clomoslic p,omi:SOS, orly I.ISOd III Spacial C!tCumst.lncos (sao
2. Molllocl of basrc l)(Ol.odion •wiu illCluOo mtaWtOmom ol Ragu'aliOn 41&2)
41Stano8$ woo,'O - � 7. Eloo\lleal SO!)alabon hvo Socliot1 0 3 a!'ld Rogula1#! 418.3)
J. Ol:liStadDs •only OC!Gp1)Jd 11'1s;,oe,a' OICUtrl$Ul'ICO$ ($CIO
Rogulal!on!s 417.1 encl 417.2)

1158
4. Ptaor,g oYI ol road! •0i\Jy adop(OCI in Spocrlll Page .3 of .A
«c:um$taRcos, (-Rog�bot"IS-417.1 al'ld 417.3)

On-Site Guide
c The lnstirution of 8'1gineering and Technofogy
 T Figure G4.1(1v) Generic schedule of test results - Electrical Installation Certificate - page 4

Form 4 Form No: . Y . I : l ../4

GENERIC SCHEDULE OF TEST RESULTS
'""iis,;i".,..nc, no £YI o.talls of c!rcuits and/or installed equipment vulnerable to damage when Debils of lest n s - used (st118 HNI and/or ....i numbers)
Location - =Jund<nta"') tntlng .SEL'llligbl.s_insl.alleru,n.cin::uil.16 ______________________________ COOl!Ul'f ................... !'.o. 116311475 .........................

el-
Z H I DB (0) .9.JJ . ..........................
, .............. lnuation res_stari<:e Ser No 11 ---
,.. at 08 (kA) .J..9.2 . ....... .................. Earth ta.-t loop lmpecance s.,. r<o. 116Ji47S
Corrac:t supply powtty con!lnned fil, ............................. .................. RCO ......... !kr,,No.. 116lll475 .......

-
··--·····-·····-··-·-····-··· Earth
-
. ... resislana, 1'!"··-···-- ·--·····-··-·-·····-··--·····-·····-·
Ph&M uoutnet conffrmtd.......,. • • - I l l m..
I Tntrnults
Tested by:
N•. . (Coplt.ls) C L I V E J E N K I N
C,..J.iJ.e.j.-- -- ·· ••
I
Ringinal Co,auy RCO
Si9nahn •••.• 011, .!l.-:J1UJ,:i0.LL c..o.ilccnilluity (OJ Retil:at<o z. Re,r,w

-
(R,•R,l (0) (oontnJe on a sep;wa1e sheet ii
Clrwldmlls (0) <rib (MO)
,__ (ms)
- Owra,m,nt deYa Conduc1Drdelai$
---1 i--
- -- -
lj1 ,.i i
I I

g fl il i II ! ij
- /;

. .•
E
z f
'E
a Cirrul llescrqux1
i
.f

. :. t J
!!!. UJ

8l I!!.
;,- I! <U ::,!<'
e. .l.: t
::,
" ..
.?
<Il <Ill J"
.
' ' .,
,;;
' I c n n
1 Ring - sockets shop area 60898 B 32 6 C 2.5 1.5 0.6 0.6 0.97 038 NJA
.2'.11
; :,-.wi 0.57 56 142 RCD I
-
s'76 6 +t29
2 IRadial - Water heater 60898 B 16 6 C 2.5 1.5 NIA NIA NIA 0 2 0.4L.:_ RCDI
-.- -
11
. - •-2.5
60898 C 1.5 NIA NIA NIA 029

.
i-:---,
3 Radial - Burglar alarm +• rt-299o.49 • RCDI
4 Ra&al • : t i « h b WCICOllllll!tt Mid t . c k ou898 B 16 6 C 2.5 1.5 NIA NIA NIA 0.59 NIAJ+""'"'"""I { 0.78 48 19.9 RCD2
Fire al.um _ 60898 B 16 6 C 2.5 1.5 NIA NIA NIA 033 NIA +iwr_:,,,,. 0.53 • RCD2
R_adial
6 Lights - internal, cxtcmal sign 60898 B 6 6 C 1.s-· J.O NIA N/A NM. 0.51 . 299{0.71 • -.- RCD-2
171span:
Spare

'Whlnhnnnoap.n-t1amgl'Nlma.itlhis..,.isal!ohe(R1•fb)dN<mit

"'-
NOTE: One schedule of test results will be issued for every consumer unit or distribution board Page .4. of .4.

Ill C')
::g Appendix IG
=a G4.2 Electrical Installation Certificate - Completion
:;a Notes:

:a
1. The Electrical Installation Certificate is to be used only for the initial certification of a
new Installation or for an addition or alteration to an existing installation where new
drcuits have been introduced.
:;B It is not to be used for a Periodic Inspection, for which an Electric-al Inspection
Condition Report form should be used.
For an addition or alteration which does not extend to the intiroduct'ion of new
drouits, a Minor Electrical lnstaHation Works Certificate may be used.
The o riginal8 Certificate is to be given to the person ordering the work CRegulation
11

632.1). A duplicate should be retained by the contractor.

2. This Certificate is only vaHd if accompanied by the Schedule of Inspections and the
Schedule(s) of Test Results.
3. The signatures appended are those of the persons authorized by the companies
executing the work of design, construction, inspection and testing respectively. A
signatory authorized to certify more than one category of work should sign in each
of the appropriate places.
4. The time interval recommended before the first periodic inspection must be inserted
:a (see IET Guidance Note 3 for guidance).
S. The page numbers for each of the Schedules of Test Results should be indicated,
together with the total number of sheets involved.
6. The maximum prospective value of fault current (lpf) recorded should be the greater

=a of either the prospective value of short-circuit current or the prospective value of

earth fault current.
7. The pr,oposed date for the next inspection should take into consideration the
frequency and quality of maintenance that the installation can reasonably be
expected to receive during its intended life, and the period should be agreed
between the designer, installer and other relevant parties.

=9 G4.J Electrical Installation Certificate - Guidanee for

"' nts
_c1p1e
re·· __
(lo be appended to the Certificate)

This safety Certificate has been issued to confirm that the electrical installation work to
which it relates has been designed, constructed, inspected and tested in accordance
with British Standard 7671 (the IET Wiring Regulations).
You shoul.d have rece ived an ''original" Certificate and the contractor should have
retained a duplicate. If you were the person ordering the work, but not the owner of the
=9 installation, you should pass this Certifica.te, or a full copy of it induding the schedules,
immediately to the owner.
:;a The original" Certificate should be retained in a safe place and be shown to any person
11

inspecting or undertaking further work on the electrical installation in the future. If you
==3 later vacate the property, this Certificate wil'I demonstrate to the new owner that the
electrical installation complied with the requirements of British Standard 7671 at the

On-Site Guide
e T h e Institution o f Engineering and Tedlnorogy
I ''°
::g Appendix I G
=a time the Certificate was issued. The Construction (Design and Management) Regulations
require that, for a project covered by those Regulations, a copy of this Certificate, together
:;a with schedules, is included in the project health and safety documentation.

:a For safety reasons, the electrica'I installation will need to be inspected at appropriate
intervals by a oompetent person. The maximum time interval recommended before the
next inspection is stated on Page 1 under "NEXT INSPECTION".
:;B This Certificate is intended to be issued only for a new electrical installation or for new
work associated with an addition or alteration to an existing installation. It should not
have been issued for the inspection of an existing electrical installation. An NElectrical
Installation Condition Report" should be issued for such an inspection.

G4.4 Schedule of Test Results

Notes to the tests and obseivations required when completing the Schedule of Test
Results:
► Measurement of Zs at this distribution board to be recorded
Measurement of lpf at this distribution board to be recorded
► Confirm correct polarity of supply to this distribution board by the use of

:a approved test instrument

► Confirmation of phase sequenoe for multi-phase installations
► Identify circuits with equipment which could be damaged if connected when
tests are carried ,out, e.g . SELV transformers, dimming equipment.

=a The following tests., where relevant, must be carried out in. the given sequence
(see also 10.2.):

A - Installation isolated from the supply

1 Continui ty
Radial conduct.ors
=9 Continuity of pr,otedive condudors, including main and supplementary
bonding
Every protective conductor, induding main and supplementary bonding conductors,
should be tested to verify that it is continuous and correctly connected.
Test method 1
Where test method l is used, enter the measured resistance of the line conductor
plus the circuit protective conductor (R l + R2). See 10.3.1. During the continuity
testing (test method 1) the following polarity checks shoutd be carried out:
=9 I overcurrent devices and single-pole controls are in the line oonductor,
l except for E14 and E27 lampholders to BS EN 60238, centre contact saew
:;a lampholders have the outer threaded contact connected to the neutral, and
3 socket-outlet polarities are oorrect.
==3 Compliance for each drruit is indicated by a tick in polarity column 17.
(R1 + Ri) need not be recorded if R2 is recorded in column 14.

On-Site Guide 1161

e The Institution of Engineering and Tedlnorogy
::g Appendix I G
=a Test method 2
Where test method 2 is used, the maximum value of R2 is recorded in column 14.
:;a Ring final circuit continuity

:a Each conductor of the ring fina'I circuit must be tested for continuity, ,including
spurs. An exception is permitted where the cpc is formed by, e.,g. metallic conduit
or trunking and is not in the form of a ring. N/A can be recorded here but continuity
:;B of the cpc wiU be confirrned in either column 13 or 14.
2 Insulation resistance
All voltage sensitive devices to be disconnected or test between live conductors
(line and neutral) connected together and earth.
The insulation resistance between live conductors (Une-to-Hne and line-to-neutral
for three-phase installations and line-to-neutral for single-phase installat;ons) is
inserted in column 15 and between Hve conductors and earth in column 16.
The minimum insulation resistance values are given in Table 10.3.3 of this Guide.
3 Polarity - by c.ontinuity method
A satisfactory polarity test may be indicated by a tick in column 17. Only in a

:a
Schedule of Test Results associated with an Electrical Installation Condition Report
is it acceptable to record incorrect polarity.

B - Installation energised

=a
4 Polarity ·of supply
The polarity of the supply at the distr·ibution board should be confirmed and
indlcated by ticking the box o n the Schedule of Test Results.
5 Earth fault loop impedance l s
This may be determined either by direct measurement at the furthest point of a live
circuit or by adding {R1 + R i ) of column 13 to Ze- Ze is determined by measurement
at the origin of the installation.
=9 Z s = Ze + (R1 + Ri)
Zs should not exceed the va'lues given in Appendix B.
6 Fundional testing
The operation of RCDs (including RCBOs) is tested by simulating a fault condition,
independent of any test facitity in the device; see Section 11.
When testing an RCD at lo.n, record the operating time in column 19.
Where RCDs rated at 30 mA or less are used to provi,de additional protection, the
=9 devices are also to be tested at 5I.6.n and the operating time recorded in column
20.
:;a Effectiveness of the test button must be confirmed and the result recorded in

==3 column 21.

On-Site Guide 1162

e The Institution of Engineering and Tedlnorogy
::g Appendix I G
=a 7 Switchgear
All switchgear and controlgear assemblies, controls, etc. must be operated to
:;a ensure that they are properly mounted, adjusted and installed.

:a 8 Earth eledrode 1resistance

The resistance of earth electrodes must be measured. For re'liability in service the
resistance of any earth electrode should be below 200 Q. Record the value on
:;B Form 1, 2 or 6, as appropriate.

G4..5 Minor Electrical Installation Works Certificate

Figure G4.5 shows an example of a completed Minor Electrical Installation Works
Certificate and Table G4.8 g i ves some notes on how to complete it.

:a

=a

=9

=9
:;a
==3

On-Site Guide 1 1 6 3
e The Institutionof EngineeringandTedlnorogy
 Appendix
T Figure G4.5 Minor Electrical 'lnstaUation Works Certificate - page l of 1

Form 5 Form No: .... YJ.:-../ 5

MINOR ELECTRICAL INSTALLATION
T
WORKS CERTIFICATE
(REQUIREMENTS FOR ELEC RICAL INSTALLATIONS• 6S 7671 llET WIRING REGULATIONSD
To be used only for mloor electrlu1 work which does not Include the provlslon of a new clrcurt

PART 1 :t>eKrlpUon of minor works

1. Oescrlptlon of lhe minor works A d d i t i o n o f t w o socket-outlets, kitchen o f dwelling,

2. Localloo!Adct,ess 1 L a t r i g g Rise, O l d t o w n
P•ost Code A:C30 2 B N
3. Date mrnor works completed 4-Jan-2012

4. Oet!ils ol dcparrure.s. �any.from BS 7671 :2008. amended 10 ••. lOU..... (data)

None

PART 2:lns1aua1lon detlllls

1. System earthing arran gement TN-C-S O TN-S D TT 621

2. Method of iautt protection A u t o m a t i c disconnection o f supply (ADS)

3. ProiecilYe device lor lhe modilled circuit Type .llS..EN. 6lQ09..'IYm. C Ratlng .......... i. A

Com.rneru on existslg instdation, lndlJdJng adeqLJaey ol earttw,g and bondhg arrangementS (see Regutatlon 132.16):
E a r t h leakage c i r c u i t • b r e a k e r ( E L C B ) w e d i n u t i l i t y a r t a o n older p a r t o f the i.n.)1.aJJation;
client advised t h a t E L C B m a y n o t p r o v i d e adequate protection and t o have periodic inspection
carried o u t o n installation.
E a r t h i n g and bonding arrangements generally satisfaclory.

PART 3:E.&$entla! Teets

E8.11h contirMJity sa1isfactory !lli
lnsulalloo resistance:
line/neLltral .._ ...................... :tm..m
Une/earlh .............................. ±l92 . Mn
NeutraVeallh .......................... :t:-Z?.'.?. .. MO

Earth 1aull loop impedance .................................... 106 .. n

Polarity satisfactory iiZJ

RCD operation (ii applieal>le). Rated reSidua! operating ou!'l'erit 1...... 3-0. mA and operating time 01 ... l.9..rns (al l,,J

PART 4:0eclaratlon

Wle CERTIFY lllal tl'I& $aid WOrks dO riot impair ttie sa!ety ol ll'le e:itislwig insta!lati011, t!'lat ttie said works have bee11
designoo, ocms1ructed. i n � e d and tested in acxoidance wilh 8S 7671 :2008 (IET W1rillg RegulatiOns). amended to
2011 ........ {date) and lhat the said works, to the best of my/our knov.tedge aod beief. at the lime ol myfour inspection,
oomolied wih BS 7671 exoecl as detaied in Part 1 above.

Name· ... m ................. Cllve J e n k i n ...................... .. SignalUre; .............. .J.. ............

..
For and on behall ot !S[ - . .................... Position· ................ D i r e c t o r .................................. .

AddJess: ................... iz. Ybinl« 1u..CJ. ........ .

Oldtowo
Date :....... 4.MZ:QU .......................................... .
.•. ......... ... ........ ............................... Post cooe.A.C3.Q.8CD

Page 1 of 1

c The lnstirution
On-Site Guide
of 8'1gineering and Technofogy
1164
::g Appendix IG
=a G4.6 Minor Elecbical Installation Works Certificate -
Scope of application
:;a
Notes:
:a 1. The Minor Works Certificate is intended to be used for additions and alterations
to an installation that do not extend to the provision of a new circuit. Examples
:;B indude the addition of socket-oudets or lighting points to an existing circuit, the
relocation of a light switch etc (see G2.2).
2. This Certificate may also be used for the replacement of equipment such as
accessories or luminaires, but not for the repiacement of distribution boards or
similar items. Appropriate inspection and testing, however, should always be carried
out irrespective of the extent of the work undertaken.
G4.7 Minor Electrical Installation Works Certificate -
Guidanee for redpients
(to be appended t.o the Certificate)
This Certificate has been issued to confirm that the electrical installation work to which it
relates has been designed, constructed, inspected and tested in accordance with British

:a Standard 7671 (the IET Wiring Regulat·ions).

You should have received an 11original" Certificate and the contractor should have
retained a duplicate. If you were the person ordering the work, but not the owner of
the instaUation, you should pass this Certificate, or a copy of it, to the owner. A separate

=a Certificate should have been received for each existing circuit on which minor works
have been carried out. This Certificate is not appropriate if you requested the contractor
to undertake more extensive installation work, for which you should have received an
!Electrical Installation Certificate.
The Certificate should be retained in a safe place and be shown to any person inspecting
or undertaking further work on the electrical installation in the future. If you later vacate
the property, this Certificate will demonstrate to the new owner that the minor electrical
=9 installation work carried out complied with the requirements of British Standard 7671 at
the time the Certificate was issued.

=9
:;a
==3

On-Site Guide 1 1 6 5
e The Institutionof EngineeringandTedlnorogy
::g Appendix IG
=a G4..8 Notes on completion of the .Minor Electrical
Installation Works Certificate
:;a
:a T Table G4.8 Description of the area,s to be completed
Description of minor works Information t o record
:;B 1,l The work to which the certificate applies must be so
described that the work can be readily identified.
4 No departures are to be expected except in most
unusual drcumstances. See Regulations 120.3 and
133.5.
Part 2 - Installation details --
2 lhe method of fault protection must be dearly
identified e.g. automatic disconnection of supply
(ADS).
comments on existing The installer responsible for the new work should
installation record on the Minor Electrical Installation Works
Certificate any defects found, so far as is reasonably
:a practicable, in the existing installation. The defects
recorded should not affect the safety of the
installation work to which the oertfficate applies.
Part J - Essential tests lhe relevant provisions of Part 6 (Inspection and
Testing) of as 7671 must be applied in full to all
=a minor works. For example, where a socket-outlet is
added to an existing drcuit it is necessary to:
i) establish that the earth socket-tube of the socket-
outlet is connected to the main earthing terminal
ii) measure the insulation resistance of the drcuit
that has been added to and establish that it
complies with Table 61 of as 7671
=9 iii) measure the earth fault loop impedance
to establish that the maximum permitted
disconnection time is not exceeded
iv) check that the polarity of the socket-outlet is
correct
v) (If the work is protected by an RCD) verify the
effectiveness of the RCD.
Part 4 - Declaration
=9 Raplatlon 651 A 1he Certificate must be made out and signed

:;a
by a competent person in respect of the design,
construction, inspection and testing of the work.

==3

On-Site Guide
e The Institutionof EngineeringandTedlnorogy
1166
::g Appendix I G
=a T Table G4.8 continued

:;a Description of minor works Information to recard

The competent person will have a sound knowledge
:a and experience relevant to the nature of the work
undertaken and to the technical standards set down
in BS 7671, be fully versed in the inspection and
:;B testing procedures contained in the Regulations and
emp'loy adequate testing equipment
When making out and signing a form on behalf of a
company or other business entity, individuals must
state for whom they are acting.

G4.9 Electrical Installation Condition Report (EICR)

Installations may be divided into t w o types:
► Domestic and similar installations with up to 100 A single- or three-phase
supply
► Installations with a supply greater than 100 A.

:a However, this Guide will only consider the Electrical Installation Condition Report for
Domestic and similar installations with up to 100 A supply. For installations with a supply
greater than 100 A, see 11ET Guidance Note 3.
For domestic and similar installations with up to l 0 0 A supply, the inspector will be
=a required to complete a minimum of five pages of information for an EICR.
An Electrical Installation Condition Report (:Form 6) is to be issued for all
inspected installations.

Figures G4.9 (i)-(v) show a typical completed Electrical Installation Condition Report
comprising Forms 6, 7 and 4. The insta\lat'ion is some 20 years old and has no RCD
fitted.
=9

=9
:;a
==3

On-Site Guide 1 1 6 7
e The Institutionof EngineeringandTedlnorogy
 Appendix
T Figure G4.9(1) Electrical Installation Condition Report- page 1

Form6 Form No: S I T ::2. .. ./6

ELECT1RICAL INSTALLATION CONDITION REPORT

SECTION A. DElAI.S OF THE a.JENT/ PERSOH ORDERt:NG.THE REPORT

Name ··--J. Grass.moor'"···-·--·-·····---·--··---·-······--·--·······-·---·-·-·-·····----·····-----····---·--···---·-·····-·---······
Adcfress ·-�� Derwent Water
· - · - ....... l . l ! : > . » . i � L . - - - - - - - - - - - ....._ ....... - ...... _ _ _ _ _ _ ···· P051 Code; A C J C f 3 E R

SECTION B. REASON FOR PROOUCING THIS REPORT Qi (-!!.tg ..

��.�!!!_ipg_��!L._.__ ·_··-·-·---··-·-·--·-·--
·--·-···-· Known rodenl infestation, s u � l e d cable � e . i n loft w-ca. __ ·-···----·-·····---·-·······--·-·····----······
s on whth and was carried out ····--·······--·-········--···--·····--·-·-·····-·--·--·-·-·---··-·-·--·-··-·-·-----·-·-·
SECTlON C. DElAII.S OF THE INSTALLA:T10N WKIQH IS THE SUBJECT Of TIIIS REPORT
OcaJpler _ J .. Grassmoor ---·····-··----··-···--··-···-··-····-·---·····--·--·-··----·-····----···-·---·····-·---······
Adcfress · - 43 Derwent. W a t e r · - · - - - - - · · · · · · · · - - - · · - - - · · · - - · - - · · · · · · - - - - - · - - - -
·-·····. ····Ho.ni.Mer······-·------·-···---···--- ........._.•.•_..••.•_ _ _ _ _ _ _ _._..•..•.. P051 CQM; A C IO 3 E R
� 0 1 1 al premilles (lick as appropriate)
� O lnmls:iial D OljJer (illdude brie! desaip:ion) 0 ····--·----
:ijl Canmen:ial
Es!ina!ed age al Ming $}'Siem ........ .20:yeais
Evideooe d llddlicns /ar.eralions Yes liZI
No D Kol a.JJ9arffil O If )'e$, �1imate age .......... i L
mb'la:ion reconlnvaiable? u1a:ion 621.1 Yes � @ ' Da'.e of wt· eclion ..�. M Q W IL ...... d s e

::• =
SECTJON D. EXTEHT AND UHTATIOHS OF INSPECTION�DTESTIHG
Exfel1I d Ille e!edlical ilst.alatim covered� ll1is report
Visual i n ¥ c l i o n . t o disuibuto.s tlqwpment and electric mcter�inspcction and test o f consumer unit and
..fimiJ..!;.ii.t . -·ir·----illn-;;i=·----J""fniteC:fU"·,,.......__,.-----···
�d .
lirllt.l�ll$ i'l(l):jing the rea:scns � Reg1'a,O,, 63'.21 ...P ....��.!!!�.·--··tv..��;P.,�!..... -.!L._. __�!t!?.�_1¥.!1_�.P.!__._._._.
--·--·-·-·-···--·-·-·-··-····-·-·····----·-··---·-·······-···-·····allPllanqt:a,. __._._...... __.__._.... ___._.... _____.... ____ .......___ .... .

-- ---
ihe Jea$:!IIS(se& page no.•____) - ����--·······---···-·--·--··--·-·-·-·----·-·-·----·-·-·-----·-·-·
.. -·-·-·-..... ..,-,-·--·--·-·-··--------·-·------
The inspectian 1111dtemg detailed In lhb repart and a � r r y i n g sdiedUles 11.1w been carried ou\ In acaxdance wi:11 SS 7671: 200B (JET
Wiring � U o n s ) as amended 10 .i(U l . ............................ -·
I. mJ1d be oo'.ed ihal � c:o11tealied'IWNn Mki1Q n l cmliirs, lndef ffocn. in roof spaces. and generaly "'tti'n lhe labric or tile buiklrg or
in:lergroold.J!.rte not beM1 tJspee'Jld mess s p e d � agreedbe!',,-, ihe e l m and � _ p r i o r co lhe fnspecilon.
SECTION E. SUMMARY OF TliECONDfTIO.N OF TllEUISTAl.LA�N
General oondiioo cl tie in.stalalbrl f11 !ec111$at etedlica1 Mlety) . b l e d�.8�.�x��!l.!}.!'}_�!'!.L.���.i� condition
..Q.[lh.<=�im.t�UQnj5.g�ra.]Jy_,gwd,Lid.tlm.ugh_s.Q,m��lgJl_�.J2f.Y.t'..w..ru1.d.tw:,... _ _ _ _ _ •.•.•- - ..-·-··
- • • - • • • • • - • • - - • • • • • • • - - • • • • • u • - - • • - • u • - - - • • " • - - - - • • • • • • • - - • u .. • • • - - • - - - - • - . , • - - - - - - • - - - - • • • - • • - - • • • - • • - - - - -
O\reral asse.ssmernd. Ille ilmla:ion in lams of i::. stilatiiy for m r w d use
SM+ef+\GTeRlf-,UNISATISFA CTORY'· (Oelele as 11pjl!Qpria:e)
'An u n � imessment i'dicl:es 1hat dlln aide Cl ard'or n:us code C2 oondaiDns ha'o'e been id�Jed.
SECTJON F. RECOMMENDATIONS
Where lhe overal assessmen.tof he suilabli:y of 1fle in�llalial for allUIUed use above is st.aled a UNSATISFACTORY, Ifwe recomme(KJ !hat
anyoi:lseMltion5 dassife:las 'Dallger,creseo!"(oodeC1)0l'Pole�dangerous·(oode C2) are llct.ed upon as a malterof wgency.
kl'.ellga:lon," ' � delay is reoarnmendedbr obseMllioos lden!oed as 'flxihef� teql.'ffd'.
Obserr.tlons classiled as 1inproi"'1111ld� t d t l d ' (code C3) sooud be gilien me c:onsldera�on.
&AJied btler,eressaiyrenedaaalO!!_belng laken, l l'Ml!ECX)lllllelldlhatll'e!_ll$131a!lonis l\rthef.llsPeded ancltestedbyJan.�20.t:i._.(da!e
SECTION G.. DECLAAAT10N
Wi1, being thl persOll(1) rnponslble for till Inspection and tnlfng ol the elecu:Jcirl ln�l11lon ( u Indicated by my/our llgnaturu
bllow)i. partlallar1 ol-..Nlch are described above, having enn:lsed iusonable 111111 a n d � WhNI cllT)'fng aut the l n � n and
tes11ng, hereby decla.l't lhll the lnfol'fflltlon In !his report, lncfud ng the obseM1lons 111.dthe ltlached schedules, provides ai 1CC1.1rat1
nsessment ol lhe condldon of the eltetrical lnstallldon takln Into aoco11n1 the staled exlem and llmlJat!ons In section D oClhhl re

SEtTION tt. SCHEOVLE{S)

•.•...1..... $d'leid,Je($J o f � aflCI J .. -Sdledtt,e(S)o f � i$$UI:$ : n at:adled.
The atliKhed � · $ are of lliis dOC..merit .-Id �s ..men the M alfactied l0 l

Page 1 of .5.

On-Site Guide I 168

c The lnstirution of 8'1gineering and Technofogy
 Appendix IG
T Figure G4.9(11) Electrical lnsta'llation Condition Report - page 2

Form 6 Form No: S.IT..-l . 16 .

SECTION L SUPPLY CHARACTERISTICS AKO EARTHING AR.AANGEMBffS

TN.C
Earthing

O
Nu mber and Type of l.lve

a!.C.liiia cLc. 0
Nature of S11Pply Parameters
_ 1 r n 1 9 m ts -t--- ---=. - Cond u d o r s - - = ----+-- - - - - - - - - ..,.....- -----<> - -- - ....--..,..,..,.------ - --t
NomlnalYO!age,U/U-.'J _____ , A - V
I
SUpply F'rotedlft Otvlce

8S(ENJH:S W l . -•--·
TN-S O 1-phase, 2•'1\ft il° 2-wtre O Nomna1 tequency. f'I -·-----·-.!:i9_ Hz. T n_ _ _ _
__. . .
TTTN.C-S " 1-pllase, l - m □□· 3-w.ireDo PIOspedwe !all\ oimo1. l f l ___ JA_ M.
0 2 pl'8se. 3"llire · Otl'ler ·
E.t.emal bop - - Ze.,, ....Q 1 -n Raled culrelll _____JML.A

I
IT O 3 phase. 3-wtre D No'.e: ( 1) by enQJily
3ohase 4-wire O (2) byerqiiryorbyme.awemenl
Con."rma!icn ol < 1 1 n t ' f v Mll>IL'V VJ
(as
_Other 5JlllJlteS ol '1.l!l)ly delded on $Ched1Je) 0
SECTION J; PART IC\11:..ARS OF INSTAI..LAllON REFERRED TO IN fflE REPORT
Mtant of earttilng OeUita of 1n,1a1Iat1on Ea:M EledrOdt (t<hilre-e, )
·Oislrib1.1l01'$ Tni,e ··- N IA ·-·-·-·-···--·-·-·----·-·-·-·· ..·-·-·-·-·· .·-·-·-·-·-··-·-·-·-·-··--·-·-···-·· ......._.___...._._.__........
ln$ 11$)n LC!CabOn N!.A...-·-·-·----·-·-·-·-·····-·-··-----·-··-·-· .· - - · - · - · ..· - - - - - - · · · - - ...- - . - - ......._. ___ .__

-
d9c:#0<1e D I Re!is'.ance m Earth ..... . N I A O
Main Protl'Cfl'n Conductors
11.a1er1a1 Capper,_ .. _..___. csa _,_ .. _ _ 1.6_._r,n2
,Mail pl'OiedMl t u d 1 g
aird'r:JC!Ors
MafWI Coppet...•·-··--·--- e a _......- ...10"·-
To inmmin<l w.m- serriee u f Tortnrrim """'service u Toincollinaohervice 0 I Tos s:eet
I
C<itine;oll)n,
n
veri.'ied f;6
-
Mtln Switch I SwitcM'use I Circuit,Bru I RCO
I.Oc:ation go.-•--·-·-·--- .......- ......... I C1.111'8ntrat:9 ---··.. --·-·-:·--·- A ' !! RCD mli11 .-witell
---·--·--·-·-·-···--·-·-·---···-·---·--···-·-.. Fuse I d bng or &eng ·23o
A Ra:ed t:eSi:11.ral Q.ltl9tlt (l y ,) ...... _..N/A.mA
SS(EN) .BS..548.6___ ,__ . __ ·-·--· ......- I Vobge ra- ng ·-··--.. -·-·-···-------·-· v R$:ed Cm$ <lef.r, - ..·-·· . ·--···-·-··----·---'/jj_A . 111' $
Nod"""- ' 2__........ ____.. . . . .... . Meastnd cpemrg time{al , , ··-···--·--J L . 111' $
SECTION K. OBScRVATlONS
Refe,mg ID 11:!e schelfl.lles al lnspedicn am leSI resuts. Mid st.tJjied to tie illtali:Jns Sfleci5ell al the E.dMI M d dlnsp&dion
and llt.s6n,Q Secti:111
,No rernedl!lil acib1 b reqlired
D
OOSE.R\IAnot,{S) FURTHER
INVESTIGATION
REQU;Rm
('(ES I NOi
I . DaffiaJ:r lo ea.hk ror !Jlonr.cimill LClr.No.7} In lo1'11.aind:uclon •1'.lhll!._arclni, ttldcnl 1 ._ .... CL... -.. ._. _No..... _.._.

2. D a lo ea.bit ror -drcall,tCir.t\o.6) In lott,,mododon ,-ts_l_bl_c_ _ _ _ ,_......c.L_,_,__ ____No, ___ _

·--···-c.3______
_ __
---•••••--••••,.--••••••••--••••,.••--•••u•u•--•••,.•••---••----------•
l'{Q,_._ - -

4. No.lddltiurlil prutectiol'I by RCI> rur t ulprncnt u"l'CI ouUIOGN--·-··-....····-----· . · - - - .. . -....._C3_ ....,_._ _,___.N.11.........--,

------·- ---·-·-·-----·-•·----·-"--------
.:.!'.St'.!!!!!!l .P.!llttt!Jcm
..
forJa_'!.,!l!!-)·.!11!!£ffi'WlliIn b a l l u , I J ! ! ! ! ' ; _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ ·--·· C J ... - - · · - j l ____ _

-----------------·-····---·-· ·--. ·-·----···-·-

Ole of t,e lollow.ng codes, as appo te, ha:5 been allocated lo e.adll a lhe dl5eM!ions l13de abow to idea to lte per5011(5) responstle
be mtallation 1he decree al IMtlentY lor remed"ml action. -
...9!- Pd.e112t,, erws • uruerit remedial IICti0l1-
C3- rec:ommended

Paae 2 of.$.

On-Site Guide I 169

e The Institution of Engineering and Tedlnorogy
 Appendix
Y Figure G.4 .9(iil) Electrical Installation Condition Report - page 3

Form 7 Form No: SY.r::Z ..../7

CONDITION REPORT INSPECTION SCHEDULE FOR
DOMESTIC AND SIMILAR PREMISES WITH UP TO 100 A SUPPLY

'"°' -
Note: This form is suitable for many types of smaller installation not exclusively domestic.

OUTCOMES !Acee • ] , pt-- SlattC1 11 '911191lt

Of C2
: Sl'a r e Cc3 1Nol ve,&d . r w
n,commMtHl(J :
ll.nitalbl; L N
OUTCOME
NIA

ITEM {1/# t!IM.

I
DESCRIPTION li1'lon .
NO CI.C2nC?O'Jdtd"'11sfl>tio
.ri s.ctiDfl II ofrtit Cc:VICtliotlRflllCl'(I ('( (JIH)

1.0 DISTRIBUTOR'S l SUPPILY INTAKE EQUIPMENT I

1.1 SM!o;Ci!tlleccnd INIV No
t..2 C'#ldilion of seivice ne,a,:1 No
1.3 Condilion or :aJs • Jit.-1.ct I No
1.4 Condilion al I m • Consuner No
1.5 CondiUan or melemg eqlipmenl I NO
1.6 Coocllion QI isoCa!or{..-"hefe IN IA No
2.0 PRfSENCE OF ADE0l:.IATEARRANGEMENTS F·OR OTHER SOURCES SUCH AS
MlCROGa{ERAlORS u- 561.7 NIA No

3.0 EARTHIHG I BONDING ARRANGEMENTS (411.3; Chap 5-1)

-
3.1 Presence allCI a:nditJ:111ol dis1ribtt.t:r"searthn;i arran.i-,eni (542.1.2.1; 542.1.2.2) Nn
3.2 Presence aRdcmdiliori al eal!h eCectnx1ec:xmecli:lrl 'M1e!e app(albie (542.1.2.3) A No_
3T PtfMslon di earthing I bomdlng labets al a i appropriate loca s (514.13} ./ Nn
3.4 c«i:imalon 01 emfhm s i z e 1542.3; 543.1. U J Mn
3.5 Aa:es$1lil!v m l COfdtion cl earlmo
3.6 OJn."mlaQOll 01 nain
3.7 Condilion ar.i lit)'
al MET (54J..J2)
bOll(jng Wlductor es (544.1)
of main pi'O(die bOll®'IO (543.3..?; 544.1.2} I
./

NO
-
3.8 A.ccffl,til!y am c:onlt'..ion,rJ all pro:adve boll,ing COM9Ctions [543.3.2} No
4.0 C<lNSUMER UNn(S) I OISTRIBUTION BOARD(SI
4.1 Ade"acy of workilg space/ il'Xe$Sibc.'Y ID consumer Lni I dis!Jillnon board --(132.12; 513.1)
' -
J N"
4 . 2 Sewity iii: misi (t34.1.11 I No
&-
4.3 Cond on O en;josu-e/:Sl in term,,ol IP r3ling el"C{416t) N"
4.4 Condr!ion or e,v:jowe(s) in ol etc ( 6.Sl Nn
4.5 Endosuffl l'llll dama,gecl(cfelma'llld so as 10 tnpair sa'ety (621.2r■)} N2-
4.6 Presence or i m i "1ked S'Mth (as retJJll"lld by S.!7. U ) II '"5-
4.7 Opera!lan al mail S'Mi:11 (flnciional chedc) (612.13
-1/ LNo
4 . 8 - Manual operation ol a m . i t Gld ROils kl prove diso:medi0n (612.1 J.21
4.9 Correa idri"'ICiS!ion d CWJil de:aJs s1d ?"olective de'li0es (514.8.1: 514.9.1)
./
I./ """'
Mn

4.10 Presence ot RC-0 (IUSl".erly le$! nooce at OI near o:nsi,mer l.l'lil I disiibwon bOeflJ (514. 12.2) lr No
4.11 Ptesenoe or noMiandatd (mb:ed) cable CCIOU' wan.ng,
dirnbc.rti)n bOanHS.1,.1 I
- notice, at 01 nell' Cl)l'l$llmer l.l'lhl No
4.12 Ptesenoe or a l w¥l'IIIQ t'ICi6::>eet 0t n e a r uni/ tio(Wd (514.15) N / A NO
4.13 Ptesence of ctherfl!tpnd I l l (plWe soecitt1{Seo:lcn 51 ) tNtA No
4.i4 Exama'Jon o f deYicJ,e(s)and base(s): cxmcttniund rating{noslgns di No
unac:ceir.able theonal darnMe At!'h! or f421.1.31
4.15 SilWJ&.poiepmc:tlvedM:!!IS lnlinll ClOl'ltlleloronl-/(132.14.1:530.3.2) I NO
4.t6 agaml medmlcal damage Y<he,re cables efller COO!!llmet unit I dlsillJutlan board
!522.8.1 • 522.8.11) No
4.17 agailst electronagnrJc 11,ects \ilfflll cables en:er CORSlffllif uli.: I ds!ribu'..1011board 'I No
endosures 1521.5.11
4.18 RCO(s) provided for lault protection-lrd!des RCBOs (411.4.9: 41 tS.2: 531.2) Lj No
4.19 RCO(s) prottided for illt:l::ional p!UeCiiion • lncbles RCBOs {411.3.3; 415.1) tG No

Page .3. of .5.

On-Site Guide I 170

c The lnstirutionof 8'1gineeringand Technofogy
 Appendix IG
T Figure G4.9(iv) Electrical Installation Condition Report- page 4

Form 7 Form No: Y.J'.-l ... n

--;;;COMES I : l lill
0ll'ldfiM
:S!.atoCt I
:«C2 - :sraruC3 INavlJlilw:NN ' l lur.1 INoiliPjlfcal:IV!l'tlA
I OUTCOME

,.,,,...,,
HOI
ITEMI _,,, -
(I.JM lllllMI abcMt. lt!Hl,MIII
Fwt!N,

I
DESCRIPTIOH
111' s«to, I( rl "'°
c1.ane:to«11111 10bt (YorNJ
llloMJ
5.0 FIHAl CIRCUITS
5.1 ldll!n::iflCffllll ol mndu:i:M (514.3.1) No
52 Cablm O'lffecil't" suppollil!d 11:roogh!M 1helr M (522-8.5} o
5.3 Coodtion ol llldB!loo at tve pa,ts (416.1)
- Nco-walhedcables by endowre in Olll1duJ. ell ornriffQ (521.10.1)
- i l°i
=-
1N/A
No
No -
• To i1cule 1he i/1',eoritv0/ COIW and l'IQ sv..';ems (rnet,91;; and plast;;) i"rj/A No
5.5 Adequacy ol c:ab1es for ll)i'l9 eapacify Mt! rega«i lcr the type and d
, 0
SI$ ISectiOci 523\
5.6 Cx,rdinaxo betNeen and overload devic:eS (•33.1; 533.2.11 No
5.7 Ad ol pro' (le',1(l$$: Mie ¥a:I wrren: for '3,jt (4, , .3) I NO
5.8 Presence m act«iuacy o1 circut p,otec'.ive concM:.Ors (411.S..1.1: 543..1) No
5.9 w..tng S)Om(s) llflprqxlate lcr 1h11type aid M'J.Jre ol ltie lnsralb!lon and eXlt:mal ir6lences
(Sl!C!ion 522) C1 • 0
5.10 Concealed cat.s installed rn prMalbed m m (see Sedlcxl D..&!Mt and li'IWaCillns)
1.5226.1011 l 0
5.11 Calcul!ld cables lncolpora'.r,g e:riit!d am,ur or shealti, « M 'NMil Ul1hed \lfring syslarn.
or Olherllise poled8d • i n s t meenaml dl e rrom nails,
D. & m d 11M hl'atM<I IS22.6.101; 522.6.100)
and the a (see Section r3 I 'o
5.12 PrcMs/on ot dib:Jnal p-olt!dion by RCD ndl exceeding 30 mA:
• foraUsockel-ou ets o!rdlg 20 Acrlnss provided f a 11Se llyordnary pm,onsudes:san
e:uiection Is oemil'td 1411.3.31 'C3 I 0
• for S!.Wf to motiile ent not ,e:x.OM!fftg 32 A raang for 1 $ aMoots (411..3.S.) M No
• lor cables oanreu:I In wab a ,DRll!w: (522.6.101; 52'2..6.1031 '.\ No
1-
13 Pwvisi0n of r.re lmMn, sea!J1g arrqiemea!s aoo lhemllll e1lecc (Sedion 527)
- ..No _
14 Santi I aitJ!es segega'.ed/sepanr'.edfrorn Band I cables(528.1) :"olo
5.15 segegB'.ed I separated mn c:orimuricetiol cabling (2 6.2)
5
No
5.16 cac. SBCnOll'..ed/ sepattled ftctn Cl!I ww:ies (S'28.3) ./ '1n
5.17 Ternm,Scn ol cabAl!s at e n - lniicate er.em ol Sfflping In Section O ol l!'le ffl110rl
{Sectit:>n 5261
• :sc.itldty ma4e ani, l.t'4er no e $ll'eitl [ 6l ,( i'iO
• No !,age lnwlation of a, o:rdJctor ..tsil:te OU'.slde 1516.8) NO
>-
I Comedians of tve mndllC!m adequa.ltty endosecl (521i.5) No
7 Acleq1111 conneded at polll ol emry ID endM!le (glnb, bushes etc.) (522.U} No -
5.18 Cood!ion ot accessories inclJdiJg, IIDdl.et-olA!eb:. S'M'.d1es and jainl baxes (621 l ( i ) ) ./ Nn
5.19 &litatililY ol a for ex!emal intueoces 1512..2) No_

&.tl OCATION{SJ CONTAINING A 8A.TI1 OR SH

6.1 Additional p,o:.ectiotlb'-all lowvol:age (LV)(.a'W.1$by RCO l _.-.g 30 mA(701.411.3.3) C 3
-, No
62 Whece IMd asa JX'd.!CIM!meaue, reqtRmefll:! lorSS..VorPSLV met{70U14.4.S} NIA No
6.3 Sltaver sodle1S ccq,ly wth 8S EN 61 2-5 loonerty BS 3S3S (701.512.3} NIA_ N'n
6.4 Presence al s-pplemenlaJy bonclng UIRSS ru. reql.hd by BS 76712008 ' 0
(701,415.2\
6,5 L.aww1tanel1!.11, 230,,.,1nsockeklutlel5slted m leasl3 m m zaie 1 llDl,512.3) 1-..itA 1'1"0
6.6 &iitatility ol prnent lor al ilMl1ce5 fer installed location in terms of IP ra:i!<J
(701,512.21 No
6.7 &iilablity ol prnent lor illmla. in a zcne {701,512.3) No
6..8 Sclitabililyo f = el!Uii:menl br IJilnicwr po5ilion n tlte laca:illn (701551 No
1i , OTHER PART 7 SPECIAL IINSTAI.LATIONS OR LOCATIOHS
7.1
No

Page .4. of .S.

On-Site Guide I 171

e The Institution of Engineering and Tedlnorogy
T Figure G4.9(v) Generic schedule of test results - Electrical Installation Condition Report - page 5

Form4 Form No: . TI. i.14

GENERIC SCHEDULE OF TEST RESULTS

"'oii;i.,.nu no CUI 0.talls of drcuil$ and/orl-tltdequipmtnt vulntrable todamallt whtn D t l a l $ o l 1 1 $ 1 � U$Od�$1rlalandlor-numbtr$)
...
lu1cbca book,- c..,t,mnl testing Dim.m.illg.<:QJiip�.D.t.ill.maiuJ®/li' . -- .........
Location .........._._................
.... �� ...... � - - ... -._·.· : � , : ....._...... _...... _...... _. ·.· ._..... _ ·.. _.·.

--=====··=··::··;:···:::·-:::::::::::===::·:·--:::
---·-=·::·
=====·::··::--·
Zs al DB (0} .....QJ.6 ------- ----- . - · - - - - - - - - - - - - - - · - · - ..... - ·-·.. .,-, •=-� ... .
I,, al DB (kA} ••• 1.4 . _....... _... __ --·---·--· .......... --------·-- .-................ _.........._ ....... ---................. Earti lil\At l o o p � �::":!!... ............................................ .

=::i;.-,
CanMtsupplypolarityconfirmed Ii"] ---------------------- RCD ........ 546 3·71?
. ::.
3_ _ _ _ _ _ _
� H<jlltn<e =finned (when aocroorlalal liil• Eaifl electroOe resistn»
•
1- -
- - - - - - - - - - - - T71st n, s ul!s� - � - - - - - - - - - - i
CLIVE JENKIN I
Slgnl!!Jra ... _. [, ,J ..-..... Datt 4-.J.an-2012....... drail� � ,::=.. f Z.
RCO
(cor«itue on a separate sheet r necessaiy)
Circul c1ta111 ;
(O) I (R•: > M
I OJ o. (Cl)
I (ms}
1-----------+--'°""?Jl"'Jlde',ioe---1..Conducw_de!ais,_. l..._� - - -+-- - - 'l- - - - '- -+-- - '- � - +- +-- - - - - - - - - ---1

CitCscl Desctipl,)n

,,
I Ring - sockets downstairs BS 3871 I 3 0 2 C 2.S I .S 0.48 0.48 0.79 10.31 N I A + & . +299 0.48 NIAN/A NIA
2 Ring . sockets upstairs �s mitt 'l;;-, 3:;;;-n
0 2- t -"c,;-,2�.5r t -'1.7S1u' ."33; t0' .'33
"; t0' .:;:-:tO
5 4 ' .:-::t-
22 N :-:/7IA
:: t+:-:; ,,,, ..:-:;
,,;;;;;!' ,._ � - -:--t.o, ."38;t;N
2;;#: " '/"rA-t,N:;;/;A.-t,N:c/;A.- t -- - - - - - - - - -1
3 Ring - kitchen and utility �� .,..,, I 30 2 C 2.5 I - ' 0.7 0.7 I.IS 0.4() NIA+,,,, -o-2� 0.62 NIAN/A NIA

fsz f
4 Lights - upstairs BS 3871 I 5 2 C 1.0 1.0 �'I.IA NIA NIA13.07 NIA +zY,;+29', 3.2A N/A,N/A NIA
3.96N/r�� l A N /A - - - - - - -
.,., " ' " ".,.,- , +
5Ughu-downswsandutili1y�S3871 I C - 1 . 0 ; 1.0 l''-IAN/AIN7Ar3.8 N / A f � 9 ' . / - - --i
6 Lights - garage �� 3871 I 5 2 C 1.0 1 1.0 N/A NIA N/Aj0.36 NIA + 2 � 2 � 0.S2 NIAN/A NIA
7 Shower (8 kW) �S ;is71 I I 40 2 C 6.0 I 2.S NIA N/A NIA'0.15 NJA;+2'N/"291 0.31 N/AINIA N/A
8 - L ,_ - ---L- . - - • .- -+--+-+-�---------l

NOTE: One schedule of test results will be issued for every consumer unit or distribution board Page .S. of .5.
C')
::g
=a
:;a Appendix
:a
:;B Standard circuit
arrangements for
household and similar
inst,allations

Hl lntrodudion
:a This appendix g;ves advice on standard circ-uit arrangements for household and similar
premises. The circuits provide guidance on the requirements of Chapter 43 for overload
protection and Section 537 of BS 7671 for isolation and switching. Reference must also

=a
be made to Section 7 and Table 7.1 (i) for cable csa, length and installation reference
method.
It is the responsibility of the designer and installer when adopting these circuit
arrangements to take the appropriate measures to comply with the requirements of
other chapters or sections which are relevan , such as Chapter 41 'Protection against
electric shock', Chapter 54 'Earthing arrangements and protective conductors' and
Chapter 52 'Selection and erection of wiring systems'.
=9 Circuit arrangements other than those detailed in this appendix are not precluded when
specified by a competent person, in accordance with the general requirements of
Regulation 314.3.

ta Final circuits using socket-outlets complying

with BS 1363-2 and fused connection units
complying with BS 1363-4
=9
H2.1 General
:;a In this arrangement, a ring or radial circuit, with spurs ,f any, feeds permanently connected
equipment and a number of socket-ourlets and fused connection units.
==3 The floor area served by the circuit is determined by the known or estimated load and
should not exceed the value given in Table H2.1.
On-Site Guide 1 1 7 3
e The Institutionof EngineeringandTedlnorogy
::g Appendix I H
=a 433.1.103 A single 30 A or 32 A ring circuit may serve a floor area of up to 100 m 2• Socket-
outlets for washing maohines, tumble dryers and dishwashers should be located so as
:;a to provide reasonable sharing of the load in each leg of the ring, or consideration should
be given to separate cirruits.
:a 553.1.7 The number of socket-outlets provided should be such that all equipment can be
supplied from an adjacent accessible socket-outlet, taking account of the length of flex
:;B normally fitted to portable appliances and luminaires.
Diversity betw een socket-outlets and pem,anentiy connected equipment has already
been taken into account in Table H2.1 and no furthe.r diversity should be applied, see
Appendix A of this Guide.

T Table H2 . I Final circuits using 85 1363 socket-outlets and connection units

Minimum Uve c:onductor
cross-sectional nrea• (mm2)
Overcurrent Copper conductor Copper Maximum
protective thennopla.mc or conductar floor area
device thermosetting mineral served
:a rating (A)
]
insulated cables insulated cables (ml)
6
Ring

=a A2.
A3
Radial
Radial
30 or32
20 2.5 1.5 50

• See Section 7 and Table 7.l (i) for the minimum csa for particular installation reference methods. It
is permitted to reduoe the values of conductor cross-sectional area for fused spt1rs.

Where two or more ring final circuits are installed, the socket-outlets and permanently
connected equipment to be served should be reasonably distributed among the circuits,
=9
H2.2 Circuit protedion
Table H2.1 is applicable for circuits protected by:
► fuses to BS 3036, 85 1361 and BS 88, and
circuit-breakers:
- Types 8 and C to BS EN 6 0 8 9 8 or BS EN 61009-1
- BS EN 60947-2
- Types l,. 2 and 3 to BS 387i1.
=9
:;a
==3

On-Site Guide 1174

c The lnstirution of 8'1gineering and Technofogy
::g Appendix I H
=a H2.3 Conductor size
:;a The minimum size of oonductor cross-sectional area in the circuit and in non-fused spurs
is given in Table H2.1, however, the actual size of cable is determined by the current-

:a carrying capacity for the partirular method of installation, after applying appropriate
rating factors from Appendix F, see Table 1.·1 (i).The as..installed current-carrying capacity
(IJ so cakulated must be not less than:
:;B 20 A for ring circuit A 1
► 30 A or 32 A for radial cirruit A2 (i.e. the rating of the overcurrent protective
device)
20 A for radia'I circuit A3 (i.e. the rating of the overcurrent protective device).
The conductor size for a fused spur is determined from the total current demand served
by that spur, which is limited to a maximum of 13 A.
Where a fused spur serves socket-outlets the minimum conductor size is:
► 1.5 mm 2 for cables with thermosetting or them,oplastic (PVC) insulated
cables, copper conductors
1 mm2 for mineral insulated cables, copper conductors.

:a The conductor size for circ,uits protected by BS 3036 fuses is determined by applying the
0.725 factor of Regulation 433.1.1 m,that is the rurrent-carrying capacity must be at least
27 A for circuits Al and A3, 41 A for circuit A2.

H2.4 Spun
=a The total number of fused spurs is unlimited but the number of non-fused spurs should
not exceed the total number of socket-out'lets and items of sta,tionary equipment
connected directly in the circuit.
In an A 1 ring final circuit and an A2. radial circuit of Table H2. l a non-fused spur should
feed only one s;ngle or one twin or multiple socket-outlet or one item of permanently
connected equipment. Such a spur should be connected to the circuit at the terminals
=9 of a socket-outlet or junction box or at the origin of the circuit in the distribution board.
A fused spur should be connected to the circuit through a fused connection unit, the
rating of the fuse in the unit not exceeding that of the cable forming the spur and, in any
event, not exceeding 13 A.

Hl.5 Permanently connected eq1uipment

Permanently connected equipment should be locaUy protected by a fuse complying with
BS 1362 of rating not exceeding 13 A or by a circuit-brea ke r of rating not exceeding 16 A
=9 and should be controlled by a switch, where needed (see Appendix J). A separate switch

:;a
is not required if the circuit-breaker is to be used as a switch.

==3

On-Site Guide 1 1 7 5
e The Institutionof EngineeringandTedlnorogy
::g Appendix
=a HJ Radial final circuits using 16 A socket-
:;a outl,ets complying with B5 EN 60309•.2 (B5
434])
:a HJ. I General
:;B Where a radial circuit feeds equipment the maximum demand of which, having allQV!led
for diversity, is known or estimated not to exceed the rating of the overourrent protective
device and in any event does not exceed 20 A, the number of socket-outlets is unlimited.

H3.2 Circuit protection

The overcurrent protective device should have a rating not exceeding 20 A.

H3.J Conductor size

The minimum size of conductor in the circuit is given in Tables H2.1 and 7.1 (i). Where
cables are grouped together the limitations of 7.2.1 and Appendix F apply.

H3.4 'lypes of socket-outlet

:a Socket-outlets should have a rated current of 16 A and be of the type appropriate
to the number of phases, circuit voltage and earthing arrangements. Socketwoutlets
incorporating pilot contacts are not included.

=a H4 Cooker circuits in household and simUar

pre111ises
The circuit supplies a control switch or a cooker unit complying with BS 4177, which may
incorpora,te a socket�outlet.

=9 The rating of the circuit is determined by the assessment of the current demand of the
cooking appliance(s), and cooker control unit socket-outlet if any, in accordance with
Table A 1 of Appendix A. A 30 or 32 A circuit is usuaHy appropriate for household or similar
cookers of rating up to, 15 kW.
A circuit of rating exceeding 15 A but not exceeding 50 A may supply two or more
cooking appliances where these are installed in one room. The control switch or cooker
control unit should be placed within 2 m of the appliance, but not direcdy above it.
Where two stationary cooking appliances are installed in one room, one switch may be
used to control both appliances provided that neither appliance is more than 2 m from
=9 the switch. Attention is drawn to the need to provide selective (discriminative) operation
of protecti,ve devices as stated in Regulation 536.2.
:;a
==3

On-Site Guide 1 1 7 6
e The Institutionof EngineeringandTedlnorogy
::g Appendix IH
=a HS Water and space heating
:;a Water heaters fitted to storage vessels in excess of 15 litres capacity, or permanently
connected heating appliances forming part of a comprehensive space heating instal'lation,
:a should be suppHed by their own separate circuit.
Immersion heaters should be supplied through a switched cord-outlet connection unit
:;B complying with BS 1363-4.

H& Height o f switches, socket-outlets and

controls
The Building Regulations of Eng1and and Wales and of Scodand require switches and
socket-outlets in new dwellings to be installed so that all persons including those whose
553.1.6 reach is limited can easily use them. A wa:y of satisfying the requirement 1s to install
switches, socket outlets and controls throughout the dwelling in accessible positions at a
height of between 450 mm and 1200 mm from the finished floor level - see Figure H6.
Because of the sensitivity of drcuit-br,eakers, RCCBs and RCBOs fitted in consumer units,
consumer uni ts should be readily accessible.
:a (In areas subject to flooding, meters, cut-,outs and consumer units should preferably be
fixed above flood wa,ter level.)

=a T f i g u r e H 6 Height of switches, socket-ourlets, etc.

=9
entry door two-way
phone bell switch
maximum

1200mm
-- .. ·- -- minimum

=9 450mmf

:;a
tv aerial telepnone socket·
socket socket outlet

==3

On-Site Guide 1 1 7 7
e The Institutionof EngineeringandTedlnorogy
::g Appendix I H
=a H7 Number of socket-outlets
:;a 553.1.7 Sufficient socket-oudets are required to be installed so that all equipment likely to be used
can be supplied from a reasonably accessible socket-outlet, taking account of the length
:a of flexible cab'le normally fitted to portable appliances and lumina;res. Table H7 provides
guidance on the number of socket-outlets that are likely to meet this requirement.
:;B In Scotland, mandatory standard 4.6 requires that every building must be designed and
constrncted in such a way that electric lighting points and socket-outlets are prov ided
to ensure the health,. safety and convenience of occupants and visitors. The Building
Standards Division of the Scottish Government make recommendations for the number
of socket-outlets that should be installed in a domestic premises in section 4.6.4 of the
domestic technica'I handbook as follows:
kitchen - 6 (at least 3 above worktop height)
► other habitable rooms - 4
► plus at least 4 more throughout the property including at least one per
circulation area per storey.
The socket-oudets may be either single or double.

:a Y Table H 7 Minimum number of twin socket-outlets to be provided in homes

Room type Smaller rooms Medium rooms Larger rooms

(up to 12 m1) (12-25 m1) (more than 25 m1)

=a Main living room 4 6 8

(note 4}
Dining room 3 4 5 I
Single bedroom 2 3 4
(note 3)
Double bed room 3 4 5
=9 (note 3)
Bedsitting room 4 5 6
(note 6)
Study 4 5 6
Utility room 3 4 5
Kitchen (note 1) 6 8 10
Garage (note 2) 2 3 4

=9 Conservato ry 3 4 5
Hallway 1 2 3
:;a Loft 1 2 3
Location co ntaining a note 5
==3 bath or sho wer

On-Site Guide 1 1 7 8
c The lnstirutionof 8'1gineering and Technofogy
::g Appendix I H
=a Notes to Table H7:

:;a
I KffCHEN - If a socket-outlet is provided in tl,e cooker control unit, this should not be
induded in the 6 rec-0mmended in the table above.
Appliances built into kitcnen furniture (integrated appliances) should be connected
:a to a1 socket-outlet or switch fused connection unit that is accessible when the
appliance is in place and in normal use. Alternatively, where an appliance is supplied
:;B from a socket outlet or a connection unit. this should be controlled by an accessible
double-pole switch or switched fused connection unit.
It is recommende.d tha,t waH mounted socket outlets above a work surface are
spaced at not more than 1 m intervals along the surface.
2 GARAGE - The number of socket outlets specified allows for the use of a battery
charger, tools, portable light and garden appliances.
J BEDROOM - It is envisaged that this room will be used in different ways in different
households. It may be used simply as a child's bedroom requiring socket-outlets
for table lamps, an electric blanket and an electric heater only; or it may serve as a
teenager's bedroom and living room combined, where friends are entertained. In
this case, socket-outlets may be needed for computers (printers, sc-anners, speakers,
etc.), games consoles, MP3/4 players, mobite phone chargers, DVD players, digital
receivers, home entertainment systems (amplifier, CD player), haird r y er, televis;on
:a 4
and radio, in addition to lamps, an electric blanket and electric heater.
HOME ENTERTAINMENT - In addition to the number of socket-outlets shown in the
tab1le it is recommended that at least two further double socket-outlets are installed
in home entertainment areas.

=a
5 LOCATIONS CONTAINING A BATH O R SHOWER - Except for SELV socketwoutlets
complying with Section 414 and shaver supply units complying with BS EN 61558-
2 5, socket ou ets are prohibited within a distance of 3 m horizontally from the
boundary of zone l.
6 BEDSITTING ROOM - Rooms specifically designed or envisaged to be used as
student bedsitting rooms should be provided with additional socket outlets which
may be needed since persons using these rooms wiU often introduce other portable
=9 appliances in addition to items already mentioned in Note 3. In such situations a
lack of sufficient socket-outlets is an additional danger and therefore the minimum
number of twin out1ets should be increased to four.

=9
:;a
==3

On-Site Guide 1 1 7 9
e The Institutionof Engineeringand Tedlnorogy
::g
=a
:;a
:a
:;B

:a

=a

=9

=9
:;a
==3

On-Site Guide
e The Institutionof EngineeringandTedlnorogy
1180
::g
=a
:;a Appendix
:a
:;B Resistanc:e of copper
and aluminium
conductors

434.S.2 To check compliance with Regulation 434.5.2 and/or Regulation 543.1.3, i.e. to
543.1.3 evaluate the equation 52 = 12.t/k2, it is nec-essary to establish the impedances of the
cirouit conductors to determine the fault current I and hence the protective device

:a disconnection time t.
Fault current I = Uo/Zs
where:

=a U0 is the nominal voltage to earth

Zs is the earth fault loop impedance
and
Zs=.Ze + (R 1 + R2)
where.:

=9 Ze is that part of the earth fault loop impedance external to the circuit concerned
R1 is the resistance of the Hne conductor from the origin of the circuit to the
point of utilization
R2 is the resistance of the protective conductor from the origin of the circuit to
the point of utilization.
Similady, in order to design circuits for compHance with BS 7671 limiting values of earth
fault loop impedance given in Tab'les 41.2 to 41 A, it is necessary to establish the relevant
impedances of the circuit conductors concerned at their operating temperature.

=9 Table 11 gives values of (R, + R v per metre for various combinations of conductors up to
and induding 35 mm 2 cross-sectional area. It also gives values of resistance (milliohms)
:;a per metre for each si�e of conductor. These values are at 20 °C.

==3

On-Site Guide 1181

e The Institutionof EngineeringandTedlnorogy
::g Appendix II
=a T Table 11 Values of resistance/metre or (R, + Ri)/metre for copper and

:;a
aluminium conductors at 20 °C

Cross-sectional nren (mm2) Resistance/metre or (R1 + Rz),/metre

:a Line conductor Protective Copper

(mQ/m)
Aluminium
:;B 1
conductor
18.10
1 36.20
1.5 12.10
1.5 1 30.20
1.5 1.5 24.20
2.5 7.41
2.5 1 25.51
2.5 1.5 19.51
2.5 2.5 14.82
4 4.61
4 1.5 16.71

:a
4 2.5 12.02
4 4 9.22
6 3.08
6 2.5 10.49
6 4 7.69
6 6 6.16
10 1.83
10 4 6.44
10 6 4.91
10 10 3.66
16 1.15 1.91
=9 16
16
6
10
4.23
2.98
16 16 2.30 3.82
25 0.727 1.20
25 10 2.557
25 16 1.f177
25 25 1.454 2.40
35 0.524 0.87
35 16 l.674 2.78
35 25 1.251 2.07
35 35 1.048 1.74
:;a 50
50 25
0.387
1.114
0.64
1.84
==3 50
50
35
50
0.911
0.774
1.51
1.28

OnaSite Guide
e The Institution of Engineering and Tedlnorogy
1182
::g Appendix I 1
=a T Table 12 Ambient temperature multipliers to Table 11

:;a Expected ambient temperature (0C) Correction facto,.

:a
5 0.94
10 0.96

:;B 15
20
0.98
1.00

� 25 1.02
"' The correction factor is given by {1, + 0.004(ambient temp - 20 •c)}
� where 0.004 is the simplified resistance c-0efficient per 0c at 20 °c given by BS EN 60228 for
copper and aluminium conductors.
�
Verification
� For verification purposes the designer will need to give the values of the line and circuit
protective conductor resistances at fhe ambient temperature expected during the tests.
� This may be different from the reference temperature of 20 °C used for Table 11. The
rating factors in Table 12 may be applied to the values to take account of the ambient
:a temperarure (for test purposes only).

�
Multipli:ers for mnductor operating temperature
Table 13 gives the multipHers to be applied to the values given in Table 11 for the purpose
=a of calculating he resistance at maximum operating temperature of the line conductors
and/or circuit protective condu.ctors in order to determine compliance with, as applicable,
Table 41.2 the earth fault loop impedance of Table 41.2, 41.3 or 41.4 of BS 7671.
� Table 41.3
Table 41.4 Where it is known that the actual operating temperature under normal load is less than
� the maximum permissible value for the type of cable insulation concerned (as given in
the tables of current-carrying capacity) the multipliers given in Table 13 may be reduced
=9 accordingly.

=9
:;a
==3
�
On-Site Guide 1 1 8 3
�
e The Institutionof EngineeringandTedlnorogy
::g Appendix
=a T Table IS Multipliers to be applied to Table 11 to calculate conductor resistance at
maximum operating temperature (note 3) for standard devices (note 4)
:;a Conductor Conductor insuhrtion

:a installation

:;B
Not incorporated in a 1.04 1.04 1.04
cable and not bunched
�
(note 1)
Incorporated in a cable 1.20 1.28 1.28
�
or bunched (note 2)

� Notes:
Table 54.2 1 See Table 54.2 of BS 7671, which applies where the protective conductor is not incorpOl"ared or
lab le 54.3 bunched with cables, or for bare protecnve conductors in contact with cable covering.
� 2 See Table 54.3 of BS 7671, which applies where the protective conductor is a core in a cable or is
bunched with cables.
� J The multipliers given in Table 13 for both copper and aluminium conductors are based on a
simplification of the formula given in BS EN 60228, namely that the resistance-temperature

:a 4
coefficient is 0.004 per •cat 20 •c.
Standard devices are those described in Appendix 3 of B5 7671 (fuses to B5 1361, B5 88, B5 3036,
circuit-breakers to BS EN 60898 types B, C, and D) and BS 3871-1.
�

=a
�

=9
�

=9
:;a
==3
�

�
On-Site Guide
c The lnstirution of 8'1gineering and Technofogy
1184
::g
=a
:;a Appendix
:a
:;B Sel1edion of devices
for isolation and
switching

Table 53.-1!1 Y Table JI Summary of the functions provided by devices for isolation and
switching

:a
Device Standard Isolations Emergency Functional
switchingu switdling-5
Switching device BS EN 50428 No No Yes
BS EN 60669-1 No Yes Yes
BS EN 60669-2-1 No No Yes
=a BS
BS
EN 60669-2-2
EN 60669-2-3
No
No
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
BS EN 60669-2-4 Yes Yes Yes
BS EN 60947-3 Yes 1 Yes Yes
BS EN 60947-5-1 No Yes Yes
Contactor as EN 60947-4-1 Yes 1 Yes Yes
as EN 61095 No No Yes
=9 Circuit-breaker BS EN 60898 Yes Yes Yes
BS EN 60947-2 Yes 1 Yes Yes
BS EN 61009-1 Yes Yes Yes
RCD as EN 60947-2 Yes 1 Yes Yes
as EN 61008-1 Yes Yes Yes
as EN 61009-1 Yes Yes Yes
Isolating switch BS EN 60669-2-4 Yes Yes Yes
BS EN 60947-3 Yes Yes Yes
=9 Plug and socket-
outlet ( 32 A)
as EN 60309
IEC 6 0 8 8 4
Yes
Yes
No
No
Yes
Yes
:;a PIUg and socket-
IEC 6 0 9 0 6
BS EN 60309
Yes
Yes
No
No
Yes
No
outlet (> 32 A)
==3

On-Site Guide 1 1 8 5
e TheInstitution of EngineeringandTedlnorogy
::g Appendix
=a T Table JI continued

:;a Device Standard Isolations Emerpnq-

switching2.S

:a Device for the

connection of
:;B luminaire
Control and BS EN 60947-� 1 Yes 1 Yes Yes
protective BS EN 60947-6-2 Yes 1 Yes Yes
switching device for
equipment (CPS)
Fuse 8588 Yes No No
Device with BS EN 60669-2-1 No No Yes
semiconductors
Luminaire- 856972 Yes3 No No
supporting coupler
Pl:ugand BS 1363-1 Yes} No Yes
unswitched .socket- BS 1363-2 Yes3 No Yes
:a outlet
Plug and switched 85 1363-1 Yesl No Yes
socket-outlet 85 1363-2 Yesl No Yes
Plug and socket- BS 5733 Yes} No Yes

=a outlet
SWitched fused 85 1363-4 Yesl Yes Yes
connection unit
Unswitched fused BS 1363-4 Yes3 No No
connection unit (removal of
fuse link)
Yes No No
=9
Fuse 85 1362
Cooker c-ontrol unit BS 4177 Yes Yes Yes
switch
Notes:
I function provided if the device is suitable and marked with the symbol for isolation (see BS E
60617 identity number S00288). _ / -
537.4.2.5 2 The means of operation shall be readily aocessib!e at places whe re a danger might occur and, where
approprlate, at any additional remote pos;tion from which that danger can be removed.
J Device Is suitable fOI" oo-load isolation, Le. disconnection whilst carrying load current.

=9 537.2.2.1 4 In an illStallation forming part of a TT or IT system, isolation requires disconnection of all the live
conductors.

:;a
s 'Yes' indicates function provided; 'No' indicates function not provided.

==3

On-Site Guide
e The Institution of Engineering and Tedlnorogy
1186
::g
=a
:;a Appendix
:a
:;B Identification of
conductors

Kl Introduction
The requirements of BS 7671 were harmonized with the technical intent of CENELEC
Standard HD 384.5.514: Jdentifimtion, including 514.3: Jdentificmion of conductors (now
withdrawn).

:a Amendment No 2:2004 (AMO 14905) to BS 7671 implemented the harmonized cabte

e-ore e-olours and the alphanumeric marking of the following standards:
► HO 308 S2:2001 Identification of cores in cables and flexible cords
► BS 'EN 60445:2000 Basic and safety principles for man-machine interface,
=a ►
marking and identification of equipment and terminals and of terminations
BS EN 60446:2000 Basic and safe ty prindples for man-machine interface,
marking and identification of equipment by colours or numerals
This appendix provides guidance on marking at the interface between old and harmonized
colours, and general guidanc.e on the colours to be 1used for conductors.
British Standards for fixed and flexible cables have been harmonized (see Table K 1). BS
=9 7671 has been modified to align with these cables but also aHows other suitable methods
of marking connections by colours, e.g. tapes, sleeves or discs, or by alphanumerics, i.e.
letters and/or numbers. Methods may be m;xed within an installation.

=9
:;a
==3

On-Site Guide 1 1 8 7
e The Institutionof EngineeringandTedlnorogy
::g Appendix I K
=a Table 51
514.3.1
T Table K l Identification of conductors (Harmonized)

Function Alphanumeric Colour

:a
Protective conductors
Functional earthing conductor
a.c. power drmlt 1
Green-and-Yellow
Crea m I
:;B Line of single-phase drcuit
Neutral of single- or three-phase drcuit
L
N
Brown
Blue
Line 1 of three-phase a.c. drcuit L1 Brown
Line 2 of three-phase a.c. drcuit L2 Black
Line 3 of three-phase a.c. drcuit ------
L3 Cirey
Two-wire unearthed d.c. power circuit
Positive of twe=wire circuit L+ Brown
Negative of two-wir,e circuit _ _ _ _ _ L- Grey
Two-wlre wthecl d.c. power drmlt
Positive (of negative earthed) drcuit L+ Brown
Negative (of negative earthed) drcuit2 M Blue
Positive (of positive earthed) drcuit2 M Blue
Negative (of positive earthed) drcuit L- Cirey
:a Three-wire d.c. power drcuit
Outer positive of two-wire circuit derived
from three-wire system L+ Brown
Outer negative of two-wire circuit derived
from three-wire system L- Grey
=a Positive of three-wire circuit
Mid-wire of three-wire circuit2.3
L+
M
Brown
Blue
Negative of three-wire circuit _ _ _ _ L- Grey
Conlrol drmlts, EUf and o l har applkalions
Line conductor L Brown, Black, Red,
Oran ge, Yellow,
Violet. Cirey, Vllhite,
=9 Neutral or mid-wire4 N or M
Pink or Turquoise
Blue
Notes:
1 Power circuits include lighting circuits.
l M identifies either the mid-wire of a three-wire d,c. circuit, or the earthed conductor of a two-wire
earthed d.c. circuit.
J Only the middle wire of three-wire circuits may be earthed.
• An earthed PELV conductor is blue.

=9
:;a
==3

On-Site Guide
c The lnstirution of 8'1gineering and Technofogy
1188
::g Appendix
=a IU Addition or alteration t o an existing
:;a installation
:a K2.1 Single-phase
An addition or alteration made to a single-phase installation need not be marked at the
:;B interface provided that:
the old cables are correctly identified by the colours red for line and black for
neutral, and
ii the new cabtes are correctly identified by the colours brown for line and blue
for neutral.

Kl.J Two- or three-phase installation

Where an addition or alteration is made to a two- or a three-phase installation wired in
the old core colours with cable to die new core colours, unambiguous ;dentification is
required at the interface. Cores shall be marked as follows:
Neutral conductors
Old and new conductors: N
:a Line conductors
Old and new conductors: U, L2, L3

=a
Table 7A ,.- Table K2 Example of conductor marking at the interface for additions and
a'lterations to an a.c. installation identified with the old cable colours

Function Old conductor New conductor

Colour Marking Marking Colour
Line 1 of a.c. Red Ll Ll Brown•
Line 2 of a.c. Yellow L2 L2 Black-
=9 Line 3 of a.c. Blue L3 L3 Grey"
Neutral of a.c. Black N N Blue
Protective Green-and- Green-and-
conductor Yellow Yellow
• Three single---co,e cables with insulation of the same colour may be used if idemilied at the
terminations.

=9 KJ Switch wires in a new installation or

an addition or alteration to an existing
:;a installation
==3 Where a two-core cable with cores coloured brown and blue is used as a switch wire,
both conductors being line conductors, the blue conductor should be marked brown or
Lat its terminations.

On-Site Guide 1 1 8 9
e TheInstitution of EngineeringandTedlnorogy
::g Appendix I K
=a K4 Intermediate and two-way switch wires in a
:;a new installation or an addition or alteration
to an existing installation
:a Where a three-core cable w(th cores coloured brown, black and grey is used as a switch
wire, aU three conductors being line conductors, the black and grey conductors should
:;B be marked brown or Lat their terminations.

KS Une conductors in a new installation or

an addition or alteration to an existing
installation
Power circuit line conductors should be coloured as in Table Kl. Other line conductors
may be brown, black, red, orange, yellow, vio'let, grey, white, pink or turquoise.
In a two- or three-phase power circuit, the line conductors may all be of one of the
permitted colours, either identified L 1, l2, L3 or marked brown, black, grey at their
terminations.
:a
K& Changes to cable core colour identification
=a Table 78 T Table K&(i) Cable to BS 6004 (flat cable with bare cpc)

Cable type Old core colours New core colours

Single.core+ bare cpc Red or Black Brown or Blue
1\No-core + bare cpc Red, Black - - - - Brown, Blue
Alt two,ore + bare cpc Red, Red Brown, Brown
=9 Three-core + ba re Red, Yellow, Blue Brown, Black, G

Table 7C T Table K6(11) Standard 600/1000 V armoured cable BS 6346, BS 5467 or

BS 6724

Cable type Old core colours New core colours

Single-core Red or Black Brown or Blue
1\No-core Red, Black Brown, Blue
=9 Three-core Red, YeUow, Blue Brown, Black, Grey

:;a Four-core
F"ive-core
Red, Yellow, Blue, Black
Red, Yenow, Blue, Black,
Brown, Black, Grey, Blue
Brown, Black. Grey, Blue,
==3 Green-and-Yellow Green-and-Yellow

On-Site Guide I
c The lnstirutionof 8'1gineeringand Technofogy
''°
::g Appendix I K
=a Table 7D T Table K6(HI) 'Flexible cable to BS 6500

:;a cable type Old core colours New core colours

Two-core Brown, Blue No change
:a Three-core Brown, Blue, No change
Green-and-Yellow
:;B Four-core Black. Blue. Brown. Brown, Black, Grey,
Green-and-Yellow Green-and-Yellow
F'ive-core Black, Blue, Brown, Black, Brown, Black, Grey, Blue,
Green-and-Yellow Green-and-Yellow

K7 Addition or alteration t o a d.c. installation

Where an addition or alteration is made to a d.c. installation wired in the old core
colours with cable to the new core colours, unambiguous identification is required at the
interface. Cores should be marked as follows:
Neutral and midpoint conductors
:a Old and new conductors:
line conductors
M

Old and new conductors: Brown or Grey, or L+ or L-

=a Table 7E Y Table K 7 Examp'le o f conductor marking at the interface for additions and
alterations to a d.c. installation identified with the old cable colours
Function Old c::ondudor New conductor
------ ------
Colour Marking Marking Colour
Two-wire unearthed d.c. power circuit
=9 Positive of two-wire circuit
Negative of two-wir,e circuit
Red
Black
L+
L-
L+
L-
Brown
Grey
Two-wire wthecl cLc. pcM11r clraalt
Positive (of negative earthed) drcuit Red L+ L+
Negative (of negative earthed) drcuit Black M M Blue
Positive (of positive earthed) drcuit Black M M Blue
Negative (of positive earthed) drcuit Blue L- L- Grey
Three-wire d.c. power drcuit
Outer positive of two-wire circuit derived
=9 from three-wire system
Outer negative of two-wire circuit derived
Red L+ L+ Brown

:;a from three-wire system

Positive of three-wire circuit
Red
Red
L-
L+
L-
L+
Grey
Brown
Mid-wire of three-wire circuit Black M M Blue
==3 Negative of three-wire circuit Blue L- L- Grey

On-Site Guide 1191

e The Institutionof EngineeringandTedlnorogy
::g
=a
:;a
:a
:;B

:a

=a

=9

=9
:;a
==3

On-Site Guide
e The Institutionof EngineeringandTedlnorogy
1192
::g
=a
:;a
:a
:;B

A
Additional protection
inspection 9.2.2viHd
labelling 6.1
provision by RCD 3.4.1.1
supplementary bonding 4.7
testing 11.5
Alphanumeric identification of
Table K 1
:a
conductors
Alternative supplies, warning notice 6. 14
Automatic disconnection (ADS) 3.4. l;
3.5; 9.2.2c

=a B
Bands I and 11,segregation 7.4. 1
Basic. protection 3.4.1.1
Bath/shower 8
cubide not in bathroom 8.2
general 3.6. l iii; 3.6.3; 7.2.5iii; 8;
Table 3.4.3
=9 summary of requirements 8.1;
Tabte 8.1
underfloor heating 8.3.1
zone diagrams Figs 8.1 (i)-(iii)
Bending radii of cables Table 0 5
Bonding 4
BS 1363 socket-outlets AppxH
Building logbook Forevvord
Building Regu'lations 1.2
=9
:;a
C
Cable
commun1cations 7.4.2
==3 floors and ceilin_gs
grouping
7.3.1
7.2.1
in thermal insulation Table 7. 1(iii)

On-Site Guide 1 1 9 3
e The Institutionof EngineeringandTedlnorogy
::g
=a
:;a
:a
:;B

lengths, maximum Table 7.1 (i)

ratings Table 7.1 (ii); Appx F
selection Appx C
separation distances Tab'les 7.4.2(1),
(Ii)
supports/bends Appx D
waUs and partitions 7.3.2
Capacities
conduit Appx E
:a trunking
Ceilings, cables above
Appx E
7.3.1;
Tables 7.1 (ii), (iii)
Certificates 9.1; Appx G

=a
Charge retention, warning
tabel 6.2
Circuit protective conductors 10.3. l ;
AppxB
continuity test 10.3. l i
Circuit-breakers
application Table 7.2.7(10
short-circuit capacity Table 7.2.7 )
=9 Class I and dass II equipment 2.4.1
Appx K
Colours, cable oore
Communica,tions cables 7.4.2
Competent persons Preface;
Foreword
Conductor cross sed1onal
area Table 7.1 (Ii)
Conduit
capacities Appx E
=9 supports
Consumer unit
Table 0 3
2.25; 3.3

:;a split

with RCBOs
Figs 3.6.3 )/(ii)/
(iv)/(v)
Fig 3.6.3(iii)
==3 Controlgear
Cooker circuit
2.2.5; 6.3
AppxH
Corrosion of ea ble AppxC
On-Site Guide 1 1 9 3 a
e The Institutionof EngineeringandTedlnorogy
::g I Index

=a Current-<".arry!ng capacity Appx F

Cut-out,
:;a distributors 1.1 iii; 1.3v; 2.2.1

:a Devices, selection. of
isolation and switching AppxJ
:;B protective 7.2.7
Diagrams 6.11
Disconnection times 3.5; 7. lviii; 7.2.7i v;
AppxB
Distribution board 3.1; 6.15
Distributor (definition) 1.1
Diversity AppxA

E
Earth electrode 4.9; 4.1 O
testing W.3.5; Fig 10.3.5.2
Earth fault loop impedance 1.1 iv; 13iv;
3.6. 1i; 7.2.5; 7.2.6;

:a Table 7.1 (i) note 1;

AppxB
testing 9.3.1; 10.3.6
'Earthing and bonding 4
conductor size 4.4
=a equipotential bonding,
supplementary 4.6-4.8; Table 4.6
gas service pipe 4.4
generator reference 2.4.3
high protective conductor current 7.5
label Fig 6.5
oil service pipe 4.4
=9 TN-C-S
TN-S
Fig 2.1 (i); Table 4.4W
Fig 2.1 (ii); Table 4.4(i)
TT Fig 2.1 (iii); Table 4..4(ii)
typical arrangements 4.11
water service pipe 4.4
Electric shock, protection against 3.4; 8.1
Electrical Installation Certificates 9.1;
AppxG
Electricity at Work Regulations 10.1
Emergenc:y switching 53; Table Jl
=9 En ergy--efficient Iighting 1.2.1

:;a
External cables and
telecommunicatio11S Table 7.4.20)

==3 F
Fault current
prospective 1.3iii; 7.2.7

On-Site Guide
e The Institutionof EngineeringandTedlnorogy
1194
::g I Index

=a protection 3.3

:;a
Fault protection 3.4.1.2
FELV 10.3.3vi; Table 10.3.3
Final. circuits 7
:a standard
Fire safety requirements
7.2; Appx H
1.2.1

:;B Firefighter's switch

Aashover
5.5
3.7.1
Floating earth (portable generator) 2.4.1;
Fig 2.4.1
Floors 7.3.1
Functional switching 5.4; Table J1
Functional testing l 0.3.9
Furniture with electrical supply 7.6
Fuses 2.2.5; Table 7.2.7(1)
distributor's 1.1 iii; 2.2.1

,G
Garages 1.1a
Gas ;nstallations 2.3; 4.3; 4.4 ; 7.4.3

:a Generators, portable 2.4; Figs 2.4.1 /

2.4.2/2.4.3(i), (ii)

H
Height of overhead wiring Table D2
=a Height of switches, socket--0utlets AppxH
High protective conductor current
earthing 7.5
labelling at D8 Fig 6.15
HSE Guidance Note GS 38 10.1

=9 Identification of conductors
Immersed equipment
Appx K
Table 3.4.3
Immersion heaters AppxH
Induction loops (hearing) 7.4.4
lnfomiation 1.3
lnittal testing 10
Inspection and testing 9
checklists 9.2.2; 9.3.1
label for periodic Fig 6.10
=9 report
schedules
AppxG
AppxG

:;a lnstaHation
considerations
diagram
7.3
6.11
==3 method
Ins ulation resistance
7.1
93. l ; 10.3.3

1194a
minimum values Table 10.3.3

On-Site Guide
e The Institutionof EngineeringandTedlnorogy
::g I Index

=a lntema'I cables and

telecommunications Table 7.4.2(ii)
:;a Isolation
identification
5
6.8
:a multiple devices
requirements
6.9
5.1.1
switch 2.2.3; 2.2.4; 2.2.S
:;B switchgear 5.1 .2; Table J 1
J
Joists/ceilings 7.3. 1; Fig 7.3.1;
Tab'les 7.1 Oi), Oii)
L
Labelling 6
Lighting cirmits Table 7.1 (i); 7.2.3; 7.4.4
Load estimation A_ppxA
Logbook, building Foreword
Loop impedance see Earth fault loop
impedance

:a M
Manual, operation and
maintenanc,e Foreword
Maximum demand AppxA

=a Mechanical maintenance,
switching for 5.2
Meter 2.2.2
Meter tails 2.2.3
Mineral insulated cable Table C l
Minor Works Certificate AppxG

N
=9 Nomina'I, voltage 1.1 ii; 6.4
Non-sheathed cables 3.4.1.1
Non-standard colours 6.13
Notices 6
0
Off-peak supplies 1. l a
Ohmmeter 10.3.1
Outbuildings 1. l a
=9 Overhead lines/wiring
Overload protection
3.7.2.1; Appx D
3.2
:;a Overvoltages
p
3.7.2

==3 Part P
PELV
1.2.1
3.4.3; 7.3. 1v; 7.3.2vi; 9.2.2;
10.3.3v; Table 10.3.3

On-Site Guide 1 1 9 5
e The Institutionof EngineeringandTedlnorogy
::g I Index

=a Periodic inspection Appx G

:;a
Phase sequenoe check 10.3.8
Photovoltaic systems 6.16
Plastic services 4.5; 4.8
:a Polarity testing
Portable generators
9.3.1; 10.2; 10.3.4
2.4

:;B Prospective fault current

measurement
7.2.7
9.3.1; 10.2.2; 10.3.7
Protective device, choice 7.2.7
Proximity to communications cables 7.4.2

R
Radial circuits Table 7.1 (,); Appx H
testing 10.3.1
Rated short.,cirruit capacities Table 72.70)
RCBOs 3.6.3c; 7.2.6
RCDs 2.2.5; 3.6; 7.2.4;
9.2.2d
diagram of operation Fig 11.0
integral test device 11.6

:a labelling
rnultipole
6.12
11.7
om;ssion of 3.6.2; 7.2.5
requirements 7.2.5
testing 11
=a Reports
Residual rurrent devices
Appx G
see RCDs
Resistance of conductors Appx I
Ring circuits Table 7.1 (i); Appx H
spurs 7.2.2; H2.4
testing 10.3.2

=9 s
Sdiedu!es 9.1; Appx G
Scope Preface; 1. 1
Se,lection
ea bles Appx C
devices for isolation etc. Appx .I
S5tV 3.4.3; 73. lv; 7.3.2vi;
9.2.2; 10.3.3v;
Table 10.3.3

=9 Separation of gas pipework 2.3; Fig 2.3;

7.4.3

:;a Short-circuit capacity

Shower
Socket-oudets
Table 7.2.7(i)
7.25; 8

==3 final cira.iits with high PE current 7.5.3

general 7.2.2; Appx H
minimum number 1.2.2; Tab'le H7

On-Site Guide 1 1 9 5 a
e The Institutionof EngineeringandTedlnorogy
::g I Index

=a Socket-outlets - contd
protection by RCD 3.6.lii
:;a SPDs
decision flow chart
3.7
Fig 3.7.2.2
:a conductor critical length
connection methods
3.7.5
3.7.6
selection 3.7.4; Fig 3.7.4
:;B types 3.7.3
Split consumer unit Figs 3.6.3(1)/(ii)/
(iv)/(v)
Spurs 7.2.2; H2.4
Standard circuits Appx H
Stud walls Tables 7.1 (TI), 7.1 (ilQ, F6
Supplementary equipotential
bonding 4.6-4.8; Table 4.6
Supplier (definition) 1.1
Supply
frequency 1.li
nominal voltage 1.1 ii
Support, methods of Appx D
see SPDs
:a
Surge protective devices
Surges
lightning 3.7.1; 3.7.2
switching 3.7.1
Switch g e ar 5.1.2; 6.3
=a Switching 5

T
Tails (consumer) 2.2.3; Figs 2. 1(i)-(iii)
Telecommunications 'lines 3.7.1
Testing 9
instruments 10.1
procedures 10.3
=9 results schedule Appx G
sequence 10.2
checklist 9.3.1
Thermal insulation Table 7.1 (ii ; Appx F
Thermoplastics/thermosetting,
applications Table C l
TN system
conduit it1StaHations 3.6.3a

=9
:;a
==3

On-Site Guide
e The Institutionof EngineeringandTedlnorogy
1196
::g I Index

=a disconnection times
TN-S system
3.5.2

:;a earthing arrangement

typical external impedance
Fig 2.1 (H)
7.1
:a TN-C-S system
earthing arrangement Fig 2.l(i)
typical external impedance 7.1
:;B Toxic substa,nces 1.2.1
Trunking
capacities AppxE
supports Table D4
TT system
disconnection times 3.5.3
conduit installations 3.6.3b
earthing arrangement Fig 2.1 (iii)
general 7.1; 7.2.6; 10.3.5.1
Two-way switching 7.4.4; Fig 7.4.4

u
Underfloor heating 8.3

:a Unexpected nominal voltage,

warning of 6.4

V
Ventilation 1.2.1
=a Voltage drop
calculation AppxF
general 7.1; 7.2.3;
Table 7. l (1) note 1
inspection 9.2.2
verification 10.3.10

=9 w
Walls and partitions 7.3.2
Water heaters AppxH

z
Zones
bathrooms 8.1
cables in walls 7.3.2v; 9.2.2

=9
:;a
==3

On-Site Guide 1 1 9 6 a
e The Institutionof EngineeringandTedlnorogy
 1 n Wiring Regulatlons and associated publlcatlons
The IET prepares regulations for the safety of electrical installations, the IET Wiring Regulations
(BS 7671: Requirements for Electrical Installations), which are the standard for the UK and
many other countries. The IET also offers guidance around SS 7671 in the form of the
Gl.Jidance Notes series and the E\ectrician1s Guides as well as running training courses and
a technical helpline. The Wiring Regulations and guidance are now also available as e-books
through Wiring Regulations Digital (see overleaf).
IET Members receive discounts across IET publications 1 courses and e-book packages.

Requirements for Electrical lnstallaUons Guidance Note 5: Protection Against

IET Wiring Regulatfons 17th Edition Electric Shock. 6th Edition
(BS 7671:2008 incorporating Amendment Order book PWG5171B Paperback 2012
No 1:1011) ISBN: 978+84919-279-8 £27
Order book PWR1701B Paperback 2011
ISBN: 978+84919-269·9 £8,0 Guidance Note 6: Protection Against
Overcurrent, 6th Edition
On-Site Guide BS 7671:1008(:2011) Order book PING61718 Paperback 2012
Order book PWG017l B Paperback 2011 ISBN: 978-l-84919-281-1 £27
ISBN: 978-1-84919-287-3 £:24
Guidance Note 7: Special .Locations,
4th Edition
IET Guidance Notes Order book PING71718 Paperback 2012
The IET also publishes a series of Guidance ISBN: 978-l-84919-283-5 £27
Notes enlarging upon and amplifying the
particular requirements of a part of the IET Guidance Note 8: Earthing & Bonding.
Wiring Regulations. 2nd Edition
Order book PWG8171B Paperback 2012
Guidance Note 1: Selection & Ere ct ion, ISBN: 978+84919-285-9 £27
6th Edition
Order book PWG H 71 B Paperback 2012
ISBN: 978-1-84919-27 l-2 £32

Guidance Note 2: Isolation & .Switching, Eledrician's Guides

6th Edition Electrician's Guide to the Building
Order book PWG2171B Paperback 2012 Regulations Part. P, 3rd Edition
ISBN: 978-1-84919-273-6 £27 Order book P\NGP171B Paperback 2012
ISBN: 978+84919 289 7 £24
Cuidanc:e Note 3: Inspection & Testing,
6th Edition Electrical Installation Design Guide
Order book PWG3171B Paperback 2012 Order book PWR05030 Paperback 2008
ISBN: 978-1-84919-275-0 £:27 ISBN: 978-0-86341-550-0 £2l
To be updated 2012
Guidance Note 4: Protection Against Fire,
6th Edition Electrician's Guide to Emergency Lighting
Order book PWG4171B Paperback 2012 Order book PINR05020 Paperback 2009
ISBN: 978-1-84919-277-4 £27 ISBN: 978-0 86341-551-7 £22

continues overleaf ►
::g
=a Electrician's Cuide to Fire Detection and
Alarm Systems
:;a Order book PVi/R05130 Paperback 2010
ISBN: 978-1-84919-130-2 £2'2
:a For more information and to buy the
tET Wiring R.egulations and associated
:;B guidance, visit www�theiet.org/electrical

Wiring Regulations Digital

The IET Wiring Regulati.ons and associated
guidance are now available in e-book format
You can search and 11nk within and between
books, make your own notes and print pages
from the books. There are two packages
available: Eledrical Training Courses
Wiring Regulations Digital: Domestic We offer a comprehensive range of technical
BS 7671 :2008(2011)*, the On-Site Guide, training at many levels, serving your training
Guidance Notes 1 & 3 and the Ele.ctridan's and career development requirements as and
when they arise.
:a
Guide to the Building Regulations. E175 + VAT
Wiring Regulations Digital: Industrial
Courses range from Electrical Basics to
Electrical Installation Design with options of
BS 7671 :2008(2011)*, the On-Site Guide,
Gity & Guilds and BTEC Awards.
Guidance Notes 1-8, the Electr[cian's Guide
to the Building Regulations and the Electrical You can view our public programme of 1-3 day

=a Installation Design Guide.

Find out more and order at

£350 + VAT courses and associated qualifications online or
request a brochure.

www.theiet.org/d igital�regs ln-�ompany training

All of our standard courses can be arranged
• You will initia11y receive the l71h Edition ve1sion on your premises or we can tailor a bespoke
of each of these e-books ,and any published course exactly to your needs.
Amendment No 1 titles to date. Your package will be
updated for free to each new Amendment No 1 title The benefits of our in-company training
=9 upon publication. include:
■ Money saved on travel and
accommodation
■ Reduced time away from the
workplace
■ A motivated and up-skilled workforce
■ Courses that match the skills and
abilities of your staff
■ A flexible course offering for small or
larger groups
=9 ■ An optional Oty & Guilds/STEC Award.

:;a
Visit www.theiet.or:g/courses�pub f•or
information and to book a course. To
discuss your training requirements,
==3 particularly for on-site groups, please
contact one •Ofour advisors on 01438
767289.
IEr Order Form
How to order Detai Is
B Y PHONE: I N,J,nf' I
+44 (0)1438 767328
I
I
I Jotll ,
B Y FAX:
[ Colnpani I Oil tu�on
44 (0)1438 767375
IBY P O S T : [ Address
I
I
T h e lnsbtulion o f
Engineering Cour'l;ry,

I
I Poslo.-oe
a n d Technology, Fa>
I Tel:
PO Box 96,
I Em.1 I
I
Stevenage
SGl 2SD, UK I Meml>Prshp Ng (tf lns:tttu.!00 member):
ONLINE:
w,vw.the,el.org/electrical Ordering i·nformati on
80011 No. P r i " (_£)

IIIF'Oll,._TIOII StCV!llrt
l'I a, nrt ,i,1 ,oor <,;im
i br
.m..... TI 1E1 V :tie � al w u i
� Qet.li5 and � e a , : ,
l f l f � , ; o ..,-, W � Y 111d n n:(
p m ; � einad lrar{.)CtOffi

frtt�w.. tile U • OW..OC

U� <Europe) .xld CS 0 0 IOI �t lllie
311d C2 0 0 I.:< t.xtl adi:JC;C)rli! bOOk.
R e i OI W c M add C7 50 !Cl'� �rll
boc • a r d C 20 0 lor e".Xh ac:111,•.:rol
bcol 9oo•UIIIMscnt ,3airrro�
Couroet ,a:es �c .-,a b Q'l r � .
l ) I M t c., .-44 r0> !.t38 7 w l 2 8
C I U N J ! � J I C J Q L O r li::<1�•1$.

• ' P I � DISCIUlt:.: T1 - c a M : t be TOIII

used rn C � ! t O O II ltt �11)' O l � 1£1

Payment methods
O CDUn' 0 !f"I
T
GUAR.Ulffl0 ltli;K Of IEllJlllle

0
"1 " ' ! i d )'OIi • �" ' ' "

□ □□□□□OJ □□m□
IJuc, . l l • " ' . ; C r o l l , '011 'A ;;() d l r , Oydllolllt •"" ,ltM: . . � - t . l [ - , . . 1 , , l l - . : ,
lor a Ii.I refund Plaase lllCluoo a COp\'
.:0:0
□ □ □
11,a--CJ<f,

O A U PlGTCC'IDt:
G
□rn□
n,.
□□□□ □□□□
, n m l t r I ,I ,ou prowide � h i ¥.-. M,:•�., """'= r.,,..., l:sutl'll
I T ,. be I t Id la t.1'111,re � � , t c
1'0.J ,,,t priOdut:ti and , c o tl\ll v.-.i ,c, £, ,r,Orb, CW�"ltCok
' rnc,ct �llf � Thi$ ;my tnCldc "
llO
l"
Q
l' J

l1e i;irorrcta, ol s;roofit I T "1)duds

¥Id 'ler\'>:\'S � � andltr elec.:rDntc
me¥1S B y � us 111th yr:,J1 1"!11� Sc.n'f."' Dl6!
: i . 1 � \ and/cY C'llObile t d e �
ll!J"'tief � 'll'l!e tn.t � m1y (orb:. Ca
od1
Y1\lC
m
'i'l"
1
:,,01; t,y cltCtrinc me1'ls.. You a n
� ltll\ p1�cnoe totrJ:ime d
c
,.-
by'A!,.�MW 1 � " - 0 < �
•n F'o!A,,.-
I
I ec.,,i,,

I €to• I
::g
=a Membership
PacSsionate about your career? Beoome an IET Member and benefit from a range of benefits
from the industry experts. As co-publishers of the IET Wiring Regulations, we can assist you in
:;a demonstrating your te-chnical professional oornpetence and support you with all your training and
career development needs.
:a The Institution of Engineering and Technology is the professional home for Hfe for engineers and
technicians. With over 150,000 members in 127 countries, the IET is the largest professional body
:;B of engineers in Europe.
Joining the IET and having acces"S to tailored products and services will become invaluable for your
career and can be your first step towards professional qualifications.
You can take advantage •of...

■ a 35% disc<Junt on BS 7671 :2008(2011) the IET Wiring Regulations, associated guidance
publications and Wiring Regulations Digital
■ career support services to assist throughout your profess[onal development
■ dedicated training courses, seminars and events covering a wide range of subjects and
skills
■ an array of specialist online communities
■ professional development events covering a wide range of topics from essential business
skills to time management, health and safety, life skills and many more
■
:a
access to over 100 Local networks around the world
■ live lET.tv event footage
■ instant on-line access to over 70,000 books, 3,000 periodic.als and full-text collections
of electronic artides through the Virtual library, wherever you are in the world.

=a
Join online today: www.theiet.org/join or contact our membership and customer service
centre on +44 (0)1438 765678.
Dedicated Website
Everything that you need from the IET is now in one place. Ensure that you are up·to date with BS
7671, find guidance and book training courses by visiting our dedicated website for the electrical
industry.
Catch up with the latest forum discussions, download the Wiring Regulations forms (as listed in BS
=9 7671) and read articles from the IET's free Wiring Matters magazine.
The IETWiring Regula,tions BS 7671:2008(2011) and all associated guidance publications can be
bought directly from the site. You can even pre-order titles that have not yet been published at
discounted prices.
www theiet.org/electrical

----
-=- - -
=9
:;a
==3
 Updates
Fifth edition (incorporating Amendment No 1 to BS 7671 :2008) September 2011
Version 5.0le 21/10/2011
The following changes have be,en made:
I. A number of links were "landing" slightly misaligned - they have b e e ncorrected.
2. The Index has been converted from two columns into a single column m order to make
the electronic use easier, all links have been remade.
3. Previous contents entry "Tables & Figs", which was a combined list, has been divided
into two lists - "Table of figures., and "Table of tables", at the req uest of users.

The Hst below is provided to help trainers and those who wish to update earlier printed
versions of the book:
1. Page 83, Fig 8. l(i), Plan view, partition added at end of bath
2. Page 144, Table F4(i), Column 4 Row 4 mm2, value changed from "2" to "32"
3.. Page 196, Stud Walls, changed to "Tables 7. l(ii), 7.2(iii), F6"

Please, send. any suggestions for improvements to [email protected].